505785

Hitachi CP-X8160 Handleiding

1
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/307
Pagina verder
1
Projector
CP-X8150/CP-X8160/CP-WX8240/
CP-WX8255/CP-SX8350/CP-WU8440/
CP-WU8450
User's Manual (detailed)
Operating Guide
Thank you for purchasing this projector.
►Before using this product, please read all manuals for this
product. Be sure to read Safety Guide rst. After reading them, store them in a
safe place for future reference.
WARNING
• The information in this manual is subject to change without notice.
• The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in
this manual.
• The reproduction, transfer or copy of all or any part of this document is not
permitted without express written consent.
NOTE
Trademark acknowledgment
Various symbols are used in this manual. The meanings of these symbols are
described below.
About this manual
WARNING
CAUTION
This symbol indicates information that, if ignored, could possibly
result in personal injury or even death due to incorrect handling.
This symbol indicates information that, if ignored, could possibly
result in personal injury or physical damage due to incorrect handling.
Please refer to the pages written following this symbol.
• Mac
®
is a registered trademark of Apple Inc.
• Windows
®
, DirectDraw
®
and Direct3D
®
are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
in the U.S. and/or other countries.
• VESA and DDC are trademarks of the Video Electronics Standard Association.
•
HDMI
TM
, the HDMI logo, and High-Denition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered
trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries.
•
Trademark PJLink is a trademark applied for trademark rights in
Japan, the United States of America and other countries and areas.
• Blu-ray Disc
TM
and Blu-ray
TM
are trademarks of Blu-ray Disc Association.
• DICOM
®
is the registered trademark of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association
for its standards publications relating to digital communications of medical information.
All other trademarks are the properties of their respective owners.
NOTICE This entry notices of fear of causing trouble.
1
About The Symbols
Various symbols are used in this manual, the user’s manual and on the product
itself to ensure correct usage, to prevent danger to the user and others, and to
prevent property damage. The meanings of these symbols are described below.
It is important that you read these descriptions thoroughly and fully understand
the contents.
Projector
User's Manual - Safety Guide
Typical Symbols
This symbol indicates an additional warning (including cautions). An
illustration is provided to clarify the contents.
This symbol indicates a prohibited action. The contents will be clearly
indicated in an illustration or nearby (the symbol to the left indicates that
disassembly is prohibited).
This symbol indicates a compulsory action. The contents will be clearly
indicated in an illustration or nearby (the symbol to the left indicates that
the power plug should be disconnected from the power outlet).
Thank you for purchasing this projector.
NOTE
• The information in this manual is subject to change without notice.
• The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in
this manual.
• The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or contents is not
permitted without express written authority.
WARNING •
Before using, read these user's manuals of this projector to ensure
correct usage through understanding. After reading, store them in a safe place for
future reference. Incorrect handling of this product could possibly result in personal injury
or physical damage. The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any damage caused
by mishandling that is beyond normal usage defined in these manuals of this projector.
WARNING
This symbol indicates information that, if ignored, could
possibly result in personal injury or even death due to
incorrect handling.
CAUTION
This symbol indicates information that, if ignored, could
result possibly in personal injury or physical damage
due to incorrect handling.
Read this Safety Guide first.
2
Safety Precautions
WARNING
Never use the projector if a problem should occur.
Abnormal operations such as smoke, strange odor, no image, no sound,
excessive sound, damaged casing or elements or cables, penetration of
liquids or foreign matter, etc. can cause a fire or electrical shock.
In such case, immediately turn off the power switch and then disconnect the
power plug from the power outlet. After making sure that the smoke or odor
has stopped, contact your dealer. Never attempt to make repairs yourself
because this could be dangerous.
• The power outlet should be close to the projector and easily accessible.
Use special caution for children and pets.
Incorrect handling could result in fire, electrical shock, injury, burn or vision
problem.
Use special caution in households where children and pets are present.
Do not insert liquids or foreign object.
Penetration of liquids or foreign objects could result in fire or electrical shock.
Use special caution in households where children are present.
If liquids or foreign object should enter the projector, immediately turn off the
power switch, disconnect the power plug from the power outlet and contact
your dealer.
• Do not place the projector near water (ex. a bathroom, a beach, etc.).
• Do not expose the projector to rain or moisture. Do not place the projector
outdoors.
• Do not place flower vases, pots, cups, cosmetics, liquids such as water, etc
on or around the projector.
• Do not place metals, combustibles, etc on or around the projector.
• To avoid penetration of foreign objects, do not put the projector into a case
or bag together with any thing except the accessories of the projector,
signal cables and connectors.
Never disassemble and modify.
The projector contains high voltage components. Modification and/or disassembly of
the projector or accessories could result in fire or electrical shock.
• Never open the cabinet.
• Ask your dealer to repair and clean insider.
Do not give the projector any shock or impact.
If the projector should be shocked and/or broken, it could result in an injury,
and continued use could result in fire or electrical shock.
If the projector is shocked, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect
the power plug from the power outlet and contact your dealer.
Do not place the projector on an unstable surface.
If the projector should be dropped and/or broken, it could result in an injury,
and continued use could result in fire or electrical shock.
• Do not place the projector on an unstable, slant or vibrant surface such as
a wobbly or inclined stand.
• Use the caster brakes placing the projector on a stand with casters.
• Do not place the projector in the side up position, the lens up position or
the lens down position.
• In the case of a ceiling installation or the like, contact your dealer before
installation.
Disconnect the
plug from the
power outlet.
Do not
disassemble.
3
WARNING
Be cautious of High temperatures of the projector.
High temperatures are generated when the lamp is lit. It could result in fire or
burn. Use special caution in households where children are present.
Do not touch about the lens, air fans and ventilation openings during use or
immediately after use, to prevent a burn. Take care of ventilation.
• Keep a space of 30 cm or more between the sides and other objects such
as walls.
• Do not place the projector on a metallic table or anything weak in heat.
• Do not place anything about the lens, air fans and ventilation openings of
the projector.
• Never block the air fan and ventilation openings.
• Do not cover the projector with a tablecloth, etc.
• Do not place the projector on a carpet or bedding.
Never look through the lens or openings when the lamp is on.
The powerful light could adversely affect vision.
Use special caution in households where children are present.
Use only the correct power cord and the correct power outlet.
Incorrect power supply could result in fire or electrical shock.
• Use only the correct power outlet depending on the indication on the
projector and the safety standard.
• The enclosed power cord must be used depending on the power outlet to
be used.
Be cautious of the power cord connection.
Incorrect connection of the power cord could result in fire or electrical shock.
• Do not touch the power cord with a wet hand.
• Check that the connecting portion of the power cord is clean (with no dust),
before using. Use a soft and dry cloth to clean the power plug.
• Insert the power plug into a power outlet firmly. Avoid using a loose,
unsound outlet or contact failure.
Be sure to connect with ground wire.
Connect the ground terminal of AC inlet of this unit with the ground terminal
provided at the building using the correct power cord; otherwise, fire or
electric shock can result.
• Don’t take the core of power cord away.
Safety Precautions (continued)
Surely connect
the ground wire.
4
WARNING
Be careful in handling the light source lamp.
The projector uses a high-pressure mercury glass lamp made of glass.
The lamp can break with a loud bang, or burn out. When the bulb bursts,
it is possible for shards of glass to fly into the lamp housing, and for gas
containing mercury to escape from the projector’s vent holes.
Please carefully read the section “Lamp”.
Be careful in handling the power cord and external connection
cables.
If you keep using a damaged the power cord or cables, it can cause a fire
or electrical shock. Do not apply too much heat, pressure or tension to the
power cord and cables.
If the power cord or cables is damaged (exposed or broken core wires, etc.),
contact your dealer.
• Do not place the projector or heavy objects on the power cord and cables.
Also, do not place a spread, cover, etc, over them because this could result
in the inadvertent placing of heavy objects on the concealed power cord or
cables.
• Do not pull the power cord and cables. When connecting and
disconnecting the power cord or cables, do it with your hand holding the plug
or connector.
• Do not place the cord near the heater.
• Avoid bending the power cord sharply.
• Do not attempt to work on the power cord.
Be careful in handling the battery of the remote control.
Incorrect handling of the battery could result in fire or personal injury. The
battery may explode if not handled properly.
• Keep the battery away from children and pets. If swallowed consult a
physician immediately for emergency treatment.
• Do not allow the battery in a fire or water.
• Avoid fire or high-temperature environment.
• Do not hold the battery with the metallic tweezers.
• Keep the battery in a dark, cool and dry play.
• Do not short circuit the battery.
• Do not recharge, disassemble or solder the battery.
• Do not give the battery a physical impact.
• Use only the battery specified in the other manual of this projector.
• Make sure the plus and minus terminals are correctly aligned when loading
the battery.
• If you observe a leakage of the battery, wipe out the flower and then
replace the battery. If the flower adheres your body or clothes, rinse well with
water.
• Obey the local laws on disposing the battery.
Safety Precautions (continued)
5
Safety Precautions (continued)
CAUTION
Be careful in moving the projector.
Neglect could result in an injury or damage.
• Do not move the projector during use. Before moving, disconnect the
power cord and all external connections, and close the slide lens door or
attach the lens cap.
• Avoid any impact or shock to the projector.
• Do not drag the projector.
• For moving the projector, use the enclosed case or bag if provided.
Do not put anything on top of the projector.
Placing anything on the projector could result in loss of balance or falling,
and cause an injury or damage. Use special caution in households where
children are present.
Do not attach anything other than specified things to the projector.
Neglect could result in an injury or damage.
• Some projector has a screw thread in a lens part. Do not attach anything
other than specified options (such as conversion lens) to the screw thread.
Avoid a smoky, humid or dusty place.
Placing the projector in a smoke, a highly humid, dusty place, oily soot or
corrosive gas could result in fire or electrical shock.
• Do not place the projector near a smoky, humid or dusty place (ex.
a smoking space, a kitchen, a beach, etc.). Do not place the projector
outdoors.
• Do not use a humidifier near the projector.
Take care of the air filter to normal ventilate.
The air filter should be cleaned periodically. If the air filter becomes clogged
by dust or the like, internal temperature rises and could cause malfunction.
The projector may display the message such as “CHECK THE AIR FLOW”
or turn off the projector, to prevent the internal heat level rising.
• When the indicators or a message prompts you to clean the air filter, clean
the air filter as soon as possible.
• If the soiling will not come off the air filter, or it becomes damaged, replace
the air filter.
• Use the air filter of the specified type only. Please order the air filter
specified in the other manual of this projector to your dealer.
• When you replace the lamp, replace also the air filter. The air filter may be
attached when you buy a replacement lamp for this projector.
• Do not turn on the projector without air filter.
Avoid a high temperature environment.
The heat could have adverse influence on the cabinet of the projector and
other parts. Do not place the projector, the remote control and other parts in
direct sunlight or near a hot object such as heater, etc.
Avoid Magnetism.
Manufacture strongly recommends to avoid any magnetic contact that is not
shielded or protected on or near the projector itself. (ie.,. Magnetic Security
Devices, or other projector accessory that contains magnetic material that has not
been provided by the manufacture etc.) Magnetic objects may cause interruption
of the projector's internal mechanical performance which may interfere with cooling
fans speed or stopping, and may cause the projector to completely shut down
.
6
Safety Precautions (continued)
NOTE
Do not give the remote control any physical impact.
A physical impact could cause damage or malfunction of the remote control.
• Take care not to drop the remote control.
• Do not place the projector or heavy objects on the remote control.
Take care of the lens.
• Close the slide lens door or attach the lens cap to prevent the lens surface being
scratched when the projector is not used.
• Do not touch the lens to prevent fog or dirt of the lens that cause deterioration of display
quality.
• Use commercially available lens tissue to clean the lens (used to clean cameras,
eyeglasses, etc.). Be careful not to scratch the lens with hard objects.
Take care of the cabinet and the remote control.
Incorrect care could have adverse influence such as discoloration, peeling paint, etc.
• Use a soft cloth to clean the cabinet and control panel of the projector and the remote
control. When excessively soiled dilute a neutral detergent in water, wet and wring out the
soft cloth and afterward wipe with a dry soft cloth. Do not use undiluted detergent directly.
• Do not use an aerosol sprays, solvents, volatile substances or abrasive cleaner.
• Before using chemical wipes, be sure to read and observe the instructions.
• Do not allow long-term close contact with rubber or vinyl.
About bright spots or dark spots.
Although bright spots or dark spots may appear on the screen, this is a unique characteristic of
liquid crystal displays, and such do not constitute or imply a machine defect.
Be careful of printing of the LCD panel.
If the projector continues projecting a still image, inactive images or 16:9 aspect images in
case of 4:3 panel, etc., for long time, the LCD panel might possibly be printed.
CAUTION
Remove the power cord for complete separation.
• For safety purposes, disconnect the power cord if the projector is not to be
used for prolonged periods of time.
• Before cleaning, turn off and unplug the projector. Neglect could result in
fire or electrical shock.
Ask your dealer to cleaning inside of the projector about every
year.
Accumulations of dust inside the projector cause result in fire or malfunction.
Cleaning inside is more effective if performed before every humid periods
such as rainy season.
• Do not clean inside yourself because it is dangerous.
Disconnect the
plug from the
power outlet.
7
Safety Precautions (continued)
NOTE
About consumables.
Lamp, LCD panels, polarizors and other optical components, and air filter and cooling fans
have a different lifetime in each. These parts may need to be replaced after a long usage
time.
• This product isn’t designed for continuous use of long time. In the case of continuous use
for 6 hours or more, or use for 6 hours or more every day (even if it isn’t continuous), or
repetitious use, the lifetime may be shortened, and these parts may need to be replaced
even if one year has not passed since the beginning of using.
• Any inclining use beyond the adjustment range explained in these user’s manuals may
shorten the lifetimes of the consumables.
Before turning on the power, make the projector cool down adequately.
After turning the projector off, pushing the restart switch or interrupting of the power supply,
make the projector cool down adequately. Operation in a high temperature state of the
projector causes a damage of the electrode and un-lighting of the lamp.
Avoid strong rays.
Any strong ray (such as direct rays of the sun or room lighting) onto the remote control
sensors could invalidate the remote control.
Avoid radio interference.
Any interfering radiation could cause disordered image or noises.
• Avoid radio generator such as a mobile telephone, transceiver, etc. around the projector.
About displaying characteristic.
The display condition of the projector (such as color, contrast, etc.) depends on
characteristic of the screen, because the projector uses a liquid crystal display panel. The
display condition can differ from the display of CRT.
• Do not use a polarized screen. It can cause red image.
Turn the power on/off in right order.
To prevent any trouble, turn on/off the projector in right order mentioned below unless
specifying.
• Power on the projector before the computer or video tape recorder.
• Power off the projector after the computer or video tape recorder.
Take care not to fatigue your eyes.
Rest the eyes periodically.
Set the sound volume at a suitable level to avoid bothering other people.
• It is better to keep the volume level low and close the windows at night to protect the
neighborhood environment.
Connecting with notebook computer
When connecting with notebook computer, set to valid the RGB external image output
(setting CRT display or simultaneous display of LCD and CRT).
Please read instruction manual of the notebook for more information.
8
• If the lamp should break (it will make a loud bang when it does), unplug
the power cord from the outlet, and make sure to request a replacement
lamp from your local dealer. Note that shards of glass could damage the
projector’s internals, or cause injury during handling, so please do not try to
clean the projector or replace the lamp yourself.
• If the lamp should break (it will make a loud bang when it does), ventilate
the room well, and make sure not to breathe the gas that comes out of the
projector vents, or get it in your eyes or mouth.
• Before replacing the lamp, make sure the power switch is off and the
power cable is not plugged in, then wait at least 45 minutes for the lamp to
cool sufficiently. Handling the lamp while hot can cause burns, as well as
damaging the lamp.
Lamp
The projector uses a high-pressure mercury glass lamp. The lamp can break with a
loud bang, or burn out, if jolted or scratched, handled while hot, or worn over time.
Note that each lamp has a different lifetime, and some may burst or burn out soon after
you start using them. In addition, when the bulb bursts, it is possible for shards of
glass to fly into the lamp housing, and for gas containing mercury to escape from the
projector’s vent holes.
About disposal of a lamp • This product contains a mercury lamp; do not put in trash.
Dispose of in accord with environmental laws.
For lamp recycling, go to www.lamprecycle.org. (in USA)
For product disposal, contact your local government agency or www.eiae.org (in the US)
or www.epsc.ca (in Canada).
For more information, call your dealer.
• Do not open the lamp cover while the projector is suspended from above.
This is dangerous, since if the lamp’s bulb has broken, the shards will
fall out when the cover is opened. In addition, working in high places is
dangerous, so ask your local dealer to have the lamp replaced even if the
bulb is not broken.
• Do not use the projector with the lamp cover removed. At the lamp
replacing, make sure that the screws are screwed in firmly. Loose screws
could result in damage or injury.
• Use the lamp of the specified type only.
• If the lamp breaks soon after the first time it is used, it is possible that
there are electrical problems elsewhere besides the lamp. If this happens,
contact your local dealer or a service representative.
• Handle with care: jolting or scratching could cause the lamp bulb to burst
during use.
• Using the lamp for long periods of time, could cause it dark, not to light up
or to burst. When the pictures appear dark, or when the color tone is poor,
please replace the lamp as soon as possible. Do not use old (used) lamps;
this is a cause of breakage.
WARNING
HIGH VOLTAGE HIGH TEMPERATURE HIGH PRESSURE
Disconnect
the plug from
the power
outlet
9
Regulatory Notices
FCC Statement Warning
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
WARNING: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed
to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation.
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference
to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur
in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio
or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on,
the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:
- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver
is connected.
- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
INSTRUCTIONS TO USERS: This equipment complies with the requirements of FCC
(Federal Communication Commission) equipment provided that the following conditions
are met. Some cables have to be used with the core set. Use the accessory cable or a
designated-type cable for the connection. For cables that have a core only at one end,
connect the core to the projector.
CAUTION: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For the Customers in CANADA
NOTICE: This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Warranty And After-Service
Unless seen any abnormal operations (mentioned with the first paragraph of
WARNING in this manual), when a problem occurs with the equipment, first refer to the
“Troubleshooting” section of the “Operating Guide”, and run through the suggested checks.
If this does not resolve the problem contact your dealer or service company. They will tell
you what warranty condition is applied.
2
Contents
Introduction . . .............3
Features ......................3
Checking the contents of package
....3
Part names ....................4
Projector, Control panel and Indicators,
Ports, Remote control
Setting up . . ...............7
Arrangement . ..................7
Connecting with your devices . ....10
Fastening the cables
Fastening the adapter cover . .....15
Using the security bar and slot . . . . 15
Connecting to a power supply .....16
Remote control ............17
Installing the batteries ...........17
Using the REMOTE ID function ...17
Changing the frequency of remote control signal
..18
About the remote control signal ...18
Using as a simple PC mouse & keyboard
..19
Status Monitor . ...........20
<Only for CP-X8160,
CP-WX8255 and CP-WU8450>
Displaying the condition of the projector
..20
Displaying the log . .............22
Power on/off . .............24
Turning on the power . ..........24
Turning off the power . ..........24
Operating . ...............25
Adjusting the volume ............25
Temporarily turning off the screen and audio
..25
Selecting an input signal .........26
Selecting an aspect ratio .........27
Adjusting the projector's elevator
....28
Adjusting the lens . .............29
Adjusting the zoom and focus,
Adjusting the lens position, Lens memory
Using the automatic adjustment feature
..31
Adjusting the position ...........31
Correcting the distortion .........32
Using the magnify feature ........35
Temporarily freezing the screen . . . 36
Temporarily shading the screen . . . 36
PbyP ........................37
<Only for
CP-WU8440 and CP-WU8450>
Using the menu function
.........
39
Indication in OSD,
Containing items of each menu
EASY MENU...............42
PICTURE menu . ...........44
IMAGE menu . .............47
INPUT menu . .............50
SETUP menu ..............54
AUDIO menu . .............57
SCREEN menu.............59
OPTION menu . ............65
NETWORK menu ...........76
SECURITY menu ...........87
Presentation tools . ........94
PC-LESS Presentation . .........94
Thumbnail Mode, Full Screen Mode,
Slideshow Mode, Playlist
Drawing function ..............104
Connecting the devices,
Using the Drawing function
USB Display .................109
Starting USB Display, Right-Click menu,
Floating menu, Options window
Maintenance .............113
Replacing the lamp ............ 113
Cleaning and replacing the air lter . 115
Other care ...................117
Troubleshooting . .........118
Warnings displayed on the Status Monitor
.. 118
<Only for CP-X8160,
CP-WX8255 and CP-WU8450>
Related messages . ........... 118
Regarding the indicator lamps . . . 120
Resetting all settings ...........122
Phenomena that may be easy to
be mistaken for machine defects
..123
Specifications ............128
3
Introduction
• Keep the original packing materials, for future reshipment. Be sure
to use the original packing materials when moving the projector. Use special
caution for the lens.
• The projector may make a rattling sound when tilted, moved or shaken, since
a ap to control the air ow inside of the projector has moved. Be aware that
this is not a failure or malfunction.
NOTE
Introduction
The projector provides you with the broad use by the following features.
Checking the contents of package
9 The HDMI ports can support various image equipment which have digital
interface to get clearer pictures on a screen.
9 The super bright lamp and high quality optical system can fulll the demands
of professional uses.
9 Some optional lens units and the wide range of the lens shift feature will give
much more chances to install the product wherever you want.
9 The lens shade can hide your inside operations and will help your
presentation.
9 The wealth of I/O ports is believed to support any business scene.
Please see the Contents of package section in the User’s Manual (concise)
which is a book. Your projector should come with the items shown there. Require
of your dealer immediately if any items are missing.
Features
►Keep small parts away from children and pets. Take care not
to put in the mouth. If swallowed, consult a physician immediately for emergency
treatment.
WARNING
4
Introduction
Part names
Projector
(1) Lamp cover (
113)
The lamp unit is inside.
(2) Speakers (x2) (
25, 57)
(3) Filter cover (115)
The air lter and intake vent are inside.
(4) Elevator feet (x2) (
28)
(5) Elevator buttons (x2) (28)
(6) Remote sensors (x2) (18, 71)
(7) Lens
(8) Lens cover
(9) Indicators (
5)
(10) Intake vents
(11) Control panel (
5)
(12) Status Monitor (20)
< Only for CP-X8160, CP-WX8255 and
CP-WU8450>
(13) AC IN (AC inlet) (16)
(14) Exhaust vents
(15) Ports (
5)
(16) Security bar (
15)
(17) Security slot (15)
(18) Grip (below)
(19) Safety bar (
15)
►Do not open or remove any portion of the product, unless the
manuals direct it.
►Do not subject the projector to unstable conditions.
►Do not apply a shock or pressure to this product. Place
your hands on the grip on the bottom of the projector when
carrying the projector. Remove all the attachments including
the power cord and cables, from the projector when carrying
the projector.
►Do not look into the lens and the openings on the projector while the lamp is
on.
WARNING
►Do not touch around the lamp cover and the exhaust vents
during use or just after use, since it is too hot.
►Do not attach anything onto the lens except the lens cover of this
projector because it could damage the lens, such as melting the lens.
CAUTION
(continued on next page)
Grip
(10)
(3)
(5)
(4)
(9)
(2)
(2)
(7)
(6)
(4)
(11)
(14)
(10)
(10)
(13)
(17)
(16)
(1)
(19)
(18)
(6)
(8)
(15)
(5)
(12)
5
Control panel and Indicators
(1) STANDBY/ON button (
24)
(2) INPUT button (
26, 39)
(3) MENU button (39)
(4) LENS SHIFT button (
29)
(5) ZOOM button (29)
(6) FOCUS - / + buttons (
29)
(7) SHADE button (36)
(8) FUNCTION button (
22, 29)
(9) FILTER indicator (122)
(10) SHADE indicator (
36)
(11) SECURITY indicator (93)
(12) LAMP indicator (120, 121)
(13) TEMP indicator (
120, 121)
(14) POWER indicator (24, 120, 121)
Ports (
10 ~ 14)
(1) COMPUTER IN1 port
(2) COMPUTER IN2 ports
(G/Y, B/Cb/Pb, R/Cr/Pr, H, V)
(3) LAN port
(4) USB TYPE A ports
(5) USB TYPE B port
(6) HDMI 1 port
(7) HDMI 2 port
(8) COMPONENT ports
(Y,Cb/Pb, Cr/Pr)
(9) S-VIDEO port
(10) VIDEO port
(11) AUDIO IN1 port
(12) AUDIO IN2 port
(13) AUDIO IN3 (L, R) ports
(14) AUDIO OUT (L, R) ports
(15) MONITOR OUT port
(16) REMOTE CONTROL IN port
(17) REMOTE CONTROL OUT port
(18) CONTROL port
Introduction
Part names (continued)
(continued on next page)
(5)
(8)
(1)
(3)
(4)
(6)
(2)
(9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14)
(7)
(1)
(2)
(4)
(3)
(18)
(5) (6) (10) (7)
(9)
(16) (14) (13) (12) (11) (15)(8)(17)
6
Introduction
Part names (continued)
• Any button marked with “*” is not supported on this projector (119).
• Any button marked with “
○
” is available only for CP-WU8440 and CP-WU8450.
• Each time you press any button (except ID buttons), the ID button of current
selected ID number will light (
17).
NOTE
Back of
the remote control
Remote control
(1) STANDBY button (24)
(2) ON button (
24)
(3) ID - 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 buttons (
17)
(4) COMPUTER 1 button (
26)
(5) COMPUTER 2 button (
26)
(6) COMPUTER 3 button *
(7) LAN button (
26)
(8) USB TYPE A button (
26)
(9) USB TYPE B button (
26)
(10) COMPONENT button (
26)
(11) S-VIDEO button (
26)
(12) VIDEO button (
26)
(13) HDMI 1 button (
26)
(14) HDMI 2 button (
26)
(15) DIGITAL button *
(16)
PAGE UP / PAGE DOWN buttons
(19, 96)
(17) F5 button (
18, 19)
(18) ENTER button (
19, 22, 39)
(19) RESET button (
39)
(20) ESC button (
19, 39)
(21) ▲/▼/◄/►cursor buttons
(22) MENU button (
39)
(23) VOL + / - buttons (
25)
(24) AV MUTE button (
25)
(25) MAGNIFY ON / OFF buttons (
35)
(26) FREEZE button (
36)
(27) PbyP button
○
(
37)
(28) ASPECT button (
27)
(29) AUTO button (
31)
(30) POSITION button (
30, 31, 40)
(31) KEYSTONE button (
32)
(32) MY BUTTON - 1, 2, 3, 4 buttons (
68)
(33) LENS SHIFT button (
29)
(34) LENS MEMORY button (
30)
(35) FOCUS + / - buttons (
29)
(36) ZOOM + / - buttons (
29)
(37) Battery cover (
17) (38) Wired remote control port (14)
(1)
(3)
(4)
(7)
(8)
(10)
(13)
(14)
(16)
(26)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(32)
(30)
(31)
(2)
(5)
(6)
(9)
(11)
(12)
(15)
(23)
(25)
(24)
(21)
(22)
(29)
(33)
(37)
(34) (36)
(35)
(27)
(28)
(38)
7
Setting up
Setting up
Install the projector according to the environment and manner the projector will be
used in.
For the case of installation in a special state such as ceiling mount, the specied
mounting accessories (
6SHFL¿FDWLRQV in the User’s Manual (concise)) and
service may be required. Before installing the projector, consult your dealer about
your installation.
Arrangement
Refer to tables T-1 to T-6 at the back of User's Manual (concise) as well as the
following to determine the screen size and projection distance. The values shown
in the table are calculated for a full size screen.
Ⓗ × Ⓥ :
Screen size
ⓐ:
Projection distance
(from the front of the projector unit)
ⓑ
,
ⓒ
: Screen height
(continued on next page)
Projector top
Projector bottom
8
Setting up
Arrangement (continued)
WARNING
(continued on next page)
►Install the projector where you can access the power
outlet easily. If an abnormality should occur, unplug the projector urgently.
Otherwise it could cause a re or electric shock.
►Do not subject the projector to unstable conditions. If the projector falls
or topples over, it could result in injury or damage to the projector and the
surrounding things. Using a damaged projector could result in a re and an
electric shock.
• Do not place the projector in unstable places, such as an inclined surface,
places subject to vibration, on top of a wobbly table or cart, or a surface that is
smaller than the projector.
• Do not put the projector on its side, front or rear position.
• Do not attach nor place anything on the projector unless otherwise specied in
the manual.
• Do not use any mounting accessories except the accessories specied by the
manufacturer. Read and keep the manuals of the accessories used.
• For special installation such as ceiling mounting, be sure to consult your dealer
beforehand.
• Only for CP-X8160, CP-WX8255 and CP-WU8450, it is possible to install the
projector for any direction with specied mounting accessories. Consult with
your dealer about such a special installation.
• Place your hands on the grip on the bottom of the projector when carrying the
projector. Remove all the attachments including the power cord and cables,
from the projector when carrying the projector.
►Do not install the pro
MHFWRUQHDUWKHUPDOO\FRQGXFWLYHRUÀDPPDEOH
things. Such things when heated by the projector could result in a re and burns.
• Do not place the projector on a metal stand.
►Do not place the projector where any oils, such as cooking or machine
oil, are used. Oil may harm the product, resulting in malfunction, or falling from
the mounted position.
►Do not place the projector in a place where it may get wet. Getting the
projector wet or inserting liquid into the projector could cause a re and an
electric shock, and damage the projector.
• Do not place the projector near water, such as in a bathroom, kitchen, or
poolside.
• Do not place the projector outdoors or by the window.
• Do not place anything containing liquid near the projector.
9
Setting up
Arrangement (continued)
►3ODFHWKHSURMHFWRULQDFRROSODFHZLWKVXI¿FLHQW
ventilation. The projector may shutdown automatically or may malfunction if its
internal temperature is too high.
Using a damaged projector could result in a re and an electric shock.
• Do not place the projector in direct sunlight or near hot objects such as heaters.
• Do not place the projector where the air from an air conditioner or similar unit
will blow on it directly.
• Keep a space of 30 cm or more between a side of the projector and other
objects such as walls.
• Do not place the projector on carpet, cushions or bedding.
• Do not stop up, block nor cover the projector's vent holes. Do not place
anything around the projector that could be sucked in or stuck to the projector's
intake vents.
• Do not place the projector at places that are exposed to magnetic elds, doing
so can cause the cooling fans inside the projector to malfunction.
►Avoid placing the projector in smoky, humid or dusty place. Placing the
projector in such places could cause a re, an electric shock and malfunction of
the projector.
• Do not place the projector near humidiers. Especially for an ultrasonic
humidier, chlorine and minerals contained in tap water are atomized and could
be deposited in the projector causing image degradation or other problems.
• Do not place the projector in a smoking area, kitchen, passageway or by the
window.
• Position the projector to prevent light from directly hitting the
projector's remote sensor.
• Do not place the product in a place where radio interference may be caused.
• Set the ALTITUDE of the SERVICE item in the OPTION menu correctly. It is
recommended to leave it at AUTO usually (
69). If the projector is used with a
wrong setting, it may cause damage to the projector itself or the parts inside.
• Keep heat-sensitive things away from the projector. Otherwise, they may be
damaged by the heat from the projector.
CAUTION
NOTICE
10
Setting up
Connecting with your devices
Before connecting the projector to a device, consult the manual of the device to
conrm that the device is suitable for connecting with this projector and prepare
the required accessories, such as a cable in accord with the signal of the device.
Consult your dealer when the required accessory did not come with the product or
the accessory is damaged.
After making sure that the projector and the devices are turned off, perform
the connection, according to the following instructions. Refer to the gures in
subsequent pages.
Before connecting the projector to a network system, be sure to read Network
Guide too.
►Use only the appropriate accessories. Otherwise it could
cause a re or damage the projector and devices.
• Use only the accessories specied or recommended by the projector’s
manufacturer. It may be regulated under some standard.
• Neither disassemble nor modify the projector and the accessories.
• Do not use the damaged accessory. Be careful not to damage the accessories.
Route a cable so that it is neither stepped on nor pinched out.
WARNING
►For a cable with a core at only one end, connect the end
with the core to the projector. That may be required by EMI regulations.
CAUTION
• Plug-and-Play is a system composed of a computer, its operating system
and peripheral equipment (i.e. display devices). This projector is VESA DDC
2B compatible. Plug-and-Play can be used by connecting this projector to a
computer that is VESA DDC (display data channel) compatible.
-
Take advantage of this feature by connecting a computer cable to the
COMPUTER IN1 port (DDC 2B compatible). Plug-and-Play may not work
properly if any other type of connection is attempted.
-
Please use the standard drivers in your computer as this projector is a Plug-
and-Play monitor.
• Do not turn on or off the projector while connected to a device in
operation, unless that is directed in the manual of the device. Otherwise it may
cause malfunction in the device or projector.
• The function of some input ports can be selected according to your usage
requirements. Check the reference page indicated beside each port in the
following illustration.
• Be careful not to mistakenly connect a connector to a wrong port. Otherwise it
may cause malfunction in the device or projector.
- When connecting a connector to a port, make sure that the shape of the
connector ts the port.
- Tighten the screws to connect a connector equipped with screws to a port.
- Use the cables with straight plugs, not L-shaped ones, as the input ports of
the projector are recessed.
About Plug-and-Play capability
NOTE
(continued on next page)
11
Setting up
Connecting with your devices (continued)
• Before connecting the projector to a computer, consult the computer’s
manual and check the compatibility of the signal level, the synchronization
methods and the display resolution output to the projector.
-
Some signal may need an adapter to input this projector.
- Some computers have multiple screen display modes that may include some
signals which are not supported by this projector.
-
Although the projector can display signals with a resolution up to UXGA
(1600x1200) or up to W-UXGA (1920x1200) for
CP-WU8440 and CP-
WU8450, the signal will be converted to the projector’s panel resolution
before being displayed. The best display performance will be achieved if the
resolutions of the input signal and the projector panel are identical.
• If you connect this projector and a notebook computer, you need output the
display to an external monitor, or output simultaneously to the internal display
and an external monitor. Consult the computer's manual for the setting.
• Depending on the input signal, the automatic adjustment function of this
projector may take some time and not function correctly.
-
Note that a composite sync signal or sync-on-green signal may confuse the
automatic adjustment function of this projector (
52).
-
If the automatic adjustment function does not work correctly, you may not see
the dialog to set the display resolution. In such a case, use an external display
device. You may be able to see the dialog and set an appropriate display
resolution.
NOTE
(continued on next page)
Computer
(
26, 109)
(
26)
(
26)
(
57)
12
Setting up
Connecting with your devices (continued)
(continued on next page)
• If an oversized USB storage device blocks the LAN port, use only
the further USB TYPE A port from the LAN port or a USB extension cable to
connect the USB storage device.
NOTE
► Before connecting the projector to a network system be sure
to obtain the consent of the administrator of the network.
►
Do not connect the LAN port to any network that might have the excessive voltage.
►
The designated USB wireless adapter that is sold as an option is required to use
the wireless network function of this projector. Before connecting the USB wireless
adapter, turn off the power of the projector and disconnect the power cord. Do not
use any extension cable or device when connecting the adapter to the projector.
►
Before removing the USB storage device from the port of the projector, be sure to
use the REMOVE USB function on the Thumbnail screen to secure your data (97).
►To connect both the LAN cable and USB device to the projector, use only the
further USB TYPE A port from the LAN port or a LAN cable that is at on the
side where the plug’s wire is visible. Otherwise, both of them cannot be con-
nected correctly, or the wire may break (malfunction).
CAUTION
Computer
Access
point
USB
storage
device
USB
wireless
adapter
(optional)
(
94, 104)
External
device
(
76)
(
76)
(
76)
(
19)
►Heat may build up in the USB wireless adapter, to avoid pos-
sible burns disconnect the projector power cord for 10 minutes before touching
the adapter.
►
When using the USB wireless adapter, be sure to connect the adapter to the fur-
ther USB TYPE A port from the LAN port and use the supplied adapter cover (15).
WARNING
13
Setting up
• The HDMI ports of this model are compatible with HDCP (High-band-
width Digital Content Protection) and therefore capable of displaying video
signals from HDCP compatible DVD players or the like.
- The HDMI ports support the following signals:
Video signal : 480i@60, 480p@60, 576i@50, 576p@50, 720p@50/60,
1080i@50/60, 1080p@50/60
Audio signal : Format Linear PCM
Sampling frequency 48kHz / 44.1kHz / 32kHz
- This projector can be connected with another equipment that has HDMI
TM
connector, but with some equipment the projector may not work properly,
something like no video.
- Be sure to use an HDMI
TM
cable that has the HDMI
TM
logo.
- Use a Category 2-certied HDMI
TM
cable to input 1080p@50/60 signal to the
projector.
- When the projector is connected with a device having DVI connector, use a
DVI to HDMI
TM
cable to connect with the HDMI
TM
input.
• The HDMI
TM
cables might come off easily due to the lack of a mechanical lock
on the cables and connectors. It is recommended to fasten the cables to the
projector to prevent the cables from coming off (
14).
NOTE
Connecting with your devices (continued)
(continued on next page)
VCR/DVD/
Blu-ray Disc
TM
player
(
26)
(
26)
(
57)
(
26, 52)
14
To get together the signal cables and
prevent them from coming off, fasten them to
the projector using a commercially available
plastic cable tie. Use a cable tie of size
2.0x5.0mm or smaller. It is recommended
to curl the end of the tie slightly before you
thread it to the tie holder to enable it to get
through easily.
Setting up
Connecting with your devices (continued)
• To use a wired remote control, connect a wired remote control to the
REMOTE CONROL IN port. You can also connect another projector to the
REMOTE CONROL OUT port to control it from the wired remote control. You
can utilize this projector as a remote control-relay with the REMOTE CONROL
IN and OUT ports. To connect the wired remote control or another projector
to the REMOTE CONTROL IN or OUT ports, use audio cables with 3.5 mm
diameter stereo mini plugs. This function is useful when a wireless remote
signal may not reliably reach the projector.
NOTE
Fastening the cables
►Do not bind the power cord.
►Use only a plastic tie to get together or fasten the cables. A
metallic tie may cause damage to the cables and tie holder.
►Do not bind the cables too tightly. The cables or the hole might be damaged.
WARNING
CAUTION
Cable tie
Speakers
(with an amplier)
(Wired)
Remote
control
Monitor
Another
projector
(
56)
Tie holder
15
Using the security bar and slot
A commercially available anti-theft chain or
wire can be attached to the security bar on
the projector. Refer to the gure to choose
an anti-theft chain or wire.
Also this product has the security slot for
the Kensington lock.
For details, see the manual of the security
tool.
When using the USB wireless adapter, be
sure to connect the adapter to the further
USB TYPE A port from the LAN port and
use the supplied adapter cover.
1.
Loosen the screw (marked with
triangle) on the bottom left of the
USB TYPE A ports.
2.
Insert the tab of the cover into the
hole at the upper right of the USB
TYPE A ports in the direction of the
arrow.
3.
Align the screw holes on the projector and the cover. Then
insert the screw removed from the projector into the hole
and tighten the screw.
►Do not use the security bars and slot to prevent the projector
from falling down, since it is not designed for it.
►Do not place anti-theft chain or wire near the exhaust vents.
It may become too hot.
WARNING
CAUTION
• The security bar and slot is not comprehensive theft prevention
measures. It is intended to be used as supplemental theft prevention measure.
• The safety bar (
4) can be used for the same purpose as the security bar.
NOTE
Setting up
Fastening the adapter cover
►Keep small parts away from children and pets. Take care not
to put in the mouth.
►Heat may build up in the USB wireless adapter, to avoid possible burns
disconnect the projector power cord for 10 minutes before touching the adapter.
WARNING
Anti-theft
chain or wire
security bar
19mm
11mm
Security slot
15mm
2
1
3
Tab
16
Connecting to a power supply
1.
Put the connector of the power cord into the
AC IN (AC inlet) of the projector.
2.
Firmly plug the power cord’s plug into the
outlet. In a couple of seconds after the power
supply connection, the POWER indicator will
light up in steady orange.
►Do not connect the projector to a power supply while no lens
unit is attached to it.
►Please use extra caution when connecting the power cord, as incorrect or
faulty connections may result in re and/or electrical shock.
• Do not touch the power cord with a wet hand.
• Only use the power cord that came with the projector. If it is damaged, consult
your dealer to get a new one. Never modify the power cord.
• Only plug the power cord into an outlet whose voltage is matched to the power
cord. The power outlet should be close to the projector and easily accessible.
Remove the power cord for complete separation.
• Do not distribute the power supply to multiple devices. Doing so may overload
the outlet and connectors, loosen the connection, or result in re, electric shock
or other accidents.
• Connect the ground terminal for the AC inlet of this unit to the ground terminal
of the building using an appropriate power cord (bundled).
• This product is also designed for IT power systems with a phase-
tophase voltage of 220 to 240 V.
WARNING
Please remember that when the DIRECT POWER ON
function activated (
66), the connection of the power
supply make the projector turn on.
NOTICE
Setting up
AC IN
Power
cord
17
Remote control
Installing the batteries
Please insert the batteries into the remote control before using it. If the remote
control starts to malfunction, try to replace the batteries. If you will not use the
remote control for long period, remove the batteries from the remote control and
store them in a safe place.
1.
Holding the hook part of the battery
cover, remove it.
2.
Align and insert the two AA batteries
(HITACHI MAXELL or HITACHI MAXELL
ENERGY, Part No.LR6 or R6P) according
to their plus and minus terminals as
indicated in the remote control.
3.
Replace the battery cover in the direction of the arrow
and snap it back into place.
►Always handle the batteries with care and use them only as
directed. Improper use may result in battery explosion, cracking or leakage, which
could result in re, injury and/or pollution of the surrounding environment.
• Be sure to use only the batteries specied. Do not use batteries of different types at
the same time. Do not mix a new battery with used one.
• Make sure the plus and minus terminals are correctly aligned when loading a battery.
• Keep a battery away from children and pets.
• Do not recharge, short circuit, solder or disassemble a battery.
• Do not place a battery in a re or water. Keep batteries in a dark, cool and dry place.
• If you observe battery leakage, wipe out the leakage and then replace a battery.
If the leakage adheres to your body or clothes, rinse well with water immediately.
• Obey the local laws on disposing the battery.
WARNING
Remote control
Using the REMOTE ID function
Utilize this function to control specic projectors by the remote
control assigned the same ID number when you use multiple
projectors of the same type at the same time.
Assign an ID number to each projector before using the
REMOTE ID item in the SERVICE menu of the OPTION
menu (
71). Press the ID button with the same ID number
as assigned to the projector you are going to control. The ID
button selected will light for several seconds.
• Each time you press any button (except ID buttons), the ID button of
current selected ID number will light.
• To conrm the projector's current ID, press any ID button for 3 seconds. Its
number will be shown on each screen regardless of set ID of projector.
NOTE
ID buttons
2
1
3
18
30°
3m
30°
30°
30°
3m
(approx.)
About the remote control signal
The remote control works with the
projector’s remote sensor. This projector
has two remote sensors on the front and
back sides.
The sensors can sense signals within
the following range:
60 degrees (30 degrees to the left and right of the
sensor) within 3 meters about.
• You can deactivate one of the sensors using the REMOTE RECEIV.
item in the SERVICE menu of the OPTION menu (
71) .
• The remote control signal reected in the screen or the like may be available.
If it is difcult to send the signal to the sensor directly, attempt to make the
signal reect.
• The remote control uses infrared light to send signals to the projector (Class 1
LED), so be sure to use the remote control in an area free from obstacles that
could block the remote control’s signal to the projector.
• The remote control may not work correctly if strong light (such as direct
sun light) or light from an extremely close range (such as from an inverter
uorescent lamp) shines on the remote sensor of the projector. Adjust the
position of projector avoiding those lights.
NOTE
Changing the frequency of remote control signal
The accessory remote control has the two choices on signal frequency Mode
1:NORMAL and Mode 2:HIGH. If the remote control does not function properly,
attempt to change the signal frequency.
In order to set the Mode, please keep pressing the combination of two buttons
listed below simultaneously for about 3 seconds.
(1) S et to Mode 1:NORMAL
AV MUTE and ZOOM - buttons
(2) S et to Mode 2:HIGH
F5 and KEYSTONE buttons
Please remember that the REMOTE
FREQ. in the SERVICE item of the OPTION menu
(
71)
of the projector to be
controlled should be set to the same mode as the remote control.
Remote control
(1)
ZOOM -
button
AV MUTE
button
(2)
KEYSTONE
button
F5 button
19
Using as a simple PC mouse & keyboard
The accessory remote control works as a simple
mouse and keyboard of the computer, when the
projector’s USB TYPE B port and the computer’s
type A USB port are connected and MOUSE is
selected for the USB TYPE B item in the OPTION
menu (
67).
(1) PAGE UP key: Press PAGE UP button.
(2) PAGE DOWN key: Press PAGE DOWN button.
(3) Mouse left button: Press ENTER button.
(4) Move pointer: Use the cursor buttons
▲, ▼, ◄ and ►.
(5) ESC key: Press ESC button.
(6) Mouse right button: Press RESET button.
(7) F5 key: Press F5 button.
►Improper use of the simple mouse &
keyboard function could damage your equipment.
While using this function, please connect this
product only to a computer. Be sure to check your
computer’s manuals before connecting this product
to the computer.
NOTICE
• When the simple mouse & keyboard function of this product does not
work correctly, please check the following.
• When a USB cable connects this projector with a computer having a built-in
pointing device (e.g. track ball) like a laptop PC, open BIOS setup menu, then
select the external mouse and disable the built-in pointing device, because the
built-in pointing device may have priority to this function.
•
Windows 95 OSR 2.1 or higher is required for this function. And also this function may
not work depending on the computer’s con gurations and mouse drivers. This function
can work with the computer which can operate general USB mouse or keyboard.
• You cannot do things like press two buttons at once (for instance, pressing
two buttons at the same time to move the mouse pointer diagonally).
• This function is activated only when the projector is working properly. This
function is not available in any of the following cases:
- While the lamp is warming up. (The POWER indicator blinks in green.)
- When either USB TYPE A or USB TYPE B is selected as the input source.
-
While displaying BLANK (59), TEMPLATE (63) or MY IMAGE (84) screen.
- When any menu is displayed on the screen.
- While using the cursor buttons to operate the sound or screen functions such
as adjusting the sound volume, correcting the keystone, correcting the picture
position and magnifying the screen.
NOTE
Remote control
(1)
(3)
(6)
(2)
(4)
(5)
(7)
USB TYPE B
port
20
In a normal state
The Status Monitor displays the state of the projector
in three lines.
: Displays the condition of the projector.
While the lamp is on, the selected port is
displayed.
Displayed conditions are as below;
STANDBY: The projector is in standby mode.
WARM UP: The projector is warming up.
SEARCHING: The projector is searching an input signal.
COOL DOWN: The projector is cooling down.
: Displays the condition of the detected input signal while the lamp
is on. Otherwise, displays the serial number of the projector.
Displayed conditions are as below;
SYNC OUT: Detected input signal is out of specied range.
NO SIGNAL: There is no input signal.
CONNECTED: The projector has connected to the network or the computer
and some image is transferred to the projector while the LAN or USB TYPE
B port is selected.
HOLD: The projector has connected to the network but no image is transferred
while the LAN port is selected.
NOT CONNECTED: The projector is not connected to the network or the
computer while the LAN or USB TYPE B port is selected.
Status Monitor <Only for CP-X8160, CP-WX8250 and CP-WU8450>
Status Monitor
Displaying the condition of the projector
The Status Monitor is the sub LCD in the rear panel of
CP-X8160, CP-WX8255 and CP-WU8450. The Status
Monitor displays the present condition of the projector
including errors, setup information and error history.
<Only for CP-X8160, CP-WX8255 and CP-WU8450>
If no buttons have been operated, the Status Monitor displays as below depending
on the condition of the projector.
Status Monitor
1st line
2nd line
• The Status Monitor displays nothing while the projector is in standby
mode if the STANDBY MODE item of SETUP menu is set to SAVING (
56).
• When INSTALLATION in the SETUP menu is set to FRONT / CEILING or REAR /
CEILING, the contents on the Status Monitor are displayed upside down (
55).
NOTE
(continued on next page)
example
9
2 3 ° C
#
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 A B
S T A N D B Y
21
Status Monitor <Only for CP-X8160, CP-WX8250 and CP-WU8450>
In error state
The Status Monitor displays a warning of an error
with larger letters. Resolve the errors referring to the
table of the sections "Related messages"
(119) and
"Regarding the indicator lamps"
(120, 121) when the
warning is displayed.
Displayed warnings are as below;
COVER: The lamp cover has not been properly xed.
Refer to the LAMP indicator blinking in the table
(
120).
FAN: The cooing fan is not operating.
Refer to the TEMP indicator blinking in the table
(
121).
LAMP: The lamp does not light.
Refer to the LAMP indicator lighting in the table
(
120).
TEMP: The projector's interior becomes over heated.
Refer to the TEMP indicator lighting in the table
(
121).
AIR (AIR FLOW): The internal temperature is rising.
Refer to the description of the message, "CHECK THE AIR FLOW" in the
table
(
119).
COLD: There is a possibility that the interior portion has become over cooled.
Refer to the LAMP and TEMP indicators alternatively blinking in the table
(
121).
FILTR (FILTER): It is time to clean the air lter.
Refer to the LAMP and TEMP indicators simultaneous blinking in the table
(
121).
• When one of the warnings of FAN, LAMP, COVER, TEMP errors is
displayed, the backlight blinks at the same time.
NOTE
Displaying the condition of the projector (continued)
: Displays supplied voltage and peripheral temperature in Celsius
while the lamp is on.
3rd line
• While the projector is searching an input signal or USB TYPE A ports
are selected in normal condition, nothing is displayed on the 2nd line of the
monitor.
• When the USB TYPE B port is selected even if MOUSE is selected in the
USB TYPE B item of the OPTION menu, "NO SIGNAL" is displayed on the 2nd
line of the monitor (
67).
• Displayed temperature might differ from actual peripheral temperature
because the displayed temperature is measured inside of the projector.
NOTE
example
O RC EV
22
When the projector is in a normal condition,
or dislays one of the warnings of AIR FLOW,
COLD or FILTER errors, press the FUNCTION
button on the control panel or press the ENTER
button on the remote control for three seconds.
The backlight of the monitor turns on.
To display the setup information including
usage time
Use the ◄/► buttons to switch display.
Usage time: The Status Monitor displays
the lamp time (usage time of the present
lamp), the lter time (usage time of the air
lter) and the projector usage time.
Network information: The network information is displayed over three pages.
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to switch the page.
Displayed information in each page is as below;
2nd page
: Subnet mask
(wireless and wired)
1st page
: IP address
(wireless and wired)
3rd page
: Default gateway
(wireless and wired)
(continued on next page)
2
N 1 9 2 1 6 8 0 0 1 0 7 5
W
1 9 2 1 6 8 0 0 1 9 6
I P A D D R E S S
S Y S T E M 2 2 3 8 6 h
F I L T E R 1 2 8 3 5 h
0 L A M P 2 2 5 0 h
Status Monitor <Only for CP-X8160, CP-WX8250 and CP-WU8450>
Displaying the log
The present setup information and the error history can be displayed on the
Status Monitor with button operation.
• While the projector is warming up, button presses are ignored.
• When the USB TYPE A port is selected, use the buttons on the control panel
to display the logs. The button operation of the Status Monitor on the remote
control may be unavailable.
• The Status Monitor displays nothing or no button presses for the monitor are
available while the projector is in standby mode if the STANDBY MODE item of
SETUP menu is set to SAVING (
56).
•
Both of the Status Monitor and the OSD menu cannot be operated at same time.
NOTE
FUNCTION
button
ENTER
button
Usage time (example)
Network information
(example)
First display Usage time
Network
information
Lamp time
Filter time
Projector
usage time
Wired
Wireless
23
A C 2 4 0 V 3 5 ° C
7 F I L T E R E R R O
1 P R E V I O U S
To display error history
Press the ▲ button to display previous error
log. If a warning has been displayed, the
rst previous error log is the present error
currently occurring. The Status Monitor
displays the log number, occurred error, the
supplied voltage and peripheral temperature
at that time. Press the ► button to display
the usage time when each error occurred.
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to switch the log.
The display switches with the ◄/►
buttons at each log. Up to 10 error
logs including the present one can be
displayed.
Status Monitor <Only for CP-X8160, CP-WX8250 and CP-WU8450>
• The Status Monitor and its backlight returns to the rst state before
the FUNCTION or ENTER button was pressed when any button except cursor
buttons is pressed, or after about 30 seconds without button operation.
• If no error or less than 10 errors have occurred, "NO DATA" is displayed in
spite of occurred error in the error log.
NOTE
Displaying the log (continued)
• The Status Monitor and its backlight returns to the rst state before
the FUNCTION or ENTER button was pressed when any button except cursor
buttons is pressed, or after about 30 seconds without button operation.
• The projector usage time is the total lamp time from the projector is
manufactured. It is not reset by using LAMP TIME in the OPTION menu (
67).
• If the ▲/▼ buttons are pressed while the usage time is displayed, the usage
time switches to the past one when an error occurred.
NOTE
Error log1
Error log10
First display
Usage time
(error log1)
Usage time
(current)
Usage time
(error log10)
Error log (example)
Log number
Error
24
1.
Make sure that the power cord is rmly
and correctly connected to the projector
and the outlet.
Turning on the power
2.
Make sure that the POWER indicator is
lighted in steady orange (
120). Then
remove the lens cover.
3.
Press STANDBY/ON button on the projector
or the ON button on the remote control.
The projection lamp will light up and POWER indicator will begin blinking in
green. When the power is completely on, the indicator will stop blinking and
light in steady green (
120).
Power on/off
To display the picture, select an input signal according to the section Selecting an
input signal (26).
►A strong light is emitted when the projector’s power is on.
Do not look into the lens of the projector or look inside of the projector through
any of the projector’s openings.
►Do not touch around the lamp cover and the exhaust vents during use or just
after use, since it is too hot.
WARNING
1.
Press the STANDBY/ON button on the projector or the STANDBY button on
the remote control.
The message “Power off?” will appear on the screen for about 5 seconds.
Turning off the power
2.
Press the STANDBY/ON or STANDBY button again while the message
appears.
The projector lamp will go off, and the POWER indicator will begin blinking
in orange. Then the POWER indicator will stop blinking and light in steady
orange when the lamp cooling is complete (
120).
3.
Attach the lens cover, after the POWER indicator turns to steady orange.
Do not turn the projector on for about 10 minutes or more after turning it off.
Also, do not turn the projector off shortly after turning it on. Such operations might
cause the lamp to malfunction or shorten the lifetime of some parts including the lamp.
• Turn the power on/off in right order. Please power on the projector
prior to the connected devices.
•
This projector has the function that can make the projector automatically turn on/
off. Please refer to the DIRECT POWER ON
(66)
and AUTO POWER OFF
(66)
items of the OPTION menu.
NOTE
Power on/off
POWER indicator
ON button
STANDBY button
STANDBY/ON button
25
Operating
Operating
1.
Adjusting the volume
Use the VOL + / - buttons to adjust the volume.
A dialog will appear on the screen to aid you in
adjusting the volume. If you do not do anything,
the dialog will automatically disappear after a few
seconds.
•
When is selected for current picture input port, the volume
adjustment is disabled. Please see AUDIO SOURCE item of AUDIO menu (
57).
• Even if the projector is in the standby mode, the volume is adjustable when
both of the following conditions are true:
- An option other than
is selected for AUDIO OUT STANDBY in the AUDIO
SOURCE item of the AUDIO menu
(
57).
- NORMAL is selected in the STANDBY
MODE item of the SETUP menu
(56).
1.
Press AV MUTE button on the remote control.
The BLANK screen will be displayed instead of
the screen of input signals and the sound from the
internal speakers will be muted. Please refer to the
BLANK item in SCREEN menu about the BLANK
screen (
59).
To exit from the AV MUTE mode and restore the screen and audio, press AV
MUTE button again.
Temporarily turning off the screen and audio
►If you wish to have a blank screen while the projector's lamp
is on, use the AV MUTE function above or the lens shade function (
36). Taking
any other action may cause the damage on the projector.
CAUTION
VOL + / -
buttons
AV MUTE
button
NOTE
• The projector automatically exits from the AV MUTE mode when
some control buttons are pressed.
NOTE
26
Operating
1.
Press INPUT button on the projector.
Each time you press the button, the projector
switches its input port from the current port as
below.
Selecting an input signal
1.
Press COMPUTER 1 / 2, LAN, USB TYPE A / B, HDMI 1 / 2, COMPONENT,
S-VIDEO or VIDEO button on the remote control.
The port corresponding to each button is selected as below.
Button Ports
COMPUTER 1 COMPUTER IN1
COMPUTER 2 COMPUTER IN2
LAN LAN
USB TYPE A USB TYPE A
USB TYPE B USB TYPE B
HDMI 1 HDMI 1
HDMI 2 HDMI 2
COMPONENT COMPONENT
S-VIDEO S-VIDEO
VIDEO VIDEO
INPUT button
COMPUTER IN1 Æ COMPUTER IN2 Æ LAN
VIDEO
USB TYPE A
S-VIDEO
USB TYPE B
COMPONENT Å HDMI 2 Å HDMI 1
Buttons for input
ports
• If you have set SKIP to some ports from SOURCE SKIP in the
OPTION menu, the input from the ports cannot be selected (
65).
• While ON is selected for AUTO SEARCH item in OPTION menu, the projector
will keep checking the ports in above order repeatedly till an input signal is
detected (
65).
• It may take several seconds to project the images from the USB TYPE B port.
NOTE
• While ON is selected for AUTO SEARCH item in OPTION menu,
the projector will keep checking every port sequentially till an input signal is
detected (
65).
•
It may take several seconds to project the images from the USB TYPE B port.
NOTE
27
Operating
Selecting an aspect ratio
For a computer signal
CP-X8150, CP-X8160:
NORMAL Æ
4:3
Æ
16:9
Æ
16:10
CP-WX8240, CP-WX8255, CP-SX8350, CP-WU8440, CP-WU8450:
NORMAL Æ
4:3
Æ
16:9
Æ
16:10
Æ
NATIVE
For a video signal, s-video signal or component video signal
CP-X8150, CP-X8160:
4:3
Æ
16:9
Æ
14:9
CP-SX8350:
4:3
Æ
16:9
Æ
14:9
Æ
NATIVE
CP-WX8240, CP-WX8255, CP-WU8440, CP-WU8450:
4:3
Æ
16:9
Æ
16:10
Æ
14:9
Æ
NATIVE
For an input signal from the LAN, USB TYPE A or USB TYPE B ports, or
if there is no signal
CP-X8150, CP-X8160, CP-SX8350: 4:3 (xed)
CP-WX8240, CP-WX8255, CP-WU8440, CP-WU8450: 16:10 (xed)
1.
Press ASPECT button on the remote control.
Each time you press the button, the projector switches
the mode for aspect ratio in turn.
For an HDMI
TM
signal
CP-X8150, CP-X8160:
NORMAL
Æ
4:3
Æ
16:9
Æ
16:10
Æ
14:9
CP-WX8240, CP-WX8255, CP-SX8350, CP-WU8440, CP-WU8450:
NORMAL
Æ
4:3
Æ
16:9
Æ
16:10
Æ
14:9
Æ
NATIVE
ASPECT
button
• ASPECT button does not work when no proper signal is inputted.
• NORMAL mode keeps the original aspect ratio setting.
NOTE
28
Operating
Adjusting the projector’s elevator
When the place to put the projector is slightly uneven
to the left or right, use the elevator feet to place the
projector horizontally.
Using the feet can also tilt the projector in order to
project at a suitable angle to the screen, elevating the
front side of the projector within 9 degrees.
This projector has 2 elevator feet and 2 elevator buttons.
An elevator foot is adjustable while pushing the elevator
button on the same side as it.
1.
Holding the projector, push the elevator buttons to
loose the elevator feet.
2.
Position the front side of the projector to the desired
height.
3.
Release the elevator buttons in order to lock the
elevator feet.
4.
After making sure that the elevator feet are locked,
put the projector down gently.
5.
If necessary, the elevator feet can be manually
twisted to make more precise adjustments. Hold the
projector when twisting the feet.
►Do not handle the elevator buttons without holding the
projector, since the projector may drop down.
►Do not tilt the projector other than elevating its front within 9 degrees using
the adjuster feet. A tilt of the projector exceeding the restriction could cause
malfunction or shortening the lifetime of consumables, or the projector itself.
Only for CP-X8160, CP-WX8255 and CP-WU8450, it is possible to install the
projector for any direction with specied mounting accessories. Consult with
your dealer about such a special installation.
CAUTION
To loose an
elevator foot,
push the elevator
button on the
same side as it.
To nely
adjust, twist
the foot.
29
Operating
The ZOOM or FOCUS dialog will appear when you
press any of the buttons from ZOOM, ZOOM -,
ZOOM +, FOCUS + and FOCUS -.
1.
Use the ZOOM + / - buttons on the remote
control or ZOOM button and ◄/► cursor buttons
on the projector to adjust the screen size.
2.
Use the FOCUS + / - buttons to focus the picture.
Adjusting the lens
Adjusting the zoom and focus
• The projector may ignore operation by
other buttons while the lens is moving.
NOTE
Press the LENS SHIFT button. The LENS SHIFT
dialog will appear. Using the ▲/▼/◄/►buttons while
the dialog is displayed shifts the lens. Generally, better
image quality can be got when the lens is set to the
center.
Press the LENS SHIFT button again to exit the
LENS SHIFT function.
CENTERING
Press the ENTER or INPUT button while the dialog is
displayed to execute the CENTERING feature, which
adjusts the lens to the center. A message dialog is dis-
played for conrmation. Pressing the ►button performs
CENTERING. You can also perform CENTERING in the
standby mode by pressing the FUNCTION and LENS
SHIFT buttons on the control panel for 3 seconds at the
same time.
Adjusting the lens position
►Do not put your ngers or any other things around the lens. The
moving lens could catch them in the space around the lens and result in an injury.
CAUTION
• While the lens is moving to the center, the menu will disappear and an
hourglass icon will appear on the screen. CENTERING may take some time till the
lens reaches the center.
• The projector may ignore operation by buttons while moving the lens.
• The CENTERING feature while the projector is in the standby mode is disabled if
the STANDBY MODE item of SETUP menu is set to SAVING. Perform CENTERING
before the projector's power is turned off, or set the STANDBY MODE to NORMAL.
• The adjustable range of LENS SHIFT varies depending on the lens unit mounted
on the projector to maintain picture quality. Therefore LENS SHIFT adjustment may
not reach the end of the indicator in the dialog, and that is not a failure.
NOTE
LENS SHIFT button
FOCUS + / - buttons
ZOOM + / - buttons
FOCUS - / +
buttons
ZOOM button
FUNCTION
button
LENS SHIFT
button
30
Operating
• The projector may ignore operation by buttons while moving the lens.
• You can perform the LOAD function using LENS MEMORY button.
NOTE
Adjusting the lens (continued)
This projector is equipped with memory functions for the
lens adjustments (LENS SHIFT and LENS TYPE). Up
to 3 sets of adjustments can be stored.
To utilize the lens memory feature, press the POSITION
or FUNCTION button while the LENS SHIFT dialog is
displayed. Then the LENS MEMORY dialog will ap-
pear. The current lens adjustments are displayed on the
“CURRENT” line. The adjustments already stored in the
lens memory are displayed on the lines of SAVE and
LOAD-1 to 3.
Lens memory
SAVE:
To store the current lens adjustments, select one of the
"SAVE" options numbered 1 to 3 (number of the lens
memory) and press the ►or ENTER button.
Remember that the current data being stored of
a memory will be lost by saving new data into
the memory.
LOAD:
To recall stored adjustments, select one of the
"LOAD" options numbered 1 to 3 (number of
the lens memory) and press the ►or ENTER
button.
Remember that the current adjusted condition will be lost by loading data. If you
want to keep the current adjustment, please save it before performing a LOAD
function.
CLEAR LENS MEMORY:
To clear the adjustment stored in a lens memory, select CLEAR LENS MEMORY
and press the ►or ENTER button. The CLEAR LENS MEMORY dialog will be
displayed. Select the number of the lens memory to be cleared using the ▲/▼
buttons and press the ►button. A message dialog is displayed for conrmation.
Press the ►button again to clear the lens memory.
POSITION
button
LENS MEMORY
button
FUNCTION
button
31
Operating
1.
Press POSITION button on the remote control when no menu is indicated.
The “POSITION” indication will appear on the screen.
Adjusting the position
2.
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► cursor buttons to adjust the picture
position.
When you want to reset the operation, press RESET
button on the remote control during the operation.
To complete this operation, press POSITION button again. Even if you do not do
anything, the dialog will automatically disappear after a few seconds.
1.
Press AUTO button on the remote control.
Pressing this button performs the following.
Using the automatic adjustment feature
For a computer signal
The vertical position, the horizontal position and the
horizontal phase will be automatically adjusted.
Make sure that the application window is set to its
maximum size prior to attempting to use this feature. A dark picture may still be
incorrectly adjusted. Use a bright picture when adjusting.
For a video signal and s-video signal
The video format best suited for the respective input signal will be selected
automatically. This function is available only when the AUTO is selected for
the VIDEO FORMAT item in the INPUT menu (
51).
The vertical position and
horizontal position will be automatically set to the default.
For a component video signal
The vertical position and horizontal position will be automatically set to the default.
The horizontal phase will be automatically adjusted.
AUTO
button
POSITION
button
• The automatic adjustment operation requires approx. 10 seconds. Also
please note that it may not function correctly with some input.
• When this function is performed for a video signal, a certain extra such as a line
may appear outside a picture.
• When this function is performed for a computer signal, a black frame may be
displayed on the edge of the screen, depending on the computer model.
•
The items adjusted by this function may vary when the FINE or DISABLE is selected
for the AUTO ADJUST item of the SERVICE item in the OPTION menu (
69).
NOTE
• When this function is performed on a video signal or an s-video signal,
some image such as an extra-line may appear at outside of the picture.
• When this function is performed on a video signal or s-video signal, the range of
this adjustment depends on OVER SCAN in IMAGE menu (
48) setting. It is not
possible to adjust when OVER SCAN is set to 10.
• If POSITION button is pressed when a menu is indicated on screen, the displayed
picture does not move its position but the menu does.
•
This function is unavailable for a signal from the LAN, USB TYPE A / B or HDMI 1 / 2 port.
NOTE
32
Operating
AUTO: performs the automatic vertical keystone
correction. (54)
MANUAL: allows you to adjust the vertical and horizontal
keystone.
PERFECT FIT:
allows you to adjust each of the screen
corners and sides to correct the
distortion.
• The menu or dialog will automatically disappear after several seconds
of inactivity. Press the KEYSTONE button again, or point the cursor at EXIT in
the dialog and press the ►or ENTER button to end the operation and close the
menu or dialog.
• When the screen is adjusted by PERFECT FIT, neither AUTO nor MANUAL is
selectable. If you wish to use these functions, refer to step 3 in the PERFECT
FIT item to initialize the adjustment of PERFECT FIT.
• When TRANSITION DETECTOR is ON, these functions are not available
(
90).
NOTE
• When the projector is in one of the following conditions, the automatic
vertical keystone correction feature may not work correctly or at all.
- REAR / CEILING or FRONT / CEILING is selected for the INSTALLATION
item in the SETUP menu, and the projector screen is slanted or tilted down-
wards.
- The ZOOM adjustment is not set to the full WIDE (wide-angle focus).
- The projector is nearly horizontal (about ±4°).
- The projector is inclined at about ±35 degrees or over.
• When the horizontal lens shift is not set to the center, this function may not
work well.
NOTE
To correct the distortion of projected screen, you can select one of three
options, AUTO, MANUAL and PERFECT FIT. First press the KEYSTONE
button to display the KEYSTONE menu, and point at one
of items with the ▲/▼ buttons.
Correcting the distortion
Then follow the procedure shown below for the item
you selected.
AUTO:
When AUTO is pointed at, pressing the ► or ENTER button performs
automatic vertical keystone correction.
KEYSTONE
button
33
Operating
PERFECT FIT:
When PERFECT FIT is pointed at, pressing the
► or ENTER button displays the KEYSTONE_
PERFECT FIT dialog.
This projector is equipped with a test pattern for
PERFECT FIT. Select the test pattern icon
shown in the lower left of the dialog with the ◄/▼
buttons. When you press the ENTER or INPUT
button, the test pattern appears or disappears.
1.
If it is necessary to initialize the current
adjustment, point at RESET in the dialog
with the RESET button, and press the ENTER or
INPUT button.
2.
Select one of the corners to be adjusted with
the ▲/▼/◄► buttons and press the ENTER
or INPUT button. For CP-X8150, CP-X8160, CP-
WX8240 and CP-WX8255, also the sides can be
selected to adjust.
MANUAL:
When MANUAL is pointed at, pressing the ► or
ENTER button displays the KEYSTONE_MANUAL
dialog.
1.
Select the vertical or horizontal keystone ( / )
with the ▲/▼ buttons.
2.
Use the ◄/► buttons to adjust the keystone distortion.
Correcting the distortion (continued)
(continued on next page)
• When the zoom adjustment is set to the TELE (telephoto focus), this
function may be excessive. This function should be used when the zoom ad-
justment is set to the full WIDE (wide-angle focus) whenever possible.
• When the horizontal lens shift is not set to the center, this function may not
work well.
• Point at RETURN in the dialog with the ▲/▼ buttons and press ◄ or ENTER
button to return to the KEYSTONE menu.
NOTE
CP-X8150, CP-X8160,
CP-WX8240, CP-WX8255
CP-SX8350,
CP-WU8440, CP-WU8450
34
Operating
Correcting the distortion (continued)
4.
This projector is equipped with a memory feature for PERFECT FIT
adjustment. Up to 3 sets of adjustments can be stored.
Ɣ SAVE:
To store the current PERFECT FIT adjustment, select one of the SAVE
icons
numbered 1 to 3 (number of the memory) with the ◄ /▲/▼ buttons
and press the ENTER or INPUT button.
Remember that the current data being stored of a memory will be lost by
saving new data into the memory.
Ɣ LOAD:
To recall stored adjustments, select one of the LOAD icons
numbered
1 to 3 (number of the memory) with the ◄ /▲/▼ buttons and press the
ENTER or INPUT button.
Remember that the current adjusted condition will be lost by loading data. if
you want to keep the current adjustment, please save it before performing
a LOAD function.
• <Only for CP-X8150, CP-X8160, CP-WX8240 and CP-WX8255>
Each corner and side can be adjusted individually but in some cases it may
be adjusted in conjunction with another corner or side. This is due to control
restrictions and not a malfunction.
• The LOAD functions whose linked memory has no data are skipped.
• There may be some noise and the screen may icker for a moment when
loading data. This is not malfunction.
• Point at RETURN in the dialog with the ▲/▼ buttons and press the ◄ or
ENTER button to return to the KEYSTONE menu.
NOTE
3.
Adjust the selected part as below.
● For adjusting a corner, use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to adjust the position of
the corner.
● <Only for CP-X8150, CP-X8160, CP-WX8240 and CP-WX8255>
For adjusting the upper or lower side, use the ◄/► buttons to select any
one point on the side, and use the ▲/▼ buttons to adjust the distortion of
the side.
● <Only for CP-X8150, CP-X8160, CP-WX8240 and CP-WX8255>
For adjusting the left or right side, use the ▲/▼ buttons to select any one
point on the side, and use the ◄/► buttons to adjust the distortion of the
side.
● To adjust another corner or side, press the ENTER or INPUT button and
follow the procedure from step 2.
35
Operating
1.
Using the magnify feature
2.
3.
4.
Press the MAGNIFY ON button on the remote
control.
The picture will be magnied, and the MAGNIFY
dialog will appear on the screen. When the
MAGNIFY ON button is pressed for the rst time
after the projector is turned on, the picture will be
zoomed by 1.5 times. On the dialog, triangle marks
to show each direction will be displayed.
The display magnication of the projector switches in order
with every press of the MAGNIFY ON button.
For computer signals, HDMI
TM
(RGB) signals, input signals from the
LAN, USB TYPE A or USB TYPE B ports
1.5 times Æ 2 times Æ 3 times Æ 4 times Æ 1 time
For video signals, s-video signals, component video signals or
HDMI
TM
(Component) signals
1.5 times Æ 2 times Æ 1 time
While the triangles are displayed on the dialog, use the ▲/▼/◄/► cursor
buttons to shift the magnifying area.
Press the MAGNIFY OFF button on the remote control to exit magnication.
MAGNIFY
ON / OFF
buttons
• The MAGNIFY dialog will automatically disappear in several seconds
with no operation. The dialog will appear again if the MAGNIFY ON button is
pressed when the dialog has automatically disappeared.
• The magnication is automatically disabled when the displaying signal or its
display condition is changed.
• While the magnication is active, the keystone distortion condition may vary. It
will be restored when the magnication is disabled.
• Some horizontal stripes might be visible on the image while magnication is
active.
• This function is not available in the following cases:
- A sync signal in the range not supported is input.
- There is no input signal.
NOTE
36
Operating
1.
Press the SHADE button on the control panel.
The mechanical lens shade closes and the
screen turns to black. The SHADE indicator on
the projector blinks in yellow while the shade is
closed.
To open the shade and restore the screen, press
the SHADE button again.
Temporarily shading the screen
•
The projector will turn off automatically when the time set up by the
SHADE TIMER passes
(66)
.
• When turning off the power by the normal procedure, the lens shade opens
automatically. If AC power supply is disconnected while opening or closing the
lens shade, the moving of the lens shade stops. However, the next time the
projector is turned on, the lens shade opens again automatically.
NOTE
1.
Press the FREEZE button on the remote control.
The “FREEZE” indication will appear on the screen
(however, the indication will not appear when the OFF
is selected for the MESSAGE item in the SCREEN
menu (
61), and the projector will go into the
FREEZE mode, which the picture is frozen.
To exit the FREEZE mode and restore the screen to normal, press the
FREEZE button again.
Temporarily freezing the screen
►If you wish to have a blank screen while the projector's lamp
is on, use the lens shade function above or the AV MUTE function (
25). Taking
any other action may cause the damage on the projector.
CAUTION
FREEZE
button
SHADE
button
• The projector automatically exits from the FREEZE mode when some
control buttons are pressed.
• If the projector continues projecting a still image for a long time, the LCD
panel might possibly be burned in. Do not leave the projector in the FREEZE
mode for too long.
• Images might appear degraded when this function is operated, but it is not a
malfunction.
NOTE
37
Operating
PbyP (Picture by Picture)
<Only for CP-WU8440 and CP-WU8450>
The PbyP is a function for displaying two different picture signals on a screen that
is split into main and sub areas for each signal.
The setting information will be appeared for
several seconds when the PbyP function is started.
Displays the input information for each area. A
yellow frame around the main area and an audio
mark indicating the audio output will also be
displayed. The information can be redisplayed with
the ◄/► buttons after it has been erased.
PbyP
button
The position of the main area can be
toggled with the ◄/► buttons when the
setting information is displayed on the
screen. The yellow frame and the audio
mark will move together with it.
Changing the main area
• If the LAN or USB TYPE A / B port is selected when the PbyP button
is pressed, input from other port is displayed on the main area.
• When in the PbyP mode, use the MENU button on the remote control or ▲/▼
buttons on the control panel to display the OSD menu.
• There are certain functions that cannot be used when in the PbyP mode.
• A message will be displayed when buttons that cannot be used are pressed
(
119). However, note that there are certain unusable buttons for which
messages are not displayed.
• The functions on the OSD menu that cannot be used are displayed in gray
and cannot be selected.
NOTE
main
area
sub
area
main
area
sub
area
Setting information
Press the PbyP button on the remote control. This acctivates the PbyP mode. The
screen displayed before the PbyP button was pressed will be displayed as the
main area. Most of operations are effective for the main area only. Only outputs
the audio input signal paired with the picture input signal for the main area.
To quit the PbyP mode, press the PbyP button again.
Normal mode PbyP mode
main
area
sub
area
main area sub area
Input information
Audio mark
(continued on next page)
Frame
38
Operating
PbyP (Picture by Picture)
<Only for CP-WU8440 and CP-WU8450>
(continued)
Press any button to select an input port on the remote control or press the
INPUT button on the control panel. A dialog box to select the input signal for
the main area will be displayed. Choose a signal using the ▲/▼ buttons. To
change the signal in the sub area, switch temporarily across to the main area
with the ◄/► buttons.
Displaying the same signal on the both areas is not allowed. Refer to the table
for details on available input signal combinations. Any combinations marked
with "X" can not be selected.
• For some signals, it may not be displayed correctly in the PbyP
mode, even if it can be displayed properly in the normal mode.
NOTE
Changing the picture input signal
Press the MY BUTTON assigned the
PbyP SWAP (
68). The position of the
both area is exchanged without any
setting change.
PbyP SWAP function
Sub area
Main area
COMPUTER IN1
COMPUTER IN2
LAN
USB TYPE A
USB TYPE B
HDMI 1
HDMI 2
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPUTER IN1
XOXXXOOOOO
COMPUTER IN2
OXXXXOOOOO
LAN
XXXXXXXXXX
USB TYPE A
XXXXXXXXXX
USB TYPE B
XXXXXXXXXX
HDMI 1
OOXXXXXOOO
HDMI 2
OOXXXXXOOO
COMPONENT
OOXXXOOXOO
S-VIDEO
OOXXXOOOXO
VIDEO
OOXXXOOOOX
main area sub area
main
area
sub
area
main
area
sub
area
• The combined input signals marked with an "O" can be selected
and displayed in the PbyP mode even when the port is set to SKIP with the
SOURCE SKIP on the OPTION menu (
65).
NOTE
Input signal
39
Operating
1.
To start the MENU, press the MENU button. The MENU you last used (EASY
or ADVANCED) will appear. EASY MENU has priority to appear just after
powered on.
Using the menu function
2.
(1) Use the ▲/▼ cursor buttons to select an item to
operate. If you want to change it to the ADVANCED
MENU, select the ADVANCED MENU.
(2) Use the ◄/► cursor buttons to operate the item.
This projector has the following menus:
PICTURE, IMAGE, INPUT, SETUP, AUDIO, SCREEN, OPTION, NETWORK,
SECURITY and EASY MENU.
EASY MENU consists of functions often used, and the other menus are classi ed
into each purpose and brought together as the ADVANCED MENU.
Each of these menus is operated using the same methods. While the projector
is displaying any menu, the MENU button on the projector works as the cursor
buttons. The basic operations of these menus are as follows.
In the EASY MENU
(continued on next page)
(1) Use the ▲/▼ cursor buttons to select a menu.
If you want to change it to the EASY MENU,
select the EASY MENU.
The items in the menu appear on the right side.
(2) Press the ► cursor button or ENTER button to
move the cursor to the right side. Then use the
▲/▼ cursor buttons to select an item to operate and press the ► cursor
button or ENTER button to progress. The operation menu or dialog of the
selected item will appear.
(3) Use the buttons as instructed in the OSD to operate the item.
In the ADVANCED MENU
MENU
button
RESET button
ENTER button
ESC button
Cursor buttons
INPUT
button
40
Operating
Using the menu function (continued)
3.
To close the MENU, press the MENU button again or select EXIT and press
the ◄ cursor button or ENTER button. Even if you do not do anything, the
dialog will automatically disappear after about 30 seconds.
Indication in OSD (On Screen Display)
The meanings of the general words on the OSD are as follows.
Indication Meaning
EXIT
Selecting this word nishes the OSD menu. It's the same as
pressing the MENU button.
RETURN Selecting this word returns the menu to the previous menu.
CANCEL or NO
Selecting this word cancels the operation in the present
menu and returns to the previous menu.
OK or YES
Selecting this word executes the prepared function or shifts
the menu to the next menu.
POSITION
button
• If you want to move the menu position,
use the cursor buttons after pressing the POSITION
button.
• Some functions cannot be performed when a certain
input port is selected, or when a certain input signal is
displayed.
• When you want to reset the operation, press RESET button on the remote
control during the operation. Note that some items (ex. LANGUAGE, VOLUME)
cannot be reset.
• In the ADVANCED MENU, when you want to return to the previous display,
press the ◄ cursor button or ESC button on the remote control.
NOTE
41
Operating
Using the menu function (continued)
Containing items of each menu
The items contained in the menus are as below;
Menu Items
EASY MENU (
42)
ASPECT, AUTO KEYSTONE,
KEYSTONE, KEYSTONE,
PERFECT FIT, PICTURE MODE, ECO MODE, INSTALLATION,
RESET, FILTER TIME, LANGUAGE, ADVANCED MENU, EXIT
PICTURE
(
44)
BRIGHTNESS, CONTRAST, GAMMA, COLOR TEMP, COLOR,
TINT, SHARPNESS, ACTIVE IRIS, MY MEMORY
IMAGE
(
47)
ASPECT, OVER SCAN, V POSITION, H POSITION, H PHASE,
H SIZE, AUTO ADJUST EXECUTE
INPUT
(
50)
PROGRESSIVE, VIDEO NR, COLOR SPACE, COMPONENT,
VIDEO FORMAT, HDMI FORMAT, HDMI RANGE,
COMPUTER IN, FRAME LOCK, RESOLUTION
SETUP
(
54)
AUTOKEYSTONE,
KEYSTONE,
KEYSTONE,
PERFECTFIT, AUTO ECO MODE, ECO MODE, INSTALLATION,
STANDBY MODE, MONITOR OUT
AUDIO
(
57) VOLUME, SPEAKER, AUDIO SOURCE, HDMI AUDIO
SCREEN
(
59)
LANGUAGE, MENU POSITION, BLANK, START UP, MyScreen,
MyScreen Lock, MESSAGE, SOURCE NAME, TEMPLATE, C. C.
OPTION
(
65)
SOURCE SKIP, AUTO SEARCH, AUTO KEYSTONE,
DIRECT POWER ON, AUTO POWER OFF, SHADE TIMER,
USB TYPE B, LAMP TIME, FILTER TIME, MY BUTTON,
SERVICE
NETWORK
(
76)
WIRELESS SETUP, WIRELESS INFORMATION, WIRED SETUP,
WIRED INFORMATION, PROJECTOR NAME, MY IMAGE,
AMX D. D., PRESENTATION, SERVICE
SECURITY
(
87)
SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE, MyScreen PASSWORD,
PIN LOCK, TRANSITION DETECTOR, MY TEXT PASSWORD,
MY TEXT DISPLAY, MY TEXT WRITING,
SECURITY INDICATOR, STACK LOCK
42
EASY MENU
EASY MENU
From the EASY MENU, items shown in the table
below can be performed.
Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons. Then
perform it according to the following table.
Item Description
ASPECT
Using the ◄/► buttons switches the mode for aspect ratio.
See the ASPECT item in IMAGE menu (
47).
AUTO KEYSTONE
Using the ► button executes the auto keystone function.
See the AUTO KEYSTONE item in SETUP menu (
54).
KEYSTONE
Using the ◄/► buttons corrects the vertical keystone distortion.
See the
KEYSTONE item in SETUP menu (
54).
KEYSTONE
Using the ◄/► buttons corrects the horizontal keystone distortion.
See the
KEYSTONE in SETUP menu (
55).
PERFECT FIT
Pressing the ► button displays the PERFECT FIT dialog.
See the PERFECT FIT item in SETUP menu (
55).
PICTURE MODE
Using the ◄/► buttons switches the picture mode.
The picture modes are combinations of GAMMA and COLOR TEMP
settings. Choose a suitable mode according to the projected source.
NORMAL
Ù
CINEMA
Ù
DYNAMIC
Ù
BOARD(BLACK)
Ú
Ú
DICOM SIM.
Ù
DAYTIME
Ù
WHITEBOARD
Ù
BOARD(GREEN)
(continued on next page)
(continued on next page)
43
EASY MENU
Item Description
PICTURE MODE
(continued)
GAMMA COLOR TEMP
NORMAL 1 DEFAULT 2 MID
CINEMA 2 DEFAULT 3 LOW
DYNAMIC 3 DEFAULT 1 HIGH
BOARD(BLACK) 4 DEFAULT 4 Hi-BRIGHT-1
BOARD(GREEN) 4 DEFAULT 5 Hi-BRIGHT-2
WHITEBOARD 5 DEFAULT 2 MID
DAYTIME 6 DEFAULT 6 Hi-BRIGHT-3
DICOM SIM. 7 DEFAULT 2 MID
• When the combination of GAMMA and COLOR TEMP differs
from pre-assigned modes above, the display on the menu for the
PICTURE MODE is “CUSTOM”. Please refer to the GAMMA and
COLOR TEMP (
44, 45) items in PICTURE menu.
• Lines or other noise might appear on the screen when this function
is operated, but it is not a malfunction.
•
DICOM SIM. is the projector's DICOM
®
("Digital Imaging and
Communication in Medicine") simulation mode. This mode simulates
the DICOM standard, which is a standard applicable to digital
communications in medicine, and can be useful for displaying medical
images, such as X-rays photos. This projector is not a medical device
and is not compliant to the DICOM standard, and neither the projector
nor the DICOM SIM. mode should be used for medical diagnosis.
ECO MODE
Using the ◄/► buttons turns off/on the Eco mode.
See the ECO MODE item in SETUP menu (
55).
INSTALLATION
Pressing the ► button displays the INSTALLATION dialog.
See the INSTALLATION item in SETUP menu (
55).
RESET
Performing this item resets all of the EASY MENU items except the
FILTER TIME and LANGUAGE.
A dialog is displayed for conrmation. Selecting the OK using the ►
button performs resetting.
FILTER TIME
The usage time of the air lter is shown in the menu.
Performing this item resets the lter time which counts usage time
of the air lter.
A dialog is displayed for conrmation. Selecting the OK using the ►
button performs resetting.
See the FILTER TIME item in OPTION menu (
67).
LANGUAGE
Using the ◄/► buttons changes the display language.
See the LANGUAGE item in SCREEN menu (
59).
ADVANCED MENU
Press the ► or ENTER button to use the menu of PICTURE,
IMAGE, INPUT, SETUP, AUDIO, SCREEN, OPTION, NETWORK or
SECURITY.
EXIT Press the ◄ or ENTER button to nish the OSD menu.
44
PICTURE menu
PICTURE menu
From the PICTURE menu, items shown in the table
below can be performed.
Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons, and
press the ► cursor button or ENTER button to
execute the item. Then perform it according to the
following table.
Item Description
BRIGHTNESS
Using the
◄/►
buttons adjusts the brightness.
Dark
Ù
Light
CONTRAST
Using the
◄/►
buttons adjusts the contrast.
Weak
Ù
Strong
GAMMA
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the gamma mode.
To adjust CUSTOM
Selecting a mode whose name includes CUSTOM and then
pressing the ► button or the ENTER button displays
a dialog to aid you in adjusting the mode.
This function is useful when you want to
change the brightness of particular tones.
Choose an item using the ◄/► buttons,
and adjust the level using the ▲/▼ buttons.
You can display a test pattern for checking the effect of your
adjustment by pressing the ENTER button.
Each time you press the ENTER button, the
pattern changes as below.
No pattern
Ö
Gray scale of 9 steps
Ramp
Õ
Gray scale of 15 steps
The eight equalizing bars correspond to eight tone levels of the test
pattern (Gray scale of 9 steps) except the darkest in the left end. If you
want to adjust the 2nd tone from left end on the test pattern, use the
equalizing adjustment bar “1”. The darkest tone at the left end of the
test pattern cannot be controlled with any of equalizing adjustment bar.
• Lines or other noise might appear on the
screen when this function is operated, but it
is not a malfunction.
(continued on next page)
ÙÙ
ÙÙ
1 DEFAULT
Ù
1 CUSTOM
Ù
2 DEFAULT
Ù
2 CUSTOM
Ù
3 DEFAULT
7 CUSTOM 3 CUSTOM
7 DEFAULT 4 DEFAULT
Ù
Ù
6 CUSTOM
Ù
6 DEFAULT
Ù
5 CUSTOM
Ù
5 DEFAULT
Ù
4 CUSTOM
45
PICTURE menu
Item Description
COLOR TEMP
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the color temperature mode.
To adjust CUSTOM
Selecting a mode whose name includes
CUSTOM and then pressing the ► button
or the ENTER button displays a dialog
to aid you in adjusting the OFFSET and
GAIN of the selected mode.
OFFSET adjustments change the color intensity on the whole tones
of the test pattern. GAIN adjustments mainly affect color intensity on
the brighter tones of the test pattern.
Choose an item using the ◄/► buttons, and adjust the level using
the ▲/▼ buttons.
You can display a test pattern for checking the effect of your
adjustment by pressing the ENTER button.
Each time you press the ENTER button, the pattern changes as below.
No pattern
Ö
Gray scale of 9 steps
Ramp
Õ
Gray scale of 15 steps
• Lines or other noise might appear on the screen
when this function is operated, but it is not a
malfunction.
COLOR
Using the ◄/► buttons adjusts the strength of whole color.
Weak
Ù
Strong
• This item can be selected only for a video, s-video and component
video signal.
• For an HDMI
TM
signal, this item can also be selected if either (1) or
(2) applies.
(1) HDMI FORMAT item in the INPUT menu for selected port is set
to VIDEO.
(2)
HDMI FORMAT item in the INPUT menu for selected port is set to
AUTO, and the projector recognizes that it receives video signals.
TINT
Using the ◄/► buttons adjusts the tint.
Reddish
Ù
Greenish
• This item can be selected only for a video, s-video and component
video signal.
• For an HDMI
TM
signal, this item can also be selected if either (1) or
(2) applies.
(1) HDMI FORMAT item in the INPUT menu for selected port is set
to VIDEO.
(2)
HDMI FORMAT item in the INPUT menu for selected port is set to
AUTO, and the projector recognizes that it receives video signals.
(continued on next page)
1 HIGH
Ù
1 CUSTOM
Ù
2 MID
Ù
2 CUSTOM 3 LOW
5 CUSTOM
ÙÙ
4 CUSTOM
6 CUSTOM
Ù
Ù
3 CUSTOM
Ù Ù
4 Hi-BRIGHT-1
Ù
5 Hi-BRIGHT-2
6 Hi-BRIGHT-3
46
PICTURE menu
Item Description
SHARPNESS
Using the ◄/► buttons adjusts the sharpness.
Weak
Ù
Strong
• There may be some noise and/or the screen may icker for a
moment when an adjustment is made. This is not a malfunction.
ACTIVE IRIS
Using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons changes the active iris control mode.
PRESENTATION
Ù
THEATER
Ù
OFF
PRESENTATION : The active iris displays the best presentation
image for both bright and dark scenes.
THEATER : The active iris displays the best theater image for
both bright and dark scenes.
OFF : The active iris is always open.
• The screen may icker when the PRESENTATION or THEATER
modes are selected. If this occurs select OFF.
MY MEMORY
This projector has 4 memories for adjustment data (for all the items
of the PICTURE menu).
Selecting a function using the ▲/▼ buttons and pressing the ► or
ENTER button performs each function.
SAVE-1
Ù
SAVE-2
Ù
SAVE-3
Ù
SAVE-4
LOAD-4
Ù
LOAD-3
Ù
LOAD-2
Ù
LOAD-1
SAVE-1, SAVE-2, SAVE-3, SAVE-4
Performing a SAVE function saves the current adjustment data into
the memory linked in the number included in the function’s name.
• Remember that the current data being stored of a memory will be
lost by saving new data into the memory.
LOAD-1, LOAD-2, LOAD-3, LOAD-4
Performing a LOAD function loads the data from the memory linked
in the number included in the function’s name, and adjusts the
picture automatically depending on the data.
• The LOAD functions whose linked memory has no data are
skipped.
• Remember that the current adjusted condition will be lost by
loading data. If you want to keep the current adjustment, please
save it before performing a LOAD function.
• There may be some noise and the screen may icker for a
moment when loading data. This is not malfunction.
• You can perform the LOAD function using MY BUTTON. Please
see MY BUTTON item in OPTION menu (
68).
47
IMAGE menu
IMAGE menu
From the IMAGE menu, items shown in the table
below can be performed.
Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons, and
press the ► cursor button or ENTER button to
execute the item. Then perform it according to the
following table. for selected port
Item Description
ASPECT
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the mode for aspect ratio.
For a computer signal
CP-X8150, CP-X8160:
NORMAL
Ù
4:3
Ù
16:9
Ù
16:10
CP-WX8240, CP-WX8255, CP-SX8350, CP-WU8440, CP-WU8450
:
NORMAL
Ù
4:3
Ù
16:9
Ù
16:10
Ù
NATIVE
For an HDMI
TM
signal
CP-X8150, CP-X8160:
NORMAL
Ù
4:3
Ù
16:9
Ù
16:10
Ù
14:9
CP-WX8240, CP-WX8255, CP-SX8350, CP-WU8440, CP-WU8450
:
NORMAL
Ù
4:3
Ù
16:9
Ù
16:10
Ù
14:9
Ù
NATIVE
For a video signal, s-video signal or component video signal
CP-X8150, CP-X8160:
4:3
Ù
16:9
Ù
14:9
CP-SX8350:
4:3
Ù
16:9
Ù
14:9
Ù
NATIVE
CP-WX8240, CP-WX8255, CP-WU8440, CP-WU8450:
4:3
Ù
16:9
Ù
16:10
Ù
14:9
Ù
NATIVE
For an input signal from the LAN, USB TYPE A or USB TYPE B
ports, or if there is no signal
CP-X8150, CP-X8160, CP-SX8350: 4:3 (xed)
CP-WX8240, CP-WX8255, CP-WU8440, CP-WU8450: 16:10 (xed)
• The NORMAL mode keeps the original aspect ratio of the signal.
(continued on next page)
48
IMAGE menu
Item Description
OVER SCAN
Using the ◄/► buttons adjusts the over-scan ratio.
Small (It magnies picture)
Ù
Large (It reduces picture)
• This item can be selected only for a video, s-video and component
video signal.
• For an HDMI
TM
signal, this item can also be selected if either (1) or
(2) applies.
(1) HDMI FORMAT item in the INPUT menu for selected port is set
to VIDEO.
(2)
HDMI FORMAT item in the INPUT menu for selected port is set to
AUTO, and the projector recognizes that it receives video signals.
V POSITION
Using the ◄/► buttons adjusts the vertical position.
Down
Ù
Up
• Over-adjusting the vertical position may cause noise to appear on
the screen. If this occurs, please reset the vertical position to the
default setting. Pressing the RESET button when the V POSITION
is selected will reset the V POSITION to the default setting.
• When this function is performed on a video signal or an s-video
signal, the range of this adjustment depends on OVER SCAN
(
above) setting. It is not possible to adjust when OVER SCAN is
set to 10.
•
This function is unavailable for a signal from the LAN, USB TYPE A
/ B or HDMI 1 / 2 port.
H POSITION
Using the ◄/► buttons adjusts the horizontal position.
Right
Ù
Left
•
Over-adjusting the horizontal position may cause noise to appear on
the screen. If this occurs, please reset the horizontal position to the
default setting. Pressing the RESET button when the H POSITION is
selected will reset the H POSITION to the default setting.
• When this function is performed on a video signal or an s-video
signal, the range of this adjustment depends on OVER SCAN
(
above) setting. It is not possible to adjust when OVER SCAN is
set to 10.
•
This function is unavailable for a signal from the
LAN, USB TYPE
A / B or HDMI 1 / 2 port.
(continued on next page)
49
IMAGE menu
Item Description
H PHASE
Using the
◄/►
buttons adjusts the horizontal phase to eliminate icker.
Right
Ù
Left
• This item can be selected only for a computer signal or a
component video signal. This function is unavailable for a signal
from the LAN, USB TYPE A / B or HDMI 1 / 2 port.
H SIZE
Using the ◄/► buttons adjusts the horizontal size.
Small
Ù
Large
• This item can be selected only for a computer signal. This function
is unavailable for a signal from the LAN, USB TYPE A / B or HDMI 1
/ 2 port.
• When this adjustment is excessive, the picture may not be
displayed correctly. In such a case, please reset the adjustment
by pressing the RESET button on the remote control during this
operation.
• Images might appear degraded when this function is operated, but
it is not a malfunction.
AUTO ADJUST
EXECUTE
Selecting this item performs the automatic adjustment feature.
For a computer signal
The vertical position, the horizontal position and the horizontal
phase will be automatically adjusted.
Make sure that the application window is set to its maximum size
prior to attempting to use this feature. A dark picture may still be
incorrectly adjusted. Use a bright picture when adjusting.
For a video signal and s-video signal
The video format best suited for the respective input signal will
be selected automatically. This function is available only when
the AUTO is selected for the VIDEO FORMAT item in the INPUT
menu (
51).
The vertical position and horizontal position will be
automatically set to the default.
For a component video signal
The vertical position and horizontal position will be automatically set
to the default. The horizontal phase will be automatically adjusted.
• The automatic adjustment operation requires approx. 10 seconds.
Also please note that it may not function correctly with some input.
• When this function is performed for a video signal, a certain extra
such as a line may appear outside a picture.
• When this function is performed for a computer signal, a black
frame may be displayed on the edge of the screen, depending on
the computer model.
• The items adjusted by this function may vary when the FINE or
DISABLE is selected for the AUTO ADJUST item of the SERVICE
item in the OPTION menu (
69).
50
INPUT menu
INPUT menu
From the INPUT menu, items shown in the table
below can be performed.
Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons, and
press the ► cursor button or ENTER button to
execute the item. Then perform it according to the
following table.
Item Description
PROGRESSIVE
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the progress mode.
TV
Ù
FILM
Ù
OFF
•
This function works only for a video signal, s-video signal, component
video signal (of 480i@60 or 576i@50 or 1080i@50/60) and an HDMI
TM
signal (of 480i@60 or 576i@50 or 1080i@50/60)
.
• When TV or FILM is selected, the screen image will be sharp.
FILM adapts to the 2-3 Pull-Down conversion system. But these
may cause a certain defect (for example, jagged line) of the picture
for a quick moving object. In such a case, please select OFF, even
though the screen image may lose sharpness.
VIDEO NR
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the noise reduction mode.
HIGH
Ù
MID
Ù
LOW
• This function works only for a video signal, s-video signal,
component video signal (of 480i@60 or 576i@50 or 1080i@50/60)
and an HDMI
TM
signal (of 480i@60 or 576i@50 or 1080i@50/60).
COLOR SPACE
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the mode for color space.
AUTO
Ù
RGB
Ù
SMPTE240
Ù
REC709
Ù
REC601
• This item can be selected only for a computer signal (except for
signals from the LAN, USB TYPE A and USB TYPE B ports) or a
component video signal (except SCART RGB).
• The AUTO mode automatically selects the optimum mode.
• The AUTO operation may not work well at some signals. In such a
case, it might be good to select a suitable mode except AUTO.
COMPONENT
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the function of the COMPONENT
ports.
COMPONENT
Ù
SCART RGB
When the SCART RGB is selected, the COMPONENT (Y, Cb/
Pb, Cr/Pr) and VIDEO ports will function as a SCART RGB port.
A SCART adapter or SCART cable is required for a SCART RGB
input to the projector. For details, contact your dealer.
(continued on next page)
51
INPUT menu
Item Description
VIDEO FORMAT
The video format for S-VIDEO port and VIDEO port can be set.
(1) Use the ▲/▼ buttons to
select the input port.
(2) Using the ◄/► buttons
switches the mode for video
format.
AUTO
Ù
NTSC
Ù
PAL
Ù
SECAM
N-PAL
Ù
M-PAL
Ù
NTSC4.43
• This item is performed only for a video signal from the VIDEO port
or the S-VIDEO port.
• The AUTO mode automatically selects the optimum mode.
• The AUTO operation may not work well for some signals. If the
picture becomes unstable (e.g. an irregular picture, lack of color),
please select the mode according to the input signal.
HDMI FORMAT
The video format of HDMI
TM
input signals from the HDMI 1 and 2
ports can be set.
(1) Use the ▲/▼ buttons to
select the HDMI port to be
set.
(2) Use the ◄/►buttons to select the video format.
AUTO
Ù
VIDEO
Ù
COMPUTER
AUTO: automatically sets the optimum mode.
VIDEO: sets the suitable mode for DVD signals.
COMPUTER: sets the suitable mode for computer signals.
• When the COMPUTER is selected, the functions COLOR
(PICTURE menu), TINT (PICTURE menu) and OVER SCAN
(IMAGE menu) are unavailable.
HDMI RANGE
The digital range of HDMI
TM
input signals from the HDMI 1 and 2
ports can be set.
(1) Use the ▲/▼ buttons to
select the HDMI port to be
set.
(2) Use the ◄/►buttons to select the digital range.
AUTO
Ù
NORMAL
Ù
ENHANCED
AUTO: automatically sets the optimum mode.
NORMAL: s
ets the suitable mode for DVD signals. (16-
235)
ENHANCED: s
ets the suitable mode for computer signals. (0-255)
• If the contrast of the screen image is too strong or too weak, try
nding a more suitable mode.
(continued on next page)
52
INPUT menu
Item Description
COMPUTER IN
The computer input signal type for COMPUTER IN1 and IN2 ports
can be set.
(1)
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select the COMPUTER IN port to be set.
(2) Use the ◄/► buttons to select
the computer input signal type.
AUTO
Ù
SYNC ON G OFF
• Selecting the AUTO mode allows
you to input a sync on G signal or component video signal from the
port.
• In the AUTO mode, the picture may be distorted with certain
input signals. In such a case, remove the signal connector so that
no signal is received and select the SYNC ON G OFF, and then
reconnect the signal.
FRAME LOCK
Set the frame lock function on/off for each port.
(1) Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select
the input ports.
(2) Use the ◄/► buttons to turn the
frame lock function on/off .
ON
Ù
OFF
• This item can be performed only on a signal with a vertical
frequency of 49 to 51Hz, 59 to 61 Hz.
• When ON is selected, moving pictures are displayed more
smoothly.
(continued on next page)
53
INPUT menu
Item Description
RESOLUTION
The resolution for the COMPUTER IN1 and COMPUTER IN2 input
signals can be set on this projector.
(1) In the INPUT menu select the RESOLUTION using the ▲/▼
buttons and press the ► button.
The RESOLUTION menu will be
displayed.
(2) In the RESOLUTION menu select the
resolution you wish to display using
the ▲/▼ buttons.
Selecting AUTO will set a resolution
appropriate to the input signal.
(3) Pressing the ► or ENTER button when
selecting a STANDARD resolution will
automatically adjust the horizontal and
vertical positions, clock phase and
horizontal size.
The INPUT_INFORMATION dialog will be
displayed.
(4) To set a custom resolution use the ▲/▼ buttons to select
the CUSTOM and the RESOLUTION_CUSTOM box will be
displayed.
Set the horizontal (HORZ) and
vertical (VERT) resolutions using
the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons.
This function may not support all
resolutions.
(5) Move the cursor to OK on screen and press the ► or ENTER
button. The message "ARE YOU SURE YOU WISH TO
CHANGE RESOLUTION?" appears. To save the setting, press
the ► button.
The horizontal and vertical positions, clock phase and horizontal
size will be automatically adjusted.
The INPUT_INFORMATION dialog
will be displayed.
(6) To revert back to the previous resolution without saving changes,
move the cursor to CANCEL on screen and press the ◄ or
ENTER button.
The screen will then return to the RESOLUTION menu
displaying the previous resolution.
• For some pictures, this function may not work well.
STANDARD
↓
CUSTOM
↓
54
SETUP menu
Item Description
AUTO KEYSTONE
Selecting this item performs the Automatic keystone distortion
correction. Projector automatically corrects vertical keystone
distortion due to the (forward/backward) setup angle by itself.
This function will be executed only once when selected in the menu.
When the slant of the projector is changed, execute this function again.
• The adjustable range of this function will vary among inputs. For
some input, this function may not work well.
• When the projector is in one of the following conditions, the
automatic vertical keystone correction feature may not work
correctly or at all.
- REAR / CEILING or FRONT / CEILING is selected for the
INSTALLATION item in the SETUP menu, and the projector screen
is slanted or tilted downwards.
- The ZOOM adjustment is not set to the full WIDE (wide-angle
focus).
- The projector is nearly horizontal (about ±4°).
- The projector is inclined at about ±35 degrees or over.
• This function is unavailable when the TRANSITION DETECTOR
(
90) is ON or the screen is adjusted by PERFECT FIT (
33, 34).
KEYSTONE
Using the ◄/► buttons corrects the vertical keystone distortion.
Shrink the bottom of the image
Ù
Shrink the top of the image
• The adjustable range of this function will vary among inputs. For
some input, this function may not work well.
• When the zoom adjustment is set to the TELE (telephoto focus),
this function may be excessive. This function should be used when
the zoom adjustment is set to the full WIDE (wide-angle focus)
whenever possible.
• This function is unavailable when the TRANSITION DETECTOR
(
90) is ON or the screen is adjusted by PERFECT FIT (
33, 34).
(continued on next page)
SETUP menu
From the SETUP menu, items shown in the table
below can be performed.
Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons, and
press the ► cursor button or ENTER button to
execute the item. Then perform it according to the
following table.
55
SETUP menu
Item Description
KEYSTONE
Using the ◄/► buttons corrects the horizontal keystone distortion.
Shrink the right of the image
Ù
Shrink the left of the image
• The adjustable range of this function will vary among inputs. For
some input, this function may not work well.
• When the horizontal lens shift is not set to the center, this function
may not work well.
• This function is unavailable when the TRANSITION DETECTOR
(
90) is ON or the screen is adjusted by PERFECT FIT (
33, 34).
PERFECT FIT
Selecting this item displays the PERFECT FIT dialog.For details,
see PERFECT FIT in Correcting the distortion (
33, 34).
• This is unavailable when the TRANSITION DETECTOR is ON
(
90).
AUTO ECO MODE
Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns on/off the AUTO ECO MODE.
ON
Ù
OFF
• When ON is selected, the projector will always be set to Eco mode
at start-up regardless of the ECO MODE (
below) setting. An OSD
message “AUTO ECO MODE” will be displayed for tens of seconds
when the projector starts with this function activated.
ECO MODE
Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns off/on the Eco mode.
NORMAL
Ù
ECO
• When the ECO is selected, acoustic noise and screen brightness
are reduced.
• When AUTO ECO MODE (
above)
is set to ON, the projector will
always be set to Eco mode at start-up regardless this setting.
INSTALATION
Pressing the ►button displays the dialog for changing the
INSTALLATION setting.
FRONT / DESKTOP
Ú
REAR / DESKTOP
Ú
REAR / CEILING
Ú
FRONT / CEILING
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select the desired setting on the
INSTALLATION dialog, and press the ENTER button of the remote
control or the INPUT button of the projector to execute.
If TRANSITION DETECTOR is ON and the INSTALLATION status
is changed, the TRANSITION DETECTOR ON alarm (
90) will be
displayed when the projector is restarted.
(continued on next page)
56
SETUP menu
Item Description
STANDBY MODE
Using ▲/▼ buttons switches the standby mode setting between
NORMAL and SAVING.
NORMAL
Ù
SAVING
When SAVING is selected, the power consumption in the standby
mode is lowered with some functional restriction as below:
• When SAVING is selected, the RS-232C communication control
except to turn the projector on and the network function are disabled
while the projector is in the standby mode. If the COMMUNICATION
TYPE in the COMMUNICATION menu is set to NETWORK
BRIDGE, all of the RS-232C commands are disabled (
72).
• When SAVING is selected, AUDIO OUT STANDBY setting of
AUDIO SOURCE (
57) is invalid, and no signal is output from
AUDIO OUT port in the standby mode.
• When SAVING is selected, STANDBY setting of MONITOR OUT
is invalid, and no signal is output from MONITOR OUT port in the
standby mode.
• When SAVING is selected, the CENTERING feature while the
projector is in the standby mode is disabled.
• <Only for CP-X8160, CP-WX8255 and CP-WU8450> When
SAVING is selected, the Status Monitor and its button operation are
unavailable while the projector is in the standby mode.
MONITOR OUT
While the image signal from the input port chosen in step (1) is
projected, the image signal from the input
port selected in step (2) is output to
MONITOR OUT port.
(1) Choose a picture input port using
▲/▼ buttons.
Choose STANDBY to select the
picture output in the standby mode.
(2) Select one of the COMPUTER IN
ports using ◄/► buttons.
Select OFF to disable the MONITOR
OUT port for the input port or standby
mode chosen in the step (1).
• <Only for CP-X8150, CP-X8160, CP-
WX8240, CP-WX8255 and CP-SX8350>
You cannot select COMPUTER IN1 in
step (1) and COMPUTER IN2 in step (2)
and vice versa.
<CP-X8150, CP-X8160,
CP-WX8240, CP-WX8255,
CP-SX8350>
<
CP-WU8440, CP-WU8450
>
57
AUDIO menu
AUDIO menu
From the AUDIO menu, items shown in the table below
can be performed. Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor
buttons, and press the ► cursor button or the ENTER
button to execute the item. Then perform it according to
the following table.
Item Description
VOLUME
Using the ◄/► buttons adjusts the volume.
Low
Ù
High
SPEAKER
Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns on/off the built-in speaker.
ON
Ù
OFF
When OFF is selected, the built-in speaker does not work.
AUDIO SOURCE
While the image signal from the input port chosen in step (1) is
projected, the audio signal from the input port selected in step
(2) is output to both the AUDIO OUT port and built-in speaker of
this projector. However, the built-in speaker does not work when
SPEAKER is set to OFF.
(1) Choose a picture input port using the
▲/▼ buttons.
Choose AUDIO OUT STANDBY to
select the sound output in the standby
mode.
(2) Select an audio input port or the mute
icon using the ◄/► buttons.
The icons indicate the following;
No.1: AUDIO IN1 port No.2: AUDIO IN2 port
No.3: AUDIO IN3 ports No.4: LAN port
No.5: USB TYPE A ports No.6: USB TYPE B port
No.7: HDMI 1 port No.8: HDMI 2 port
: mutes the sound
• Audio input from port nos.4 to 8 can only be selected by each of
the picture input ports.
• C.C. (Closed Caption) is automatically activated when
is selected
and an input signal containing C.C. is received. This function is
available only when the signal is NTSC for VIDEO or S-VIDEO, or
480i@60 for COMPONENT, COMPUTER IN1 or COMPUTER IN2,
and when AUTO is selected for DISPLAY in the C.C. menu under the
SCREEN menu (
64).
(continued on next page)
58
AUDIO menu
Item Description
HDMI AUDIO
The mode of HDMI
TM
audio from the HDMI 1 and 2 ports can be set.
(1) Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select the
HDMI port to be set.
(2) Use the ◄/►buttons to select the
mode of HDMI
TM
audio.
Check each of the two modes provided and select the suitable
one for your HDMI
TM
audio device.
59
SCREEN menu
SCREEN menu
From the SCREEN menu, items shown in the table
below can be performed.
Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons, and
press the ► cursor button or ENTER button to
execute the item. Then perform it according to the
following table.
Item Description
LANGUAGE
Using the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons switches the OSD (On Screen
Display) language.
ENGLISH
Ù
FRANÇAIS
Ù
DEUTSCH
Ù
ESPAÑOL
(shown in the LANGUAGE dialog)
Press the ENTER or INPUT button to save the language setting.
MENU POSITION
Using the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons adjusts the menu position.
To quit the operation, press the MENU button on the remote control
or keep no operation for about 10 seconds.
BLANK
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the BLANK screen.
The BLANK screen is displayed for the AV MUTE function (
25). It
is displayed by pressing the AV MUTE button on the remote control.
MyScreen
Ù
ORIGINAL
Ù
BLUE
Ù
WHITE
Ù
BLACK
MyScreen :
Screen can be registered by the MyScreen item (
60).
ORIGINAL : Screen preset as the standard screen.
BLUE, WHITE, BLACK : Plain screens in each color.
• To avoid remaining as an afterimage, the MyScreen or ORIGINAL
screen will change to the plain black screen after several minutes.
START UP
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the mode for the start-up screen.
The start-up screen is a screen displayed when no signal or an
unsuitable signal is detected.
MyScreen
Ù
ORIGINAL
Ù
OFF
MyScreen :
Screen can be registered by the MyScreen item (
60).
ORIGINAL : Screen preset as the standard screen.
OFF : Plain black screen.
• To avoid remaining as an afterimage, the MyScreen or ORIGINAL
screen will change to the BLANK screen (
above) after several
minutes. If also the BLANK screen is the MyScreen or ORIGINAL,
the plain black screen is instead used.
• When the ON is selected to the MyScreen PASSWORD item in
the SECURITY menu (
88), the START UP is fixed to MyScreen.
(continued on next page)
60
SCREEN menu
Item Description
MyScreen
This item allows you to capture an image for use as a MyScreen
image which can be used as the BLANK screen and START UP
screen. Display the image you want to capture before executing the
following procedure.
(1) Selecting this item displays a dialog
titled “MyScreen”. It will ask you if
you start capturing an image from
the current screen.
Please wait for the target image to be displayed, and press
the ENTER or INPUT button when the image is displayed. The
image will freeze and the frame for capturing will appear.
To stop performing, press the RESET button on the remote
control.
(2) Using the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons adjusts
the frame position.
Please move the frame to the position
of the image which you want to use.
The frame may not be able to be
moved for some input signals.
To start registration, press the ENTER
or INPUT button on the remote control.
To restore the screen and return to the previous dialog, press the
RESET button on the remote control.
Registration may take several minutes.
When the registration is completed, the registered screen and
the following message is displayed for several seconds:
³0\6FUHHQUHJLVWUDWLRQLV¿QLVKHG´
If the registration failed, the following message is displayed:
³$FDSWXULQJHUURUKDVRFFXUUHG3OHDVHWU\DJDLQ´
• This function cannot be selected when the ON is selected to the
MyScreen Lock item (
61).
• This function cannot be selected when the ON is selected to the
MyScreen PASSWORD item in SECURITY menu (
88).
• This function is unavailable for a signal from the LAN, USB TYPE
A / B or HDMI 1 / 2 port.
•
Drawing with Drawing function cannot be captured
(
104).
(continued on next page)
61
SCREEN menu
Item Description
MyScreen Lock
Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns on/off the MyScreen lock function.
ON
Ù
OFF
When the ON is selected, the item MyScreen is locked. Use this
function for protecting the current MyScreen.
• This function cannot be selected when the ON is selected to the
MyScreen PASSWORD item in SECURITY menu (
88).
MESSAGE
Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns on/off the message function.
ON
Ù
OFF
When the ON is selected, the following message function works.
“AUTO IN PROGRESS” while automatically adjusting
“NO INPUT IS DETECTED”
“SYNC IS OUT OF RANGE”
“INVALID SCAN FREQ.”
“NOT AVAILABLE”
“+++ FOCUS +++”
“Searching….” while searching for the input
“Detecting….” while an input signal is detected
“AUTO ECO MODE” while starting up with AUTO ECO MODE
The indication of the input signal displayed by changing
The indication of the aspect ratio displayed by changing
The indication of the PICTURE MODE displayed by changing
The indication of the ACTIVE IRIS displayed by changing
The indication of the MY MEMORY displayed by changing
The indication of “FREEZE” and “II” while freezing the screen by
pressing the FREEZE button.
The indication of the TEMPLATE displayed by changing.
The indication of the ECO MODE displayed by changing.
• When the OFF is selected, please remember if the picture is
frozen. Do not mistake freezing for a malfunction (
36).
(continued on next page)
62
SCREEN menu
Item Description
SOURCE NAME
Each input port for this projector can have a name applied to it.
(1) Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SCREEN menu to select SOURCE
NAME and press the ► or ENTER button.
The SOURCE NAME menu will be displayed.
(2) Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SOURCE
NAME menu to select the port to be
named and press the ► button. The
SOURCE NAME dialog will be displayed.
Right side of the menu is blank until a
name is specied.
(3) Select an icon you would like to assign to
the port in the SOURCE NAME dialog.
The name assigned to the port will also
be automatically switched according to
your icon selection. Press the ENTER
or INPUT button to determine your icon
selection.
(4) Select a number you would like to assign
to the port along with the icon. You can
select the number either from blank (no
number assigned), 1, 2, 3, or 4.
Then press the ENTER or INPUT button.
(5) If you would like to modify the name assigned
to the port, select CUSTOM NAME and press
the ENTER or INPUT button.
(continued on next page)
63
SCREEN menu
Item Description
SOURCE NAME
(continued)
(6) The current name will be displayed on
the rst line. Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons
and the ENTER or INPUT button to
select and enter characters. To erase 1
character at one time, press the RESET
button or press the ◄ and INPUT button
at the same time. Also if you move the
cursor to DELETE or ALL CLEAR on
screen and press the ENTER or INPUT
button, 1 character or all characters will
be erased. The name can be a maximum
of 16 characters.
(7) To change an already inserted character,
press the ▲ button to move the cursor to
the rst line, and use the ◄/► buttons to
move the cursor on the character to be
changed.
After pressing the ENTER or INPUT button, the character is
selected. Then, follow the same procedure as described at the
item (6) above.
(8)
To nish entering text, move the cursor to the OK on screen and
press the ►, ENTER or INPUT button. To revert to the previous
name without saving changes, move the cursor to the CANCEL
on screen and press the ◄, ENTER or INPUT button.
TEMPLATE
Using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons switches the mode for the template
screen.
Press the ► cursor (or the ENTER) button to display the selected
template, and press the ◄ cursor button to close the displayed
screen.
The last selected template is displayed when the MY BUTTON
allocated to the TEMPLATE function is pressed (
68).
TEST PATTERN
Ù
DOT-LINE1
Ù
DOT-LINE2
Ù
DOT-LINE3
Ú
Ú
STACK
Ù
MAP2
Ù
MAP1
Ù
CIRCLE2
Ù
CIRCLE1
Ù
DOT-LINE4
You can turn a map upside down and scroll it horizontally when
MAP1 or MAP2 is selected. To invert or scroll the map, display
the guidance by pressing the RESET button on the remote three
seconds or more when MAP1 or MAP2 appears.
(continued on next page)
64
SCREEN menu
Item Description
C.C.
(Closed Caption)
The C.C. is the function that displays a
transcript or dialog of the audio portion of
a video, les or other presentation or other
relevant sounds. It is required to have NTSC
format video or 480i@60 format component
video source supporting C.C. feature to
utilize this function.
It may not work properly, depending on equipment or signal source.
In this case, please turn off the Closed Caption.
DISPLAY
Select Closed Caption DISPLAY setting from following options using
▲/▼ buttons.
AUTO
Ù
ON
Ù
OFF
AUTO : Closed Caption automatically appears when the input signal
(C.C. compatible) from the port with the mute icon set at
AUDIO SOURCE is selected.
ON : Closed Caption is on.
OFF : Closed Caption is off.
• The caption is not displayed when the OSD menu is active.
• The Closed Caption is the function to display the dialogue,
narration, and / or sound effects of a television program or other
video sources. The Closed Caption availability is depending upon
broadcaster and/or content.
MODE
Select Closed Caption MODE setting from following options using
▲/▼ buttons.
CAPTIONS
Ù
TEXT
CAPTIONS : Display Closed Caption.
TEXT : Display Text data, which is for additional information such as
news reports or a TV program guide. The information covers
the entire screen. Not all of the C.C. program has Text
information.
CHANNEL
Select Closed Caption CHANNEL from following options using ▲/▼
buttons.
1
Ù
2
Ù
3
Ù
4
1: Channel 1, primary channel / language
2: Channel 2
3: Channel 3
4: Channel 4
The channel data may vary, depending on the content. Some
channel might be used for secondary language or empty.
65
OPTION menu
OPTION menu
From the OPTION menu, items shown in the table
below can be performed.
Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons, and
press the ► cursor button or ENTER button to execute
the item, except for the items LAMP TIME and FILTER
TIME. Then perform it according to the following table.
Item Description
SOURCE SKIP
The ports can be set to be ignored in searching by the AUTO
SEARCH function (
below) or in selecting by buttons on the control
panel.
(1) Choose a picture input port using the
▲/▼ buttons.
(2) Using the ◄/►buttons turns on/off the
SOURCE SKIP function.
NORMAL
Ù
SKIP
The port that is set to SKIP will be ignored.
• It is not possible to set SKIP to all ports at the same time.
• This setting is not valid when in the PbyP mode (
37)
.
AUTO SEARCH
Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns on/off the automatic signal search
function.
ON
Ù
OFF
When the ON is selected, detecting no signal automatically cycles
through input ports in the following order. The search is started from
the current port. Then when an input is found, the projector will stop
searching and display the image.
COMPUTER IN1
Ö
COMPUTER IN2
Ö
LAN
Ö
USB TYPE A
× Ø
VIDEO
USB TYPE B
× Ø
S-VIDEO
Õ
COMPONENT
Õ
HDMI 2
Õ
HDMI 1
• It may take several seconds to project the images from the
USB TYPE B port.
AUTO
KEYSTONE
Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns on/off the automatic keystone function.
ON
Ù
OFF
ON: Automatic keystone distortion correction will be executed
whenever changing the slant of the projector.
OFF: This function is disabled. Please execute the AUTO
KEYSTONE (EXECUTE) in the SETUP menu for automatic
keystone distortion correction.
• When the projector is suspended from the ceiling this feature will
not function properly so select the OFF.
• This function will be unavailable when the Transition Detector is on
(
90).
(continued on next page)
66
OPTION menu
Item Description
DIRECT POWER
ON
Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns on/off the DIRECT POWER ON
function.
ON
Ù
OFF
When set to the ON, the lamp in projector will be automatically turned
on without the usual procedure (
24), only when the projector is
supplied with the power after the power was cut while the lamp was on.
• This function does not work as long as the power has been
supplied to the projector while the lamp is off.
• After turning the lamp on by the DIRECT POWER ON function,
if neither input nor operation is detected for about 30 minutes, the
projector is turned off, even though the AUTO POWER OFF function
(
below) is disabled.
AUTO POWER
OFF
Using the ▲/▼ buttons adjusts the time to count down to
automatically turn the projector off.
Long (max. 99 minutes)
Ù
Short (min. 0 minute = DISABLE)
When the time is set to 0, the projector is not turned off
automatically.
When the time is set to 1 to 99, and when the passed time with
no-signal or an unsuitable signal reaches at the set time, the
projector lamp will be turned off.
If one of the projector's buttons or the remote control buttons
is pressed or one of the commands (except get commands) is
transmitted to the CONTROL port during the corresponding time,
projector will not be turned off.
Please refer to the section Turning off the power (
24).
SHADE TIMER
Using the ▲/▼ buttons sets the time from closing the lens shade to
automatically turning the projector off.
1h
Ù
3h
Ù
6h
• The shade will open automatically when turning the projector on
again.
(continued on next page)
67
OPTION menu
Item Description
USB TYPE B
Using the ▲/▼ buttons selects the function of USB TYPE B port.
To use this function, you need to connect the USB TYPE B port of
the projector and the type A USB port of a computer.
MOUSE
Ù
USB DISPLAY
MOUSE: The accessory remote control works as the simple mouse
and keyboard of the computer.
USB DISPLAY: The port works as an input port that receives image
signals from the computer (
109).
• It may take several seconds to project the images from the USB
TYPE B port.
• In the following cases, a message to notify you that USB TYPE B
port is not available for picture input appears together with the USB
TYPE B dialog:
- This setting is switched to MOUSE while a picture input from the
USB TYPE B port is projected.
- The USB TYPE B port is selected as the picture input source while
this setting is set to MOUSE. Select USB DISPLAY in the dialog to
project the picture input to the USB TYPE B port. In this case, you
cannot use the simple mouse and keyboard function. Otherwise
select other port for picture input.
LAMP TIME
The lamp time is the usage time of the lamp, counted after the last
resetting. It is shown in the OPTION menu.
Pressing the RESET button on the remote control or the ► button
of the projector displays a dialog.
To reset the lamp time, select the OK using the ► button.
CANCEL
Ö
OK
• Please reset the lamp time only when you have replaced the lamp,
for a suitable indication about the lamp.
• For the lamp replacement, see the section Replacing the lamp
(
113).
• The lamp time can be checked also with the Status Monitor on
CP-X8160, CP-WX8255, CP-WU8450 (
22).
FILTER TIME
The lter time is the usage time of the air lter, counted after the last
resetting. It is shown in the OPTION menu.
Pressing the RESET button on the remote control or the ► button
of the projector displays a dialog.
To reset the lter time, select the OK using the ► button.
CANCEL
Ö
OK
• Please reset the lter time only when you have cleaned or
replaced the air lter, for a suitable indication about the air lter.
• For the air lter cleaning, see the section Cleaning and replacing
the air lter (
115).
• The lter time can be checked also with the Status Monitor on CP-
X8160, CP-WX8255, CP-WU8450 (
22).
(continued on next page)
68
OPTION menu
Item Description
MY BUTTON
This item is to assign one of the following functions to MY BUTTON
(1 to 4) on the remote control (
6).
(1) Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the MY BUTTON menu to select a
button from MY BUTTON - 1 to 4 and press the ► or ENTER
button to display the MY BUTTON setup dialog.
(2) Then using the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons sets one of the following
functions to the chosen button. Press the ENTER or INPUT
button to save the setting.
SLIDESHOW: Selects the input from USB TYPE A, and starts a
Slideshow.
MY IMAGE: Displays the MY IMAGE menu (
84).
MESSENGER: Turns the messenger text displayed on the screen
on/off (
5. Messenger Function in the Network Guide).
When there is no transferred text data to display, the message
”NO MESSENGER DATA" appears.
SHADE: Turns the lens shade closed and opened (
36).
PbyP SWAP: <Only for CP-WU8440 and CP-WU8450> Swaps the
picture on the right with one on the left when in the PbyP mode
(
38).
INFORMATION: Displays SYSTEM_INFORMATION,
INPUT_INFORMATION (
75), WIRELESS INFORMATION
(
80), WIRED INFORMATION (
82) or nothing.
AUTO KEYSTONE: Performs automatic keystone distortion
correction (
54).
MY MEMORY: Loads one of adjustment data stored (
46).
When more than one data are saved, the adjustment
changes every time the MY BUTTON is pressed.
When no data is saved in memory, the
dialog "No saved data" appears.
When the current adjustment is not
saved to memory, the dialog as shown in
the right appears.
If you want to keep the current adjustment, please press
the ► button to exit. Otherwise loading a data will overwrite the
current adjusted condition.
ACTIVE IRIS: Changes the active iris mode (
46).
PICTURE MODE: Changes the PICTURE MODE (
42).
FILTER RESET: Displays the lter time reset conrmation dialogue
(
67).
TEMPLATE: Makes the template pattern selected to the TEMPLATE
item (
63) appear or disappear.
MUTE: Turns the audio mute on/off.
RESOLUTION: Turns on/off the RESOLUTION dialog (
53).
ECO MODE: Turns on/off the ECO MODE dialog (
55).
(continued on next page)
69
OPTION menu
Item Description
SERVICE
Selecting this item displays the SERVICE
menu.
Select an item using the ▲/▼ buttons,
and press the ► button or the ENTER
button on the remote control to execute
the item.
ALTITUDE
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the rotation speed of the cooling
fans. It is recommended to leave it at AUTO usually.
HIGH-2
Ù
HIGH-1
Ù
NORMAL
Ù
AUTO
AUTO: The projector changes the rotation speed automatically to
suit the altitude and other environmental factors.
Choose an option below when there is a trouble with the
AUTO mode.
NORMAL: This mode can be used below 1600m (5250ft.).
HIGH-1: This mode can be used between 1600 to 2300m (5250 to
7550ft.).
HIGH-2: This mode can be used above 2300m (7550ft.).
AUTO ADJUST
Using the ▲/▼ buttons to select one of the mode. When the
DISABLE is selected, the automatic adjustment feature is disabled.
FINE
Ù
FAST
Ù
DISABLE
FINE: Finer tuning including H.SIZE adjustment.
FAST: Faster tuning, setting H.SIZE to prearranged data for the
input signal.
• Depending on conditions, such as input image, signal cable to
the projector, environment around the projector, etc., the automatic
adjustment may not work correctly. In such a case, please
choose DISABLE to disable the automatic adjustment, and make
adjustment manually.
GHOST
(1) Select a color element of ghost using
the ◄/► buttons.
(2) Adjust the selected element using the ▲/▼ buttons to disappear
ghost.
(continued on next page)
70
OPTION menu
Item Description
SERVICE
(continued)
FILTER MESSAGE
Use the ▲/▼ button to set the timer for notifying by the message
when to replace the lter unit
CP-X8150, CP-WX8240, CP-SX8350, CP-WU8440:
1000h
Ù
2000h
Ù
5000h
Ù
10000h
Ù
15000h
Ù
OFF
CP-X8160, CP-WX8255, CP-WU8450:
1000h
Ù
2000h
Ù
5000h
Ù
10000h
Ù
15000h
Ù
20000h
Ù
OFF
After choosing an item except OFF, the message “REMINDER ***
HRS PASSED ....” will appear after the timer reaches the interval
time set by this feature (
119).
When the OFF is chosen, the message will not appear. Utilize this
feature to keep the air lter clean, setting the suitable time according
to your environment of this projector.
• Please take care of the lter unit periodically, even if there is
no message. If the air lter becomes to be blocked by dust or
other matter, the internal temperature will rise, which could cause
malfunction, or reduce the lifetime of the projector.
• Please be careful with the operating environment of the projector
and the condition of the lter unit.
LENS TYPE
(1) Select the lens type currently used using the ▲/▼ buttons and
press the ► or ENTER button. Please select one of following
according to the type of lens unit. If AUTO is selected, the
projector determines the lens type automatically.
(2) A message dialog is displayed for conrmation. Press the ► or
ENTER button to save the lens type.
• This setting has an inuence on the keystone distortion etc.
• The lens type determined by the projector will be displayed on the
right of "AUTO".
• If the projector cannot determine the lens type automatically when
this item is set to AUTO, "UNKNOWN LENS" is displayed on the
right of "AUTO".
• About the optional lens, ask your dealer.
LENS LOCK
Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns on/off the lens lock feature. When ON
is selected, the buttons (ZOOM, ZOOM + / -, FOCUS + / -, LENS
SHIFT, LENS MEMORY) are locked.
ON
Ù
OFF
(continued on next page)
71
OPTION menu
Item Description
SERVICE
(continued)
KEY LOCK
(1) Use the ▲/▼ buttons to choose the operations control.
CONTROL PANEL
Ù
REMOTE CONTROL
(2) Use the ◄/► buttons to select ON or
OFF.
ON
Ù
OFF
Selecting ON in Step 2 locks the buttons except STANDBY, ON
and STANDBY/ON on the operations control selected in Step 1.
Selecting OFF releases the locked buttons on the operations control
selected in Step 1.
• Please use this function to prevent tampering or accidental
operation.
• It's not possible to disable both options at the same time.
REMOTE RECEIV.
(1) Select a remote sensor using the ▲/▼ button.
FRONT
Ù
REAR
(2) Switch it using the ◄/► button.
ON
Ù
OFF
• When one sensor is turned off, the other cannot be turned off too.
REMOTE FREQ.
(1) Use the ▲/▼ button to change the projector's remote sensor
frequency setting (
4, 18).
1:NORMAL
Ù
2:HIGH
(2) Use the ◄/► button to change the
projector's remote sensor on or off.
ON
Ù
OFF
The factory default setting is for both 1:NORMAL and 2:HIGH to be
on. If the remote control does not function correctly, disable either of
them.
• It's not possible to disable both options at the same time.
REMOTE ID
Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the REMOTE ID menu to select ID and
press the ► button.
ALL
Ù
1
Ù
2
Ù
3
Ù
4
The projector is controlled by the remote control whose ID button
is set the same number as this number. When the ALL is selected,
the projector is controlled by a remote control irrespective of the ID
setting.
(continued on next page)
72
OPTION menu
Item Description
SERVICE
(continued)
COMMUNICATION
Selecting this item displays COMMUNICATION
menu.
In this menu, you can congure the serial
communication settings of the projector using the
CONTROL port.
• Select an item using the cursor buttons ▲/▼.
Then pressing the ► button opens the submenu
for the setting item you selected. Or, pressing
the ◄ button instead of the ► button makes the
menu back to the previous one without changing
the setup. Each submenu can be operated as
described above.
• When COMMUNICATION TYPE
(
below)
is
set to OFF, the other items except STACK in
COMMUNICATION menu are invalid.
• For the function of serial communication, refer to
the Network Guide.
COMMUNICATION TYPE
Select the communication type for transmission via
the CONTROL port.
NETWORK BRIDGE (WIRELESS)
Ú
NETWORK BRIDGE (WIRED)
Ú
OFF
NETWORK BRIDGE: Select this type, if it is
required to control an external device as a
network terminal, via this projector from the
computer. Select WIRELESS or WIRED as your
network connection mode.
The CONTROL port doesn't accept RS-232C
commands (
6. Network Bridge Function in
the Network Guide)
OFF: Select this mode to receive RS-232C
commands using the CONTROL port.
• OFF is selected as the default setting.
• When you select the NETWORK BRIDGE, check
the item, TRANSMISSTION METHOD
(
73)
(continued on next page)
73
OPTION menu
Item Description
SERVICE
(continued)
COMMUNICATION
(continued)
SERIAL SETTINGS
Select the serial communication condition for the
CONTROL port.
BAUD RATE
4800bps
Ù
9600bps
Ù
19200bps
Ù
38400bps
PARITY
NONE
Ù
ODD
Ù
EVEN
•
The BAUD RATE is xed to 19200bps and PARITY
is xed NONE when the COMMUNICATION TYPE
is set to OFF
(
72)
.
TRANSMISSION METHOD
Select the transmission method for communication by
the NETWORK BRIDGE from the CONTROL port.
HALF-DUPLEX
Ù
FULL-DUPLEX
HALF-DUPLEX: This method lets the projector
make two way communication, but only one
direction, either transmitting or receiving data, is
allowed at a time.
FULL-DUPLEX: This method lets the projector
make two way communication, transmitting and
receiving data at the same time.
• HALF-DUPLEX is selected as the default setting.
• If you select HALF-DUPLEX, check the setting of
the item RESPONSE LIMIT TIME
(
74)
.
(continued on next page)
74
OPTION menu
Item Description
SERVICE
(continued)
COMMUNICATION
(continued)
RESPONSE LIMIT TIME
Select the time period to wait for receiving
response data from other device communicating by
the NETWORK BRIDGE and the HALF-DUPLEX
through the CONTROL port.
OFF
Ù
1s
Ù
2s
Ù
3s
OFF: Select this mode if it is not required to check
the responses from the device that the projector
sends data to. In this mode, the projector can
send out data from the computer continuously.
1s /2s /3s: Select the time period to keep the
projector waiting for response from the device
that the projector sends data to. While waiting the
response, the projector does not send out any
data from the CONTROL port.
• This menu is available only when the NETWORK
BRIDGE is selected for the COMMUNICATION
TYPE and the HALF-DUPLEX is selected for the
TRANSMISSION METHOD (
73).
• OFF is selected as the default setting.
STACK
Selecting this item displays the STACK menu.
For more information, please see Instant Stack
Guide.
• When STACK MODE is set to MAIN or SUB,
the other items in COMMUNICATION menu are
invalid.
(continued on next page)
75
OPTION menu
Item Description
SERVICE
(continued)
INFORMATION
Selecting this item displays a dialog titled “INPUT_INFORMATION”.
It shows the information about the current input.
• The “FRAME LOCK” message on the dialog means the frame lock
function is working.
• The “SCART RGB” message means the COMPONENT ports
are working as a SCART RGB input port. Please refer to the
COMPONENT item in INPUT menu (
50).
• This item can't be selected for no signal and sync out.
• When the MY TEXT DISPLAY is set to ON, the MY TEXT is
displayed together with the input information in the
INPUT_INFORMATION box (
92).
FACTORY RESET
Selecting OK using the ► button performs this function. By
this function, all the items in all of menus will collectively return
to the initial setting. Note that the items LAMP TIME, FILTER
TIME, LANGUAGE, FILTER MESSAGE, STANDBY MODE,
COMMUNICATION, NETWORK and SECURITY settings are not
reset.
CANCEL
Ö
OK
76
NETWORK menu
Remember that incorrect network settings on this
projector may cause trouble on the network. Be sure
to consult with your network administrator before
connecting to an existing access point on your network.
Select “NETWORK” from the main menu to access the
following functions.
Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons on the
projector or remote control, and press the ► cursor button on the projector or
remote control, or ENTER button on the remote control to execute the item. Then
perform it according to the following table.
See the Network Guide for details of NETWORK operation.
NETWORK menu
• To use the wireless network function of this projector, the designated
USB wireless adapter that is sold as an option is required. Do not use any
extension cable or device when connecting the adapter to the projector.
• The projector does not allow both wireless and wired LAN to be connected to
the same network.
• Do not set the same network address for both wireless and wired LAN.
• If you are not utilizing SNTP (
3.1.8 Date/Time Settings in the Network
Guide), then you must set the DATE AND TIME during the initial installation.
• The network communication control is disabled while the projector is in
standby mode if the STANDBY MODE item of SETUP menu is set to SAVING.
Please connect the network communication to the projector after setting the
STANDBY MODE to NORMAL (
56
).
NOTE
Item Description
WIRELESS
SETUP
Selecting this item displays the WIRELESS
SETUP menu for the wireless LAN.
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select an item,
and the ► or ENTER button on the remote
control to perform the item.
MODE
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select the mode of the
network communication system. Select according
to the settings of your computer.
AD HOC
Ù
INFRASTRUCTURE
To save the setting, press the ► button.
• When ADHOC is selected, IEEE802.11 n cannot
be used.
• If ADHOC is set to MODE while one of WPA-
PSK or WPA2-PSK is selected in ENCRYPTION,
the ENCRYPTION (
78) setting switches to OFF
automatically.
(continued on next page)
77
NETWORK menu
Item Description
WIRELESS
SETUP
(continued)
DHCP
(Dynamic Host
&RQ¿JXUDWLRQ
Protocol)
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to turn DHCP on/off.
ON
Ù
OFF
Select OFF when the network does not have DHCP
enabled. To save the setting, press the ► button.
• When the “DHCP” setting changes to “ON”, it
takes a little time to obtain IP address from DHCP
server.
• Auto IP function will be assigned an IP address if
the projector could not obtain an IP address from
server even if DHCP is “ON”
IP ADDRESS
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the IP
ADDRESS.
This function can only be used when DHCP is set
to OFF.
• The IP ADDRESS is the number that identies
this projector on the network. You cannot have two
devices with the same IP ADDRESS on the same
network.
• The IP ADDRESS “0.0.0.0” is prohibited.
SUBNET
MASK
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the same
SUBNET MASK used by your computer.
This function can only be used when DHCP is set
to OFF.
• The SUBNET MASK “0.0.0.0” is prohibited.
DEFAULT
GATEWAY
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the DEFAULT
GATEWAY (a node on a computer network that
serves as an access point to another network)
address.
This function can only be used when DHCP is set
to OFF.
DNS SERVER
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to input the DNS
server address.
The DNS server is a system to control domain
names and IP addresses on the Network.
TIME
DIFFERENCE
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to enter the TIME
DIFFERENCE.
Set the same TIME DIFFERENCE as the one
set on your computer. If unsure, consult your IT
manager.
Use the ► button to return to the menu after
setting the TIME DIFFERENCE.
• When this item is set, the same item in the
WIRED SETUP menu is overwritten with the same
setting (
82).
(continued on next page)
78
NETWORK menu
Item Description
WIRELESS
SETUP
(continued)
DATE AND
TIME
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the Year (last
two digits), Month, Date, Hour and Minute.
• When this item is set, the same item in the
WIRED SETUP menu is overwritten with the same
setting (
82).
• The projector will override this setting and retrieve
DATE AND TIME information from the Time server
when SNTP is enabled. (
3.1.8
Date/Time
Settings in the Network Guide)
• This setting will be reset if the projector is turned
off while STANDBY MODE in the SETUP menu
is set to SAVING (
56), or when the AC power is
turned off.
CH
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select the channel of the
wireless LAN to be used while MODE (
76) is set
to ADHOC. Select according to the settings of your
computer.
The channels 1 to 11 are available. To save the
setting, press the ► button.
• The available channels would be various
depending on a country. In addition, wireless
network card might be required due to the
standard.
• This item can only be selected when MODE
is set to ADHOC. When MODE is set to
INFRASTRUCTURE, the channel is automatically
selected.
ENCRYPTION
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select the encryption
method to be used.
WPA2-PSK(AES)
Ù
WPA2-PSK(TKIP)
Ú
Ú
OFF WPA-PSK(AES)
Ú
Ú
WEP 64bit
Ù
WEP 128bit
Ù
WPA-PSK(TKIP)
To save the setting, press the ► button.
• When MODE (
76) is set to ADHOC, either
WPA-PSK and WPA2-PSK cannot be selected.
• If IEEE802.11 n is used while MODE is set to
INFRASTRUCTURE, TKIP and WEP are disabled.
If OFF or AES is not selected, communication will
switch automatically to IEEE802.11 b/g.
(continued on next page)
79
NETWORK menu
Item Description
WIRELESS
SETUP
(continued)
SSID
Use the ▲/▼
buttons to select the
SSID to display the
SSID menu.
#1 DEFAULT
Ù
#2 DEFAULT
Ù
#3 DEFAULT
#5 CUSTOM
Ù
#4 DEFAULT
Select one of the DEFAULT (#1~#4) and press ►
or ENTER button.
To adjust CUSTOM
Press the ► or ENTER button when the # 5
CUSTOM is selected. The SSID #5 CUSTOM
menu will be appeared.
(1)
The current SSID will be displayed on the
rst line. If not yet written, the line will be blank.
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons and the ENTER or
INPUT button to select and enter characters. To
erase 1 character at one time, press the RESET
button or press the ◄ and INPUT button at the
same time. Also if you move the cursor to DELETE
or ALL CLEAR on screen and press the ENTER or
INPUT button, 1 character or all characters will be
erased. The SSID can be input up to 32 characters.
(2)
To change an
already inserted
character, press
the ▲/▼ button to
move the cursor
to one of the rst
2 lines, and use
the ◄/► buttons
to move the cursor
on the character to
be changed. After
pressing the ENTER
or INPUT button,
the character is
selected. Then,
follow the same
procedure as
described at the
item (1) above.
(3)
To nish entering text, move the cursor to the OK
on screen and press the ►, ENTER or INPUT
button. To revert to the previous name without
saving changes, move the cursor to the CANCEL on
screen and press the ◄, ENTER or INPUT button.
(continued on next page)
80
NETWORK menu
Item Description
WIRELESS
INFORMATION
Selecting this item displays the WIRELESS INFORMATION dialog
for viewing the wireless LAN settings. Use the ▲/▼ buttons to
switch the page.
The rst page shows the wireless LAN settings. The second and
subsequent pages display the signal information of wireless LAN
connection devices.
• For details of PASSCODE, refer to the manual for “LiveViewer”.
• Nothing (blank) is shown in the PROJECTOR NAME
(
83)
and
SSID
(
79)
field until you setup those items. Only the first 16
characters of the PROJECTOR NAME.
• IP ADDRESS, SUBNET MASK and DEFAULT GATEWAY indicate
“0.0.0.0” in the following condition.
(1) The USB wireless adapter is not inserted into the projector.
(2) DHCP is ON and the projector does not get address from DHCP
server.
• Nothing (blank) is shown in the CH and SPEED elds if the USB
wireless adapter is not inserted.
• The actual performance and setting will be shown in the CH eld,
instead of the setting value in the WIRELESS SETUP menu.
• An icon is displayed to the left of the SSID of the device connected
to the projector.
(continued on next page)
81
NETWORK menu
Item Description
WIRED SETUP
Selecting this item displays the WIRED
SETUP menu for the wired LAN.
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select an item,
and the ► or ENTER button on the remote
control to perform the item.
DHCP
(Dynamic Host
&RQ¿JXUDWLRQ
Protocol)
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to turn DHCP on/off.
ON
Ù
OFF
Select OFF when the network does not have
DHCP enabled. To save the setting, press the ►
button.
• When the “DHCP” setting changes to “ON”, it
takes a little time to obtain IP address from DHCP
server.
• Auto IP function will be assigned an IP address if
the projector could not obtain an IP address from
server even if DHCP is “ON”.
IP ADDRESS
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the IP
ADDRESS.
This function can only be used when DHCP is set
to OFF.
• The IP ADDRESS is the number that identies
this projector on the network. You cannot have two
devices with the same IP ADDRESS on the same
network.
• The IP ADDRESS “0.0.0.0” is prohibited.
SUBNET
MASK
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the same
SUBNET MASK used by your computer.
This function can only be used when DHCP is set
to OFF.
• The SUBNET MASK “0.0.0.0” is prohibited.
DEFAULT
GATEWAY
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the DEFAULT
GATEWAY (a node on a computer network that
serves as an access point to another network)
address.
This function can only be used when DHCP is set
to OFF.
DNS SERVER
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to input the DNS
server address.
The DNS server is a system to control domain
names and IP addresses on the Network.
(continued on next page)
82
NETWORK menu
Item Description
WIRED SETUP
(continued)
TIME
DIFFERENCE
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to enter the TIME
DIFFERENCE.
Set the same TIME DIFFERENCE as the one
set on your computer. If unsure, consult your IT
manager.
Use the ► button to return to the menu after
setting the TIME DIFFERENCE.
• When this item is set, the same item in the
WIRELESS SETUP menu is overwritten with the
same setting (
77).
DATE AND
TIME
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the Year (last
two digits), Month, Date, Hour and Minute.
• When this item is set, the same item in the
WIRELESS SETUP menu is overwritten with the
same setting (
78).
• The projector will override this setting and retrieve
DATE AND TIME information from the Time server
when SNTP is enabled. (
3.1.8
Date/Time
Settings in the Network Guide)
• This setting will be reset if the projector is turned
off while STANDBY MODE in the SETUP menu
is set to SAVING (
56), or when the AC power is
turned off.
WIRED
INFORMATION
Selecting this item displays the WIRED INFORMATION dialog for
viewing the wired LAN settings.
• For details of PASSCODE, refer to the manual for “LiveViewer”.
• Only the first 16 characters of the PROJECTOR NAME are
displayed.
• IP ADDRESS, SUBNET MASK and DEFAULT GATEWAY indicate
“0.0.0.0” when DHCP is ON and the projector has not gotten address
from DHCP server.
(continued on next page)
83
NETWORK menu
Item Description
PROJECTOR
NAME
(1) Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the
NETWORK menu to select the
PROJECTOR NAME and press
the ► button. The PROJECTOR
NAME dialog will be displayed.
(2) The current PROJECTOR NAME will be displayed on the rst 3
lines. Particular projector name is pre-assigned by default.
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons and the ENTER or INPUT button to
select and enter characters.
To erase 1 character at one time, press the RESET button or
press the ◄ and INPUT button at the same time. Also if you
move the cursor to DELETE or ALL CLEAR on screen and
push the ENTER or INPUT button, 1 character or all characters
will be erased.The PROJECTOR NAME can be input up to 64
characters.
(3) To change an already inserted
character, press the ▲/▼ button
to move the cursor to one of the
rst 3 lines, and use the ◄/►
buttons to move the cursor on the
character to be changed. After
pressing the ENTER or INPUT
button, the character is selected.
Then, follow the same procedure
as described at the item (2) above.
(4) To nish entering text, move the cursor to the OK on screen and
press the ►, ENTER or INPUT button. To revert to the previous
PROJECTOR NAME without saving changes, move the cursor
to the CANCEL on screen and press the ◄, ENTER or INPUT
button.
(continued on next page)
84
NETWORK menu
Item Description
MY IMAGE
Selecting this item displays the MY
IMAGE menu.
Use the application to transfer the
image data. It can be downloaded
from the Hitachi web site.
(http://www.hitachi-america.us/digitalmedia or http://www.
hitachidigitalmedia.com).
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select an item which is a still image by the
MY IMAGE (
4. My Image Function in the Network Guide) and the
► or ENTER button to display the image.
• The item without image stored cannot be selected.
• The image names are each displayed in 16 characters or less.
To switch the image displayed
Use the ▲/▼ buttons.
To return to the menu
Press the ◄ button on the remote control.
7RHUDVHWKHLPDJHGLVSOD\HGDQGLWVVRXUFH¿OHLQWKHSURMHFWRU
(1) Press the RESET button on the remote
control while displaying an image to display
the MY IMAGE DELETE menu.
(2) Press the ► button to perform to erase.
To stop erasing, press the ◄ button.
AMX D.D.
(AMX Device
Discovery)
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to turn the AMX Device Discovery on/off.
ON
Ù
OFF
When ON is selected, the projector can be detected by controllers
of AMX connected to the same network. For the details of AMX
Device Discovery, visit the AMX web site.
URL: http://www.amx.com/
(as of Feb. 2012)
(continued on next page)
85
NETWORK menu
Item Description
PRESENTATION
Selecting this item displays the PRESENTATION menu.
Use ▲/▼ buttons to select one of the following items, then press ►
or ENTER button to use the function.
• To use Network Presentation, an exclusive application, “LiveViewer”
is required. It can be installed from the bundled application CD.
You can also download the latest version and relevant information
from the Hitachi website (http://www.hitachi-america.us/digitalmedia
or http://www.hitachidigitalmedia.com). For details of Network
Presentation and instructions to install the
“LiveViewer”, refer to the
manual for
“LiveViewer”.
QUIT
PRESENTER
MODE
If you set a computer to the Presenter mode while
its image is projected, the projector is occupied by
the computer and access from any other computer is
blocked.
Use this function to quit the Presenter mode and
allow other computers to access the projector.
Select this item to display a dialog.
Press ► button to choose OK in the dialog.
The Presenter mode is cancelled and a message is
displayed indicating the result.
• To make Presenter mode setting, use “LiveViewer”.
For details,
refer to the manual for “LiveViewer”.
MULTI PC
MODE
If you set one or more computers to the Multi PC
mode on “LiveViewer” and send their images to the
projector, you can select the display mode on the
projector from two options below.
- Single PC mode: displays the image of the selected
computer on full screen.
- Multi PC mode: displays the images sent from up to
four computers on screen that is divided into quarter
sections.
Select this item to display a dialog.
Use the dialog to change the display mode as
explained below.
• To change from Multi PC
mode to Single PC mode, select
one of computers in the dialog
using the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons
and press the ENTER or INPUT
button.
Press the ► button to choose OK, and then press
ENTER or INPUT again. The image for the selected
computer is displayed on full screen.
(continued on next page)
(continued on next page)
86
SECURITY menu
Item Description
PRESENTATION
(continued)
MULTI PC
MODE
(continued)
• To change from Single PC mode to Multi PC mode,
press ► button to choose OK in the dialog and press
the ENTER or INPUT button.
The display mode is changed.
•
For details on how to switch the display mode to Multi
PC mode on your computer, refer to the manual for
“LiveViwer”
.
• The Presenter mode setting of the selected
computer becomes valid when the display mode is
changed to Single PC mode.
Also, the Presenter mode setting
becomes invalid when the
display mode is changed to Multi
PC mode, regardless the setting
on the computers.
For details,
refer to the manual for “LiveViewer”.
DISPLAY
USER NAME
Selecting this item displays the user name. This
function helps you identify from which computer the
current image is sent.
•
You can set a user name for each computer on
“LiveViwer”. For details, refer to the manual for
“LiveViewer”.
SERVICE
Executing this item restarts and initializes the network functions.
Choose the NETWORK RESTART EXECUTE using the button ►.
Then use the button ► to execute.
Network will be once cut off when choose restart.
If DHCP is selected on, IP address may be changed.
After selecting NETWORK RESTART EXECUTE, NETWORK menu
may not be controlled approx. 30 seconds.
87
SECURITY menu
This projector is equipped with security functions.
From the SECURITY menu, items shown in the table
below can be performed.
To use SECURITY menu: User registration is required
before using the security functions.
Enter to the SECURITY menu
1. Press the ► button. The ENTER PASSWORD box will be displayed.
2. Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the registered password. The
factory default password is as follows.
CP-X8150, CP-X8160: 3605 CP-WX8240, CP-WX8255: 2005
CP-SX8350: 2105 CP-WU8440, CP-WU8450: 3705
This password can be changed
(
below)
. Move the cursor to the
right side of the ENTER PASSWORD box and press the ► button
to display the SECURITY menu.
• It is strongly recommended the factory default password to be
changed as soon as possible.
• If an incorrect password is input, the ENTER PASSWORD box
will be displayed again. If incorrect password is input 3 times, the
projector will turn off. Afterwards the projector will turn off every time
an incorrect password is input.
3. Items shown in the table below can be performed.
If you have forgotten your password
(1) While the ENTER PASSWORD box is displayed, press and hold the
RESET button on the remote control for about 3 seconds or press
and hold the INPUT button for 3 seconds while pressing the ►
button on the projector.
(2) The 10 digit Inquiring Code will be displayed. Contact your dealer
with the 10 digit Inquiring Code. Your password will be sent after
your user registration information is conrmed.
• If there is no key input for about 55 seconds while the Inquiring Code is displayed, the menu will
close. If necessary, repeat the process from (1).
Item Description
SECURITY
PASSWORD
CHANGE
(1) Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SECURITY menu
to select SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE
and press the ► button to display the ENTER
NEW PASSWORD box.
(2) Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the new password.
(3) Move the cursor to the right side of the
ENTER NEW PASSWORD box and press the
► button to display the NEW PASSWORD
AGAIN box, enter the same password again.
(4)
Move the cursor to the right side of the NEW
PASSWORD AGAIN box and press the ►
button and the NOTE NEW PASSWORD box
will be displayed for about 30 seconds, please
make note of the password during this time.
Pressing the ENTER button on the remote control or
►
button on the
projector will close the NOTE NEW PASSWORD box.
• Please do not forget your password.
(continued on next page)
SECURITY menu
88
SECURITY menu
Item Description
MyScreen
PASSWORD
The MyScreen PASSWORD function can be used to prohibit access to the
MyScreen function and prevent the currently registered MyScreen image
from being overwritten.
1 Turning on the MyScreen PASSWORD
1-1 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SECURITY menu to
select MyScreen PASSWORD and press the ►
button to display the MyScreen PASSWORD on/
off menu.
1-2 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the MyScreen
PASSWORD on/off menu to select ON.
The ENTER NEW PASSWORD box (small)
will be displayed.
1-3 Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the
password. Move the cursor to the right side
of the ENTER NEW PASSWORD box (small)
and press the ► button to display the NEW
PASSWORD AGAIN box, enter the same
PASSWORD again.
1-4 Move the cursor to the right side of the
NEW PASSWORD AGAIN box and press
the ► button to display the NOTE NEW
PASSWORD box for about 30 seconds,
please make note of the password during
this time.
Pressing the ENTER button on the remote control or ► button on the
projector will return to MyScreen PASSWORD on/off menu.
When a password is set for MyScreen:
•
The MyScreen registration function (and menu) will be unavailable.
•
The MyScreen Lock menu will be unavailable.
•
The START UP setting will be locked on MyScreen (and the menu will be
unavailable).
Turning the MyScreen PASSWORD off will allow normal operation of these
functions.
•
Please do not forget your MyScreen PASSWORD.
2 Turning off the MyScreen PASSWORD
2-1 Follow the procedure in 1-1 to display the MyScreen PASSWORD on/off
menu.
2-2
Select OFF to display the ENTER
PASSWORD box (large). Enter the registered
password and the screen will return to the
MyScreen PASSWORD on/off menu.
If an incorrect PASSWORD is input, the menu will
close. If necessary, repeat the process from 2-1.
3 If you have forgotten your password
3-1 Follow the procedure in 1-1 to display the MyScreen PASSWORD on/off
menu.
3-2 Select OFF to display the ENTER PASSWORD box (large). The 10 digit
Inquiring Code will be displayed inside the box.
3-3 Contact your dealer with the 10 digit Inquiring Code. Your password will
be sent after your user registration information is conrmed.
(continued on next page)
ENTER NEW PASSWORD
box (small)
ENTER PASSWORD box
(large)
89
SECURITY menu
Item Description
PIN LOCK
PIN LOCK is a function which prevents the projector from being used unless
a registered Code is input.
1 Turning on the PIN LOCK
1-1 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SECURITY menu to
select PIN LOCK and press the ► button or the
ENTER button to display the PIN LOCK on/off
menu.
1-2 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the PIN LOCK on/
off menu to select ON and the Enter PIN
Code box will be displayed.
1-3 Input a 4 part PIN code using the ▲/▼/◄/►,
COMPUTER 1 or INPUT button.
The PIN Code again box will appear. Reenter
the same PIN code. This will complete the PIN
code registration.
•
If there is no key input for about 55 seconds
while the Enter PIN Code box or the PIN Code again box is displayed,
the menu will close. If necessary, repeat the process from 1-1.
Afterwards, anytime the projector is restarted after AC power is turned off
the Enter PIN Code box will be displayed. Enter the registered PIN code.
The projector can be used after entering the registered PIN code. If an
incorrect PIN code is input, the Enter PIN code box will be displayed again.
If an incorrect PIN code is input 3 times, the projector will turn off. Afterwards
the projector will turn off every time an incorrect PIN code is input. The
projector will also turn off if there is no key input for about 5 minutes while
the Enter PIN code box is displayed.
This function will activate only when the projector is started after AC power
is turned off.
•
Please do not forget your PIN code.
2 Turning off the PIN LOCK
2-1 Follow the procedure in 1-1 to display the PIN LOCK on/off menu.
2-2 Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select OFF and the Enter PIN Code box will be
displayed.
Enter the registered PIN code to turn the PIN LOCK function off.
If an incorrect PIN code is input 3 times, the projector will turn off.
3 If you have forgotten your PIN code
3-1 While the Enter PIN code box is displayed, press and hold the RESET
button for three seconds or press and hold the INPUT button for 3
seconds while pressing the ► button on the projector.
The 10 digit Inquiring Code will be displayed.
•
If there is no key input for about 5 minutes
while the Inquiring Code is displayed, the
projector will turn off.
3-2 Contact your dealer with the 10 digit Inquiring Code. Your PIN code will
be sent after your user registration information is conrmed.
(continued on next page)
90
SECURITY menu
Item Description
TRANSITION
DETECTOR
If this function is set to ON and the vertical angle of
the projector or the INSTALLATION setting is different
from the previous recorded setting, the TRANSITION
DETECTOR ON alarm will be displayed and the input
signal will not be displayed.
• To display the signal again, set this function OFF.
• After about 5 minutes of displaying the TRANSITION DETECTOR ON
alarm, the lamp will turn off.
• Keystone adjustment feature has been prohibited as long as the Transition
Detector function is on.
1 Turning on the TRANSITION DETECTOR
1-1 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SECURITY menu
to select TRANSITION DETECTOR and press
the ► or the ENTER button to display the
TRANSITION DETECTOR on/off menu.
1-2
Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the TRANSITION
DETECTOR on/off menu to select ON.
Selecting ON will save the setting of the
current angle and the INSTALLATION setting.
The ENTER NEW PASSWORD box (small)
will be displayed.
1-3
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter a
password. Move the cursor to the right side
of the ENTER NEW PASSWORD box (small)
and press the ► button to display the NEW
PASSWORD AGAIN box, enter the same
password again.
1-4 Move the cursor to the right side of the
NEW PASSWORD AGAIN box and press
the ► button to display the NOTE NEW
PASSWORD box for about 30 seconds,
please make note of the password during this time.
Pressing the ENTER button on the remote control or the
►
button on the
projector will return to the TRANSITION DETECTOR on/off menu.
• Please do not forget your TRANSITION DETECTOR password.
• This function will activate only when the projector is started after turning off
the AC power.
• This feature may not function properly if the projector is not in a stable
position when ON is selected.
2 Turning off the TRANSITION DETECTOR
2-1
Follow the procedure in 1-1 to display the TRANSITION DETECTOR on/off menu.
2-2
Select OFF to display the ENTER
PASSWORD box (large). Enter the registered
password and the screen will return to the
TRANSITION DETECTOR on/off menu.
If an incorrect password is input, the menu will
close. If necessary, repeat the process from 2-1.
3 If you have forgotten your password
3-1
Follow the procedure in 1-1 to display the TRANSITION DETECTOR on/off menu.
3-2 Select OFF to display the ENTER PASSWORD box (large). The 10 digit
Inquiring Code will be displayed inside the box.
3-3 Contact your dealer with the 10 digit Inquiring Code. Your password will
be sent after your user registration information is conrmed.
(continued on next page)
ENTER NEW PASSWORD
box (small)
ENTER PASSWORD box
(large)
91
SECURITY menu
Item Description
MY TEXT
PASSWORD
The MY TEXT PASSWORD function can prevent the MY TEXT from being
overwritten. When the password is set for the MY TEXT;
• The MY TEXT DISPLAY menu will be unavailable, which can prohibit
changing the DISPLAY setting.
• The MY TEXT WRITING menu will be unavailable, which can prevent the
MY TEXT from being overwritten.
1 Turning on the MY TEXT PASSWORD
1-1 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SECURITY menu to
select the MY TEXT PASSWORD and press the
► button to display the MY TEXT PASSWORD
on/off menu.
1-2 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the MY TEXT
PASSWORD on/off menu to select ON. The
ENTER NEW PASSWORD box (small) will
be displayed.
1-3 Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the
password. Move the cursor to the right side
of the ENTER NEW PASSWORD box (small)
and press the ► button to display the NEW
PASSWORD AGAIN box, and then enter the
same password again.
1-4 Move the cursor to the right side of the
NEW PASSWORD AGAIN box and press
► button to display the NOTE NEW
PASSWORD box for about 30 seconds, then
please make note of the password during
this time.
Pressing the ENTER button on the remote control or ► button on the
projector will return to the MY TEXT PASSWORD on/off menu.
2 Turning off the MY TEXT PASSWORD
2-1 Follow the procedure in 1-1 to display the MY TEXT PASSWORD on/off
menu.
2-2 Select OFF to display the ENTER
PASSWORD box (large). Enter the
registered password and the screen will
return to the MY TEXT PASSWORD on/off
menu.
If an incorrect password is input, the menu will close.
If necessary, repeat the process from 2-1
3 If you have forgotten your password
3-1 Follow the procedure in 1-1 to display the MY TEXT PASSWORD on/off
menu.
3-2 Select OFF to display the ENTER PASSWORD box (large). The 10 digit
inquiring code will be displayed inside the box.
3-3 Contact your dealer with the 10 digit inquiring code. Your password will
be sent after your user registration information is conrmed.
(continued on next page)
ENTER NEW PASSWORD
box (small)
ENTER PASSWORD box
(large)
92
SECURITY menu
Item Description
MY TEXT
DISPLAY
(1) Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SECURITY menu to
select the MY TEXT DISPLAY and press the ► or
ENTER button to display the MY TEXT DISPLAY
on/off menu.
(2) Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the MY TEXT DISPLAY on/off menu to select
on or off.
ON
Ù
OFF
When it is set ON, the MY TEXT will be displayed
on the START UP screen and the INPUT_
INFORMATION when the INFORMATION on the
SERVICE menu is chosen.
• This function is available only when the MY TEXT
PASSWORD function is set to the OFF.
MY TEXT
WRITING
(1) Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the
SECURITY menu to select the MY
TEXT WRITING and press the ►
button. The MY TEXT WRITING dialog
will be displayed.
(2) The current MY TEXT will be displayed
on the rst 3 lines. If not yet written, the
lines will be blank.
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons and the
ENTER or INPUT button to select and
enter characters. To erase 1 character
at one time, press the RESET button or
press the ◄ and INPUT button at the
same time. Also if you move the cursor
to DELETE or ALL CLEAR on screen
and press the ENTER or INPUT button,
1 character or all characters will be
erased. The MY TEXT can be input up
to 24 characters on each line.
(3) To change an already inserted
character, press the ▲/▼ button to
move the cursor to one of the rst 3
lines, and use the ◄/► buttons to
move the cursor on the character to be
changed.
After pressing the ENTER or INPUT button, the character is selected.
Then, follow the same procedure as described at the item (2) above.
(4) To nish entering text, move the cursor to the OK on screen and press
the ►, ENTER or INPUT button. To revert to the previous MY TEXT
without saving changes, move the cursor to the CANCEL on screen and
press the ◄, ENTER or INPUT button.
•
The MY TEXT WRITING function is available only when the MY TEXT
PASSWORD function is set to OFF.
(continued on next page)
93
SECURITY menu
Item Description
SECURITY
INDICATOR
Selecting this item displays the SECURITY INDICATOR dialog. Use
the ▲/▼ buttons to select ON or OFF.
ON
Ù
OFF
When ON is selected while PIN LOCK or TRANSITION DETECTOR
is ON, the SECURITY indicator blinks in yellow in the standby mode
(
89, 90).
STACK LOCK
Selecting this item displays the STACK LOCK dialog. For more
information, please see Instant Stack Guide.
94
Presentation tools
Presentation tools
The PC-LESS Presentation reads image and audio data from the storage media
inserted into the USB TYPE A
ports and displays the image in the following
modes.
The PC-LESS Presentation can be started by selecting the USB TYPE A as the
input source.
This feature allows you to make your presentations without using your computer.
PC-LESS Presentation
- Thumbnail mode
(
95)
- Full Screen mode
(
99)
- Slideshow mode
(
101)
[Supported storage media]
• USB memory (USB memory type, USB hard disk and USB card reader type)
•
Some USB memory devices and/or USB hubs may not operate properly.
• USB devices with security software may not work.
• Be careful when inserting or removing a USB device.
(
12, 97)
NOTE
• NTFS is not supported.NOTE
[Supported format]
• FAT12, FAT16 and FAT32
The projector has the following convenient tools that enable on-screen
presentations easily and quickly:
- PC-LESS Presentation (
below)
- Drawing function
(
104)
- USB Display (109)
- Network Presentation
For details of Network Presentation, refer to the Network Guide and the
manual for "LiveViewer".
>6XSSRUWHG¿OHIRUPDWDQGLWVH[WHQVLRQ@
• JPEG (.jpeg, .jpg) * Progressive is not supported.
• Bitmap (.bmp) *
16bit mode and compressed bitmap is not supported.
• PNG (.png) * Interlace PNG is not supported.
• GIF (.gif)
• Movie (.avi, .mov) *
Supported video format: Motion-JPEG
Supported audio format:
WAV (Linear PCM, Stereo
16bit),
IMA-ADPCM
(continued on next page)
95
Presentation tools
• Files with a resolution larger than the following are not supported.
CP-X8150, CP-X8160: 1024 x 768 (Still), 768 x 576 (Movie)
CP-WX8240, CP-WX8255
: 1280 x 800 (Still), 768 x 576 (Movie)
CP-SX8350
: 1400 x 1050 (Still), 768 x 576 (Movie)
CP-WU8440, CP-WU8450
: 1920 x 1200 (Still), 768 x 576 (Movie)
(* Some computers may not support above resolutions.)
• Files with a resolution smaller than 36 x 36 are not supported.
• Files with a resolution smaller than 100 x 100 may not be displayed.
• Movie images with a frame rate higher than 15 fps cannot be displayed.
• Movie images with a bit rate higher than 20 Mbps cannot be displayed.
• Some supported les may not be displayed.
• Only a frame appears when the content of image data cannot be displayed in
the Thumbnail mode.
• Even with the le format and audio format combinations described above,
playback of some les may fail.
NOTE
Thumbnail Mode
PC-LESS Presentation (continued)
The Thumbnail mode displays the images stored in USB storage devices on the
Thumbnail screen. Maximum 20 images are displayed in a screen.
If you wish, you can jump into the Full Screen mode or Slideshow mode, after you
select some images in the Thumbnail mode.
The Thumbnail mode will be started as the primary function of the PC-LESS
Presentation after selecting the USB TYPE A as the input source.
Thumbnail menu
Selected image
Thumbnail images
96
Presentation tools
PC-LESS Presentation (continued)
The SETUP menu for the selected image
Item Functions
SETUP
Use the ◄/► cursor buttons to switch each setting or use the ►
cursor button to execute the functions as follows.
RETURN
Press the ► cursor button or ENTER to return to the Thumbnail
screen.
START
Switch to ON to set the selected image as the rst image in the
Slideshow. This setting information will be saved in the “playlist.
txt” le (
103
).
STOP
Switch to ON to set the selected image as the last image in the
Slideshow. This setting information will be saved in the “playlist.
txt” le (
103
).
SKIP
Switch to ON to skip the selected image in the Slideshow. This
setting information will be saved in the “playlist.txt” le (
103
).
ROTATE
Press the ► cursor or ENTER button to rotate the selected still
image 90 degrees clockwise. This setting information will be
saved in the “playlist.txt” le (
103
).
You can control the images on the Thumbnail screen with the remote control,
control panel or Web Remote Control. The following functions can be supported
while the Thumbnail screen is displayed.
Button operation
Functions
Remote
control
Control panel
Web Remote
Control
▲/▼/◄/►▲/▼/◄/► [▲]/[▼]/[◄]/[►] Moves cursor.
PAGE UP
PAGE DOWN
-
[PAGE UP]
[PAGE DOWN]
Switches pages.
ENTER INPUT [ENTER]
• Displays the selected image
on the Full Screen mode when a
cursor is on a Thumbnail image.
• Displays the SETUP menu
(
below) for the selected image
when a cursor is on a Thumbnail
image number.
Operating by buttons
97
Presentation tools
You can also control the images by using the menu on the Thumbnail screen.
PC-LESS Presentation (continued)
Operating by the Thumbnail menu
Item Functions
Moves to an upper folder.
SORT Allows you to sort les and folders as following.
RETURN
Press the ► cursor button or ENTER to return to the Thumbnail
screen.
NAME UP Sorts in ascending order by le name.
NAME DOWN Sorts in descending order by le name.
DATE UP Sorts in ascending order by le date.
DATE DOWN Sorts in descending order.by le date.
▲/▼ Go to previous / next page.
SLIDESHOW Congures and starts the Slideshow (
101).
RETURN
Press the ► cursor button or ENTER to return to the Thumbnail
screen.
PLAY Press the ► cursor button or ENTER to start the Slideshow.
START Sets the beginning number of the Slideshow.
STOP Sets the end number of the Slideshow.
INTERVAL
Sets the interval time for displaying still images during the
Slideshow.
It is not recommend to set the interval time very short something
like several seconds, because it may take more than several
seconds to read and display an image le if it is stored in very
deep layer directory or if so many les are stored in the same
directory.
PLAY MODE
Selects the mode of Slideshow.
ONE TIME : Play the Slideshow one time.
ENDLESS : Play the Slideshow endless.
INPUT Switches the input port.
MENU Displays the menu.
REMOVE USB
Be sure to use this function before removing USB storage device
from the projector.
After that, the projector will not recognize USB
storage devices until you insert it again into the USB TYPE A
ports.
/
Turns the sound on/off for les that contain audio data.
(continued on next page)
98
Presentation tools
PC-LESS Presentation (continued)
•
These operations are not accessible while the projector OSD is displayed.
• The Thumbnail mode is able to display up to 20 les in one page.
•
It is not possible to change the input port by using the INPUT button when the
Thumbnail screen, Slideshow, or Full Screen image is displayed.
• The image quality may deteriorate when playing back audio data included in
a movie. If you want to give priority to the image quality, turn off the sound by
setting ♪ to off.
• If one of the AUDIO IN ports is selected or
is selected for USB TYPE A in
AUDIO SOURCE of the AUDIO menu (57), ♪ cannot be operated.
• Some error icons will be displayed on the Thumbnail screen.
NOTE
This le seems to be broken or not supported format.
A le that cannot be displayed on the
Thumbnail screen is indicated by a le
format icon.
99
Presentation tools
PC-LESS Presentation (continued)
The Full Screen mode shows a full display image. To display in Full Screen mode,
select an image in the Thumbnail screen. Then press the ENTER button on the
remote control, the INPUT button on the control panel or click [ENTER] on the
Web Remote Control.
Full Screen Mode
Button operation
Functions
Remote
control
Control panel
Web Remote
Control
▼
►
or
PAGE DOWN
▼
or
►
[▼]
[►]
or
[PAGE DOWN]
Shows the next le.
▲
◄
or
PAGE UP
▲
or
◄
[▲]
[◄]
or
[PAGE UP]
Shows the previous le.
ENTER INPUT [ENTER] Displays Thumbnail.
The following operations are enabled in the Full Screen mode while a still image
is displayed.
Full screen display
Operations for still images
100
Presentation tools
PC-LESS Presentation (continued)
Button operation
Functions
Remote
control
Control panel
Web Remote
Control
Ÿ ▲ [▲]
(Play) /
(Pause) toggle
►►[►]
(FF) Fast-forward
◄◄[◄]
(REW) Fast-rewind
ENTER INPUT [ENTER] (Stop), Displays Thumbnail.
PAGE DOWN –[PAGE DOWN]
Shows the next le.
PAGE UP –[PAGE UP]
Shows the previous le.
•
These operations are not accessible while the projector OSD is displayed.
• It is not possible to change the input port by using the INPUT button when the
Thumbnail screen, Slideshow, or Full Screen image is displayed.
NOTE
A remote control icon and a progress bar are
displayed when one of the cursor buttons, ENTER
button or INPUT button on the remote control, control
panel or Web Remote Control is pressed or clicked while a movie is playing in the
Full Screen mode. The following operations are enabled while the remote control
icon and progress bar are displayed.
Operations for movie
101
Presentation tools
PC-LESS Presentation (continued)
Slideshow Mode
While the Slideshow is displayed, the following button operations are enabled
when still images are displayed, and the same button operations in the Full
Screen mode are enabled when movies are displayed.
• These operations are not accessible while the projector OSD is
displayed.
• It is not possible to change the input port by using the INPUT button when the
Thumbnail screen, Slideshow, or Full Screen image is displayed.
•
When the Slideshow mode is set to ONE TIME and the last le is a still image,
the last slide of the presentation will remain displayed until the ENTER button
on the remote control or Web Remote Control, or the INPUT button on the
control panel is pressed.
NOTE
You can start this function from the Slideshow menu. To display the Slideshow
menu, select the SLIDESHOW button in the Thumbnail menu and press the
ENTER button on the remote control, INPUT button on the control panel, or click
[ENTER] on the Web Remote Control.
Button operation
Functions
Remote
control
Control panel
Web Remote
Control
ENTER INPUT [ENTER] Displays Thumbnail.
The Slideshow mode displays images in full screen and switches the images at
intervals set in INTERVAL on the Thumbnail menu (
97).
Operating by buttons
102
Presentation tools
PC-LESS Presentation (continued)
You can play the Slideshow at your desired conguration.
Congure the SLIDESHOW item in the Thumbnail menu
(
97).
Item Functions
SLIDESHOW
RETURN
Returns to the Thumbnail mode.
PLAY Play the Slideshow.
START Set the beginning number of the Slideshow.
STOP Set the end number of the Slideshow.
INTERVAL
Sets the interval time for displaying still images during the
Slideshow.
It is not recommend to set the interval time very short something
like several seconds, because it may take more than several
seconds to read and display an image le if it is stored in very
deep layer directory or if so many les are stored in the same
directory.
PLAY MODE
Selects the mode of Slideshow.
ONE TIME : Play the Slideshow one time.
ENDLESS : Play the Slideshow endless.
• The settings of the Slideshow are saved to the ³SOD\OLVWW[W´ le
that is stored in the storage media. If the le is not existed, it is generated
automatically.
• The settings for the START, STOP, INTERVAL, and PLAY MODE are saved to
the Playlist.
• If the storage media is under the write protection or the ³SOD\OLVWW[W´ is the
read only type le, it is impossible to change the settings of the Slideshow.
NOTE
Operating by SLIDESHOW in the Thumbnail menu
103
Presentation tools
PC-LESS Presentation (continued)
Playlist
The Playlist is a DOS format text le, which decides the order of displayed still
image les in the Thumbnail mode or Slideshow.
The playlist le name is “playlist.txt” and it can be edited on a computer.
It is created in the folder that contains the selected image les when the PC-LESS
Presentation is started or the Slideshow is congured.
[Example of “playlist.txt”¿OHV@
START setting : STOP setting : INTERVAL setting : PLAY MODE setting :
img001.jpg: : : :
img002.jpg:600: : :
img003.jpg:700:rot1: :
img004.jpg: : :SKIP:
img005.jpg:1000:rot2:SKIP:
The “playlist.txt” le contains the following information.
Each piece of information requires to be separated by “:”, and “:” at the end of
each line.
1st line: START, STOP, INTERVAL and PLAY MODE settings (
97).
2nd line and after: le name, interval time, rotation setting and skip setting.
interval time: It can be set from 0 to 999900 (ms) with an increment of 100 (ms).
rotation setting: “rot1” means a rotation at 90 degrees clockwise; “rot2” and
“rot3” increase another 90 degrees in order.
skip setting: “SKIP” means that the image will not be displayed in the
Slideshow.
• The maximum length in a line on the "playlist.txt" le is 255 characters
including linefeed. If any line exceeds the limit, the "playlist.txt" le becomes
invalid.
• Up to 999 les can be registered to the Playlist. However, if some folders exist
in the same directory the limit number is decreased by the number of folders.
Any les over the limit will not be shown in the Slideshow.
• If the storage device is protected or does not have sufcient space, the “playlist.
txt” le cannot be created.
• For the Slideshow settings, refer to the section Slideshow mode (
101).
NOTE
104
Presentation tools
Drawing function enables you to draw on the projector's screen with Hitachi Pen
tablet or USB mouse connected to the USB TYPE A ports. This function is an
interactive tool, that offers effective features for making classroom and business
presentations more fun and easier to understand.
9 Drawing on projected images
You can draw pictures or text on projected images.
9 Saving and displaying drawn images
You can save images with pictures or text drawn on them to a USB memory
device and then retrieve the saved images and display them again later.
9 Use as a simple mouse
The Hitachi Pen tablet and USB mouse can be used in place of the mouse of a
computer connected to the projector.
• Authorization by the copyright owner(s) is required pursuant to
including visual images, if such works are copyrighted works.
• This drawing function may not work depending on the image signal.
• A USB storage device is necessary to save data. In addition, if the projector
only has one available USB TYPE A port, a USB hub is needed.
• Copyright protected images cannot be saved.
• To use simple mouse function, a USB cable is required to connect the
computer and the projector.
• Some pen tablets and USB mice may not operate properly.
NOTE
Drawing function
105
Presentation tools
Connect the Hitachi Pen tablet or USB mouse to the USB TYPE A port on the
projector.
To save an image that has been drawn, a USB storage device must also be
connected to a USB TYPE A port of the projector.
If the projector only has one availabe USB TYPE A port, use a USB hub to
connect both devices.
In order to use the simple mouse function, connect the USB TYPE B port of the
projector with a USB (A) port of the computer with a USB cable.
Connecting the Devices
•
Some USB storage devices and/or USB hubs may not operate properly.
• Before removing the USB storage device from the port of the projector, be
sure to use the REMOVE USB function on the Thumbnail screen to secure your
data
(
97). If you do not run the REMOVE USB function and remove the USB
storage device, the time stamp may not be recorded correctly
.
USB storage device
Example of connections
NOTE
Hitachi
Pen tablet
USB mouse
USB hub
USB cable
Drawing function (continued)
106
Presentation tools
Using the Drawing function
Touching or clicking the connected Hitachi Pen tablet / USB mouse starts up
drawing mode. A tool bar like the gure below is displayed on the projector screen
while in the drawing mode. Touching/clicking an icon on the tool bar enables
the following functions. Touching anywhere on the tool bar except an icon and
dragging moves the toobar.
• Images may be copyrighted, in which case, permission from the
copyright holder is necessary for use, in accordance with the copyright act and
other applicable laws.
•
The drawing function does not support drawing on images from the LAN
port or the USB TYPE B port of the projector. If you operate the Hitachi Pen
tablet / USB mouse while these images are displayed, the input source may
automatically switch to USB TYPE A port.
NOTE
Pen1. Selects the pen function.
The cursor turns into a Pencil ; dragging it draws a line of
the speci ed pen color and size.
The cursor turns into a Laser Pointer . Dragging it does not
draw a line.
Pen color2.
Selects the Color of the line drawn by the Pencil.
Speci es Black.
Speci es Red.
Speci es Blue.
Pen size3.
Selects the Thickness of the line drawn by the Pencil.
Speci es 1-dot.
Speci es 3-dot.
Speci es 5-dot.
(continued on next page)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Drawing function (continued)
107
Presentation tools
4. Eraser Switches the electronic pen function to that of an eraser and speci es
its size. The cursor turns into an Eraser
; dragging it erases
previously drawn lines.
Speci es a 12-dot Eraser.
Speci es a 20-dot Eraser.
Speci es a 28-dot Eraser.
5. Erase
Erases all the lines drawn with the pen.
Projector 6.
Operation
Operates the projector.
Calls up and display the previous le in the USB storage
device from that currently selected. This function is available
when the projector is displaying a le from a USB storage
device.
Calls up and display the next le in the USB storage device
from that currently displayed. This function is available when
the projector is displaying a le from a USB storage device.
Displays thumbnails of les recorded on a USB storage device.
The cursor on the screen turns to an arrow and can select an
icon of folder, image and moving to upper folder. Touching or
clicking activates in the same way as the ENTER button of the
remote control. You can display an image onto the projector
screen by touching or clicking its thumbnail.
Saves the image on the projector screen, along with any text
or pictures drawn, onto a USB storage device connected to the
projector.
Files are saved with the le name “Pxxx.bmp” (where xxx is •
a consecutive number) into a folder named “PJ_Capture”.
If it does not already exist, a “PJ_Capture” folder is created
automatically.
The time stamp of saved les are as per the date and time •
settings of the projector. Check the DATE AND TIME setting
for WIRELESS SETUP or WIRED SETUP in the NETWORK
menu (
78, 82).
The tool bar is not saved.•
Copyright protected images cannot be saved.•
Drawing with this function cannot be saved to MyScreen •
(
60).
(continued on next page)
Drawing function (continued)
108
Presentation tools
Projector 6.
Operation
(continued)
Temporarily blanks out the display.
Another touching or clicking recovers the display.
Toggles between display/hide the Pattern (grid lines).
Cycles through the display source signals.
It can be used in the same way as the • INPUT button on the
control panel. However, images cannot be selected from the
LAN port or the USB TYPE B port.
Turns off the projector.
Touch/click the icon for three seconds or so.
If you turn the projector off while using the drawing function, •
any unsaved drawings will be lost.
Mouse 7.
Operation
When the computer screen is displayed, this function operates the
computer like a simple mouse or keyboard.
In order to use this function, connect the • USB TYPE B port of the
projector with a USB (A) port of the computer via a USB cable.
Then select MOUSE for USB TYPE B item in the OPTION menu
(
67).
Works like the Page Down button on a keyboard.
Works like the Page Up button on a keyboard.
Works like the left-click button on a mouse.
Works like the right-click button on a mouse.
Moves the mouse’s cursor in the direction of the arrow.
Exit8.
Closes the tool bar and exits the drawing function.
When exiting the drawing mode, all unsaved drawings are lost.•
Minimize9.
Minimizes the tool bar.
Touching or clicking the minimized tool bar icon displays the tool bar
again.
Drawing function (continued)
109
Presentation tools
USB Display
The projector can display images transferred from a computer via an USB cable (11).
Hardware and software requirement for computer
• OS: One of the following. (32 bit version only)
Windows
®
XP Home Edition /Professional Edition
Windows Vista
®
Home Basic /Home Premium /Business /Ultimate /Enterprise
Windows
®
7 Starter /Home Basic /Home Premium /Professional / Ultimate /
Enterprise
• CPU: Pentium 4 (2.8 GHz or higher)
• Graphic card: 16 bit, XGA or higher
• Memory: 512 MB or higher
• Hard disk space: 30 MB or higher
• USB(A) Port
• USB cable : 1 piece
• When the screen resolution of your computer is over specied, the
computer image is shrunk in specied size as below before transferring to the
projector.
CP-X8150, CP-X8160: 1024 x 768 (XGA)
The other models: 1280 x 800
The transferred image is displayed as shrunk on the projected screen even if
the panel resolution of the projector is larger than above.
NOTE
110
Presentation tools
This application will appear as an icon in the
Windows notication area once it starts.
You can
quit the application from your computer by selecting
“Quit” on the menu.
•
The “LiveViewer” (refer to the
Network Guide) and this application cannot
be used at the same time. If you connect your
computer to the projector by using a USB cable
while the “LiveViewer” is running, the following message will be displayed.
• Depending on the software installed on your computer, images on your
computer cannot be transferred using “LiveViewer Lite for USB”.
• If any application software having the rewall function is installed into your
computer, make the rewall function invalid with following the user's manual.
• Some security software may block image transmission. Please change the
security software setting to allow the use of “LiveViewer Lite for USB”.
•
When the audio input from USB TYPE B (57) is selected, if the sound level is
still low even after raising the volume level in the projector to the maximum, check
whether your computer outputs audio and raise the volume level accordingly.
NOTE
USB Display (continued)
Select the USB DISPLAY for the USB TYPE B item in the OPTION menu.
When you connect your computer to the USB TYPE B port on the projector
using a USB cable, the projector will be recognized as a CD-ROM drive on your
computer. Then, the software in the projector, “LiveViewerLiteUSB.exe”, will run
automatically and the application, “LiveViewer Lite for USB”, will be ready on your
computer for the USB Display. The application, “LiveViewer Lite for USB”, will be
automatically closed when the USB cable is unplugged.
• If the software does not start automatically (this is typically because
CD-ROM autorun is disabled on your OS), follow the instructions below.
(1) Click on the [Start] button on the toolbar and select the “Run”
(2) Enter F:\LiveViewerLiteUSB.exe and then press the [OK]
• CD-ROM autorun is disabled while the screen saver is running.
•
The image transmission from the computer is suspended while the password-
protected screen saver is running. To resume the transmission, exit the screen saver.
• Check our web site for the latest version of the software and its manual.
(
User's Manual (concise))
Follow the instructions that can be obtained at the site for updating.
NOTE
If your CD-ROM drive is not drive F on your computer, you will need to
replace F with the correct drive letter assigned to your CD-ROM drive.
Starting USB Display
111
Presentation tools
The menu shown in the right will be displayed
when you right-click the application icon in the
Windows notication area.
Display : The Floating menu is displayed, and
the icon disappears from the Windows
notication area.
Quit : The application is closed, and the icon disappears from the Windows
notication area.
USB Display (continued)
Right-Click menu
• If you wish to restart the application, you need to unplug the USB
cable and plug it again.
NOTE
If you select “Display” on the Right-Click
menu, the Floating menu shown in the right
will appear on your computer screen.
1 Start capture button
The transmission to the projector is started
and the images will be displayed.
2
Stop capture button
The image transmission is stopped.
3 Hold button
The image on the projector’s screen is temporally frozen. The last image before
the button is clicked is remained on the screen. You can revise the image data
on your computer without showing it on the projector's screen.
4
Option button
The Options window is displayed.
5 Minimize button
The Floating menu is c
losed, and the icon reappears in the Windows notication
area.
Floating menu
• Images may not be displayed on screen, if the start/stop capture
buttons are clicked repeatedly.
NOTE
1
2
345
112
Presentation tools
If you select the Option button on the Floating
menu, the Options window is displayed.
Optimize Performance
The “LiveViewer Lite for USB” captures screenshots
in JPEG data and sends them to the projector.
The “LiveViewer Lite for USB” has two options that
have different compression rate of JPEG data.
Transmission speed
Speed takes priority over Image quality.
It makes JPEG compression rate higher. The screen on the projector is rewritten
quicker because the transferred data is smaller, but the image quality is worse.
Image quality
Image quality takes priority over Speed.
It makes JPEG compression rate lower. The screen on the projector is rewritten
slower because the transferred data is larger, but the image quality is better.
Keep PC resolution
If you remove the check mark from the [Keep PC resolution] box, the screen
resolution of
your computer will be switched as follows, and the display speed
may be faster.
CP-X8150, CP-X8160: 1024 x 768 (XGA)
The other models: 1280 x 800
If your computer does not support the display resolution specied above, a
smaller resolution that is the largest among the resolutions that are supported by
the computer will be selected.
Sound
Turns the sound on/off. The image quality may deteriorate when you play back
audio data transferred together with the image data. To give priority to the image
quality, turn off the sound by selecting the checkbox.
Display LiveViewer Lite for USB
If you want to display the "LiveViewer Lite for USB" application window on the
screen, please check the box.
About
The version information of the “LiveViewer Lite for USB”.
USB Display (continued)
Options window
• When the resolution is changed, the arrangement of icons on computer
desktop screen may be changed.
• If one of the AUDIO IN ports is selected or is selected for USB TYPE B
in AUDIO SOURCE of the AUDIO menu (
57), audio sound operation in the
Options window will be disabled.
NOTE
113
Maintenance
Maintenance
A lamp has nite product life. Using the lamp for long periods of time could cause the
pictures darker or the color tone poor. Note that each lamp has a different lifetime, and
some may burst or burn out soon after you start using them.
Preparation of a new lamp and early replacement are recommended. To prepare a
new lamp, make contact with your dealer and tell the lamp type number.
Replacing the lamp
Type number <CP-X8150, CP-WX8240, CP-WU8440>: DT01281
Type number <CP-X8160, CP-WX8255, CP-SX8350, CP-WU8450>: DT01291
1.
Turn the projector off, and unplug the power cord. Allow
the projector to cool for at least 45 minutes.
2.
Prepare a new lamp. If the projector is mounted with
specied mounting accessories, or if the lamp has broken,
also ask the dealer to replace the lamp.
3.
Loosen the screw (marked by arrow) of the lamp cover and then
slide down and lift the lamp cover to remove it.
4.
Loosen the 3 screws (marked by arrow) of the
lamp, and slowly pull the lamp out by the handles.
Never loosen any other screws.
5.
Insert the new lamp, and retighten rmly the 3
screws of the lamp that are loosened in the previous
process to lock it in place.
6.
While putting the interlocking parts of the lamp cover and
the projector together, slide the lamp cover back in place.
Then rmly fasten the screw of the lamp cover.
7.
Turn the projector on and reset the lamp time using the LAMP
TIME item in the OPTION menu.
In case of replacement by yourself, follow the following
procedure.
Replacing the lamp
(4) Point at the LAMP TIME using the ▼/▲ button, then press the ► button. A dialog will appear.
(5) Press the ► button to select “OK” on the dialog. It performs resetting the lamp time.
• Please reset the lamp time only when you have replaced the lamp,
for a suitable indication about the lamp.
NOTE
►Do not touch the interior of the projector, while the lamp is
taken out.
CAUTION
(1) Press the MENU button to display a menu.
(2) Point at the ADVANCED MENU in the menu using the ▼/▲
button, then press the ► button.
(3) Point at the OPTION in the left column of the menu using the
▼/▲button, then press the ► button.
4, 5
Handles
Lamp cover
3
6
114
Maintenance
Lamp warning
Replacing the lamp (continued)
HIGH VOLTAGE
HIGH TEMPERATURE
HIGH PRESSURE
►
The projector uses a high-pressure mercury glass lamp. The lamp
can break with a loud bang, or burn out, if jolted or scratched, handled while hot, or
worn over time. Note that each lamp has a different lifetime, and some may burst or
burn out soon after you start using them. In addition, if the bulb bursts, it is possible
for shards of glass to y into the lamp housing, and for gas containing mercury and
dust containing ne particles of glass to escape from the projector’s vent holes.
►About disposal of a lamp: This product contains a mercury lamp; do not put
it in a trash. Dispose of it in accordance with environmental laws.
• For lamp recycling, go to www.lamprecycle.org (in the US).
• For product disposal, consult your local government agency
or www.eiae.org (in the US) or www.epsc.ca (in Canada).
For more information, call your dealer.
WARNING
• If the lamp should break (it will make a loud bang when it does),
unplug the power cord from the outlet, and make sure to request a
replacement lamp from your local dealer. Note that shards of glass
could damage the projector’s internals, or cause injury during handling,
so please do not try to clean the projector or replace the lamp yourself.
•
If the lamp should break (it will make a loud bang when it does), ventilate the
room well, and make sure not to inhale the gas or ne particles that come out
from the projector's vent holes, and not to get them into your eyes or mouth.
• Before replacing the lamp, turn the projector off and unplug the power
cord, then wait at least 45 minutes for the lamp to cool sufficiently.
Handling the lamp while hot can cause burns, as well as damaging the lamp.
• Never unscrew except the appointed (marked by an arrow) screws.
• Do not open the lamp cover while the projector is suspended from
a ceiling. This is dangerous, since if the lamp’s bulb has broken, the
shards will fall out when the cover is opened. In addition, working in
high places is dangerous, so ask your local dealer to have the lamp
replaced even if the bulb is not broken.
• Do not use the projector with the lamp cover removed. At the lamp
replacing, make sure that the screws are screwed in firmly. Loose
screws could result in damage or injury.
• Use only the lamp of the specified type. Use of a lamp that does not
meet the lamp specications for this model could cause a re, damage or
shorten the life of this product.
• If the lamp breaks soon after the first time it is used, it is possible
that there are electrical problems elsewhere besides the lamp. If this
happens, consult your local dealer or a service representative.
•
Handle with care: jolting or scratching could cause the lamp bulb to burst during use.
•
Using the lamp for long periods of time, could cause it dark, not to light up or to burst.
When the pictures appear dark, or when the color tone is poor, please replace the
lamp as soon as possible. Do not use old (used) lamps; this is a cause of breakage.
Disconnect
the plug
from the
power
outlet
115
Maintenance
Please check and clean the air lter periodically. When the indicators or a
message prompts you to clean the air lter, comply with it as soon as possible.
The lter unit with 2 sheets of lters is inside of the lter cover. In addition, the
extra air lter is attached to inner side of the lter cover of CP-X8160, CP-WX8255
and CP-WU8450. If one of the lters is damaged or heavily soiled, replace whole
lter set with a new one.
Request for a lter set with the following type number from your dealer when
purchasing a new one.
Type number <CP-X8150, CP-WX8240, CP-SX8350, CP-WU8440>: MU06642
Type number <CP-X8160, CP-WX8255, CP-WU8450>: UX38241
1.
Turn the projector off, and unplug the power
cord. Allow the projector to sufciently cool
down.
2.
Use a vacuum cleaner on and around the
lter cover.
3.
Pick and pull up the lter cover knobs to
take it off.
4.
Press up slightly the bottom side knobs
to unlock the bottom side of the lter unit.
Pull the center knob to take the lter unit
off.
5.
Use a vacuum cleaner for the lter vent
of the projector and the outer side of the
lter unit.
6.
The lter unit consists of two parts. Press
down around the interlocking parts to
unlock, then separate the two parts.
7.
Use a vacuum cleaner for the inner side
of each part of the lter unit to clean them
up. If the lters are damaged or heavily
soiled, replace them with the new ones.
8.
Combine the two parts to reassemble the
lter unit.
9.
Put the lter unit back into the projector.
(continued on next page)
Filter cover
Filter cover
knobs
Filter unit
Filter unit
knobs
Interlocking
parts
2
3
4, 5
6
7
Extra
air lter
< Only for CP-X8160,
CP-WX8240 and CP-WU8450>
Cleaning and replacing the air filter
116
Maintenance
► Before taking care of the air lter, make sure the power cable
is not plugged in, then allow the projector to cool sufciently.
►Use only the air lter of the specied type. Do not use the projector without the
air lter or the lter cover. It could result in a re or malfunction to the projector.
►Clean the air lter periodically. If the air lter becomes clogged by dust or the
like, internal temperatures rise and could cause a re, a burn or malfunction to
the projector.
WARNING
• Please reset the lter time only when you have cleaned or replaced
the air lter, for a suitable indication about the air lter.
• The projector may display the message such as the “CHECK THE AIR
FLOW” or turn off the projector, to prevent the internal heat level rising.
NOTE
Cleaning and replacing the air lter (continued)
10.
Put the lter cover back into the place.
11.
Turn the projector on and reset the lter time using the FILTER TIME item
in the EASY MENU.
(1) Press the MENU button to display a menu.
(2) Point at the FILTER TIME using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons, then press the
► cursor (or the ENTER / the RESET) button. A dialog will appear.
(3) Press the ► cursor button to select the “OK” on the dialog. It performs
resetting the lter time.
117
Maintenance
Other care
In order to ensure the safe use of your projector, please have it cleaned and
inspected by your dealer about once every year.
1.
Turn the projector off, and unplug the power cord. Allow the projector to cool
sufciently.
2.
After making sure that the projector is cool adequately, lightly wipe the lens
with a commercially available lens-cleaning wipe. Do not touch the lens
directly with your hand.
If the lens is awed, soiled or fogged, it could cause deterioration of display
quality. Please take care of the lens, being cautious of handling.
►Before caring, make sure the power cord is not plugged in,
and then allow the projector to cool sufciently. The care in a high temperature
state of the projector could cause a burn and/or malfunction to the projector.
►Never try to care for the inside of the projector personally. Doing is so
dangerous.
►Avoid wetting the projector or inserting liquids in the projector. It could result in
a re, an electric shock, and/or malfunction to the projector.
• Do not put anything containing water, cleaners or chemicals near the projector.
• Do not use aerosols or sprays.
WARNING
►Please take right care of the projector according to the
following. Incorrect care could cause not only an injury but adverse inuence
such as discoloration, peeling paint, etc.
►Do not use cleaners or chemicals other than those specied in this manual.
►Do not polish or wipe with hard objects.
NOTICE ►Do not directly touch the lens surface with hands.
CAUTION
Inside of the projector
Caring for the lens
1.
Turn the projector off, and unplug the power cord. Allow the projector to cool
sufciently.
2.
After making sure that the projector is cool adequately, lightly wipe with gauze
or a soft cloth.
If the projector is extremely dirty, dip soft cloth in water or a neutral cleaner
diluted in water, and wipe lightly after wringing well. Then, wipe lightly with a
soft, dry cloth.
Incorrect care could have adverse inuence such as discoloration, peeling paint,
etc.
Caring for the cabinet and remote control
118
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
If an abnormal operation should occur, stop using the projector immediately.
Otherwise if a problem occurs with the projector, the following checks and
measures are recommended before requesting repair.
If this does not resolve the problem, please contact your dealer or service
company. They will tell you what warranty condition is applied.
►Never use the projector if abnormal operations such as
smoke, strange odor, excessive sound, damaged casing or elements or cables,
penetration of liquids or foreign matter, etc. should occur. In such cases,
immediately disconnect the power plug from the power outlet. After making sure
that the smoke or odor has stopped, contact to your dealer or service company.
WARNING
Related messages
When some message appears, check and cope with it according to the following
table. Although these messages will be automatically disappeared around several
minutes, it will be reappeared every time the power is turned on.
Message Description
There is no input signal.
Please conrm the signal input connection, and the
status of the signal source.
The USB TYPE B port is selected as the picture input
source even if MOUSE is selected for USB TYPE B
(
67).
Select the USB DISPLAY for the USB TYPE B item in
the OPTION menu. In this case, you cannot use the
simple mouse and keyboard function. Otherwise select
other port for picture input.
3URMHFWRULVZDLWLQJIRUDQLPDJH¿OH
Check the hardware connection, settings on the projector
and network-related settings.
The computer-Projector network connection might be
disconnected. Please re-connect them.
(continued on next page)
Troubleshooting
Warnings displayed on the Status Monitor
<Only for CP-X8160, CP-WX8255 and CP-WU8450>
If an error occurs, a warning will be displayed on the Status Monitor (
21).
Resolve the errors referring to the table of the sections "Related messages" and
"Regarding the indicator lamps" when the warning is displayed.
119
Message Description
The horizontal or vertical frequency of the input
VLJQDOLVQRWZLWKLQWKHVSHFL¿HGUDQJH
Please conrm the specs for your projector or the signal
source specs.
An improper signal is input.
Please conrm the specs for your projector or the signal
source specs.
The internal temperature is rising.
Please turn the power off, and allow the projector to cool
down at least 20 minutes. After having conrmed the
following items, please turn the power ON again.
• Is there blockage of the air passage aperture?
• Is the air lter dirty?
• Does the peripheral temperature exceed 45°C?
• If you use CP-X8150, CP-WX8240, CP-SX8350 or
CP-WU8440, does the peripheral temperature exceed
40°C?
• Is the setting for ALTITUDE appropriate?
For details of ALTITUDE, refer to ALTITUDE of
SERVICE in the OPTION menu (
69). If the projector is
used with a wrong setting, it may cause damage to the
projector itself or the parts inside.
$QRWHRISUHFDXWLRQZKHQFOHDQLQJWKHDLU¿OWHU
Please immediately turn the power off, and clean or
change the air lter referring to the Cleaning and
UHSODFLQJWKHDLU¿OWHU section of this manual. After you
have cleaned or changed the air lter, please be sure to
reset the lter timer (
67, 115).
The button operation is not available.
Check the button you are going to use (
6). Even when
a usable button is pressed, all button operations are not
available under the following conditions.
- While the lens is moving, button operation from the
control panel or the remote control might be ignored.
- Pressing the one of buttons to call a signal input might
be ignored, when all the input ports belonging to the
category the button's name shows are set to the "SKIP"
by the item SOURCE SKIP of the OPTION menu.
Troubleshooting
Related messages (continued)
120
Troubleshooting
Regarding the indicator lamps
When operation of the LAMP, TEMP and POWER indicators differs from usual,
check and cope with it according to the following table.
POWER
indicator
LAMP
indicator
TEMP
indicator
Description
Lighting
In
Orange
Turned
off
Turned
off
The projector is in a standby state.
Please refer to the section “Power on/off”.
Blinking
In
Green
Turned
off
Turned
off
The projector is warming up.
Please wait.
Lighting
In
Green
Turned
off
Turned
off
The projector is in an on state.
Ordinary operations may be performed.
Blinking
In
Orange
Turned
off
Turned
off
The projector is cooling down.
Please wait.
Blinking
In
Red
(discre-
tionary)
(discre-
tionary)
The projector is cooling down. A certain error
has been detected.
Please wait until POWER indicator nishes blinking,
and then perform the proper measure using the item
descriptions below.
Blinking
In
Red
or
Lighting
In Red
Lighting
In
Red
Turned
off
The lamp does not light, and there is a
possibility that interior portion has become
heated.
Please turn the power off, and allow the projector to
cool down at least 20 minutes. After the projector has
sufciently cooled down, please make conrmation of
the following items, and then turn the power on again.
• Is there blockage of the air passage aperture?
• Is the air lter dirty?
• Does the peripheral temperature exceed 45°C?
• If you use CP-X8150, CP-WX8240, CP-SX8350
or CP-WU8440, does the peripheral temperature
exceed 40°C?
If the same indication is displayed after the remedy,
please change the lamp referring to the section
Replacing the lamp.
Blinking
In
Red
or
Lighting
In Red
Blinking
In
Red
Turned
off
7KHODPSFRYHUKDVQRWEHHQSURSHUO\¿[HG
Please turn the power off, and allow the projector to
cool down at least 45 minutes. After the projector has
sufciently cooled down, please make conrmation
of the attachment state of the lamp cover. After
performing any needed maintenance, turn the power
on again. If the same indication is displayed after
the remedy, please contact your dealer or service
company.
(continued on next page)
121
Troubleshooting
Regarding the indicator lamps (continued)
POWER
indicator
LAMP
indicator
TEMP
indicator
Description
Blinking
In
Red
or
Lighting
In
Red
Turned
off
Blinking
In
Red
The cooling fan is not operating.
Please turn the power off, and allow the projector to
cool down at least 20 minutes. After the projector has
sufciently cooled down, please make conrmation
that no foreign matter has become caught in the fan,
etc., and then turn the power on again.
If the same indication is displayed after the remedy,
please contact your dealer or service company.
Blinking
In
Red
or
Lighting
In
Red
Turned
off
Lighting
In
Red
There is a possibility that the interior portion
has become heated.
Please turn the power off, and allow the projector to
cool down at least 20 minutes. After the projector has
sufciently cooled down, please make conrmation of
the following items, and then turn the power on again.
• Is there blockage of the air passage aperture?
• Is the air lter dirty?
• Does the peripheral temperature exceed 45°C?
• If you use CP-X8150, CP-WX8240, CP-SX8350
or CP-WU8440, does the peripheral temperature
exceed 40°C?
• Is the setting for ALTITUDE appropriate?
For details on ALTITUDE, refer to ALTITUDE
of SERVICE in the OPTION menu (
69). If the
projector is used with a wrong setting, it may cause
damage to the projector itself or the parts inside.
Lighting
In
Green
Simultaneous
blinking in
Red
,WLVWLPHWRFOHDQWKHDLU¿OWHU
Please immediately turn the power off, and clean or
change the air lter referring to the section Cleaning
DQGUHSODFLQJWKHDLU¿OWHU. After cleaning or
changing the air lter, please be sure to reset the
lter timer. After the remedy, reset the power to ON.
Lighting
In
Green
Alternative
blinking in
Red
There is a possibility that the interior portion
has become overcooled.
Please use the unit within the usage temperature
parameters (0°C to 40°C or 45°C (
User's Manual
(concise))). After the treatment, reset the power to
ON.
Blinking In
Green for
approx. 3
seconds.
Turned
off
Turned
off
At least 1 Power ON schedule is saved to the
projector.
Please refer to 3.1.7 Schedule Settings in the
Network Guide.
(continued on next page)
122
• When the interior portion has become overheated, for safety
purposes, the projector is automatically shut down, and the indicator lamps
may also be turned off. In such a case, disconnect the power cord, and wait at
least 45 minutes. After the projector has sufciently cooled down, please make
conrmation of the attachment state of the lamp and lamp cover, and then turn
the power on again.
NOTE
For the SECURITY indicator, see SECURITY INDICATOR in the SECURITY
menu
(
93).
For the SHADE indicator, see the section "Temporarily shading the screen"
(
36).
The FILTER indicator shows the condition of the air lter. Utilize this feature to
keep the interior of the projector in good condition.
FILTER indicator Description
Turned off
7KHDLU¿OWHULVFOHDQ
No need to clean up.
Lighting In
Orange
7KHDLU¿OWHULVJRLQJWREHFKRNHG
It is recommended to clean it.
Lighting In
Red
7KHDLU¿OWHULVFKRNHG
It is required to turn the power off and clean the air lter
immediately.
Troubleshooting
Regarding the indicator lamps (continued)
Resetting all settings
When it is hard to correct some wrong settings, the FACTORY RESET function
of SERVICE item in OPTION menu (
75) can reset all settings (except settings
such as LANGUAGE, LAMP TIME, FILTER TIME, FILTER MESSAGE, STANDBY
MODE, COMMUNICATION, SECURITY and NETWORK) to the factory default.
• The FILTER indicator might light up in orange or red when something
blocks the intake vents even though the air lter is clean.
•
The FILTER indicator might light up differently from other indicators or display
messages related to cleaning the air lter. Follow the prompt that is displayed
earlier.
NOTE
123
Troubleshooting
Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects
About the phenomenon confused with a machine defect, check and cope with it
according to the following table.
Phenomenon Cases not involving a machine defect
Reference
page
Power does not
come on.
The electrical power cord is not plugged in.
Correctly connect the power cord.
16
The main power source has been interrupted during
operation such as by a power outage (blackout), etc.
Please disconnect the power plug from the power outlet,
and allow the projector to cool down at least 10 minutes,
then turn the power on again.
16
Either there is no lamp and/or lamp cover, or either
RIWKHVHKDVQRWEHHQSURSHUO\¿[HG
Please turn the power off and disconnect the power
plug from the power outlet, and allow the projector to
cool down at least 45 minutes. After the projector has
sufciently cooled down, please make conrmation of
the attachment state of the lamp and lamp cover, and
then turn the power on again.
113
Neither sounds
nor pictures are
outputted.
The signal cables are not correctly connected.
Correctly connect the connection cables.
10 ~ 14
Signal source does not correctly work.
Correctly set up the signal source device by referring to
the manual of the source device.
–
The input changeover settings are mismatched.
Select the input signal, and correct the settings.
26
AV MUTE function is working.
Press AV MUTE button on the remote control.
25
The USB TYPE B port is selected as the picture input
source even if MOUSE is selected for USB TYPE B.
Select USB DISPLAY for USB TYPE B in OPTION menu
to project the picture input to the port. Otherwise select
other port for picture input.
67
The USB TYPE B port is not recognized as an input
port because of electrical noise.
Temporarily set to MOUSE with the USB TYPE B on
the OPTION menu, and then return it to USB DISPLAY
to enable the USB TYPE B port to be recognized as an
input port.
67
(continued on next page)
124
Troubleshooting
Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects (continued)
Phenomenon Cases not involving a machine defect
Reference
page
Neither sounds
nor pictures are
outputted.
(continued)
The projector does not recognize the USB storage
device inserted into USB TYPE A
ports.
Use the REMOVE USB function rst, remove the USB
storage device, and then insert it into the port again.
Before removing the USB storage device, be sure to use
the REMOVE USB function on the Thumbnail screen,
which appears when the
USB TYPE A is selected as the
input source.
12, 97
Sound does not
come out.
The signal cables are not correctly connected.
Correctly connect the audio cables.
10 ~ 14
The volume is adjusted to an extremely low level.
Adjust the volume to a higher level using the menu
function or the remote control.
25, 57
The AUDIO SOURCE/SPEAKER setting is not correct.
Correctly set the AUDIO SOURCE/SPEAKER in AUDIO
menu.
57
The mode selected for HDMI AUDIO is not suitable.
Check each of the two modes provided and select the
suitable one for your HDMI
TM
audio device.
58
7KH6RXQGEXWWRQƈRUFKHFNER[LVGLVDEOHG
If you have selected USB TYPE A, turn the sound on
from the Thumbnail menu.
If you have selected USB TYPE B, remove the check
mark from the Sound checkbox in the Options window of
“LiveViewer Lite for USB”.
If you have selected LAN, remove the check mark from
the Sound checkbox in the Option menu of “LiveViewer”.
97, 112
No pictures are
displayed.
The signal cables are not correctly connected.
Correctly connect the connection cables.
10 ~ 14
The brightness is adjusted to an extremely low level.
Adjust BRIGHTNESS to a higher level using the menu
function.
44
The computer cannot detect the projector as a plug
and play monitor.
Make sure that the computer can detect a plug and play
monitor using another plug and play monitor.
10
The lens shade is closed.
Check whether the SHADE indicator is blinking. If it is
blinking, press SHADE button on the control panel.
36
(continued on next page)
125
Phenomenon Cases not involving a machine defect
Reference
page
The remote
control does not
work.
The batteries in the remote control are near the end.
Replace the batteries.
17
The ID numbers set in the projector and the remote
control are different.
Press the ID button with the same ID number as the
projector, then perform the desired operation. The ID
number set in the projector can be displayed by pressing
any of the ID buttons on the remote control for 3 seconds
while the lamp is on.
17
Video screen
display freezes.
The FREEZE function is working.
Press FREEZE button to restore the screen to normal.
36
Colors have
a faded- out
appearance,
or color tone is
poor.
Color settings are not correctly adjusted.
Perform picture adjustments by changing the COLOR
TEMP, COLOR and/or TINT settings, using the menu
functions.
45
COLOR SPACE setting is not suitable.
Change the COLOR SPACE setting to AUTO, RGB,
SMPTE240, REC709 or REC601.
50
Pictures appear
dark.
The brightness and/or contrast are adjusted to an
extremely low level.
Adjust BRIGHTNESS and/or CONTRAST settings to a
higher level using the menu function.
44
The projector is operating in Eco mode.
Set ECO MODE to NORMAL, and set AUTO ECO
MODE to OFF, in the SETUP menu.
55
The lamp is approaching the end of its product
lifetime.
Replace the lamp.
113, 114
Pictures appear
blurry.
The lens cover is attached.
Remove the lens cover.
4
Either the focus and/or horizontal phase settings are
not properly adjusted.
Adjust the focus using the FOCUS + / - buttons, and/or H
PHASE using the menu function.
29, 49
The lens is dirty or misty.
Clean the lens referring to the section Caring for the
lens.
117
(continued on next page)
Troubleshooting
Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects (continued)
126
Phenomenon Cases not involving a machine defect
Reference
page
Some kind
of image
degradation
such as
ickering or
stripes appear
on screen.
When the projector is operating in Eco mode,
ÀLFNHULQJPD\DSSHDURQVFUHHQ
Set ECO MODE to NORMAL, and set AUTO ECO
MODE to OFF, in the SETUP menu.
55
The OVER SCAN ratio is too big.
Adjust OVER SCAN in the IMAGE menu smaller.
48
Excessive VIDEO NR.
Change the setting of VIDEO NR in the INPUT menu.
50
The FRAME LOCK function cannot work on the
current input signal.
Set FRAME LOCK in the INPUT menu to OFF.
52
The sound
or image
is unstable
or is output
intermittently.
When LAN, USB TYPE A or USB TYPE B port is
selected, some parts of the output may be missing
due to signal processing delay.
Change the signal or use another port.
26, 57
The computer
connected to
the USB TYPE
B port of the
projector does not
start up.
The computer cannot start up in the current
KDUGZDUHFRQ¿JXUDWLRQ
Disconnect the USB cable from the computer, then
reconnect it after starting up the computer.
11, 12
RS-232C does
not work.
The SAVING function is working.
Select NORMAL for STANDBY MODE item in the
SETUP menu.
56
The COMMUNICATION TYPE for the CONTROL port
is set to NETWORK BRIDGE.
Select OFF for COMMUNICATION TYPE item in the
OPTION - SERVICE - COMMUNICATION menu.
72
Network does
not work
The SAVING function is working.
Select NORMAL for STANDBY MODE item in the
SETUP menu.
56
The same network address is set for both wireless
and wired LAN.
Change the network address setting for wireless or wired
LAN.
77, 81
(continued on next page)
Troubleshooting
Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects (continued)
127
• Although bright spots or dark spots may appear on the screen, this
is a unique characteristic of liquid crystal displays, and it does not constitute or
imply a machine defect.
NOTE
Phenomenon Cases not involving a machine defect
Reference
page
NETWORK
BRIDGE
function does
not work
The NETWORK BRIDGE function is turned off.
Select NETWORK BRIDGE for COMMUNICATION TYPE
item in the OPTION - SERVICE - COMMUNICATION
menu.
72
Schedule
function does
not work
The SAVING function is working.
Select NORMAL for STANDBY MODE item in the
SETUP menu.
56
The internal clock has been reset.
Once you turn off the projector in the SAVING mode or
the AC power, the current date and time setting is reset.
Check the DATE AND TIME setting for WIRELESS
SETUP or WIRED SETUP in the NETWORK menu.
78, 82
When the
projector is
connected to
the network, it
powers off and
on as described
below.
Powers off
POWER
indicator blinks
in orange a few
times
Goes into
standby mode
Disconnect the LAN cable and check that the
projector is working properly.
If this phenomenon occurs after connecting to the
network, there may be a loop between two Ethernet
switching hubs within the network, as explained below.
- There are two or more Ethernet switching hubs in a
network.
- Two of the hubs are doubly connected by LAN cables.
- This double connection forms a loop between the two
hubs.
Such a loop may have an adverse effect on the projector
as well as the other network devices.
Check the network connection and remove the loop by
disconnecting the LAN cables such that there is only one
connecting cable between two hubs.
–
Troubleshooting
Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects (continued)
128
Specifications
Specications
Please see the 6SHFL¿FDWLRQV in the User’s Manual (concise) which is a book.
End User License Agreement for the Projector Software
• Software in the projector consists of the plural number of independent software
modules and there exist our copyright or/and third party copyrights for each of
such software modules.
• Be sure to read “End User License Agreement for the Projector Software” which
is separated document.
1
Projector
CP-X8150/CP-X8160/CP-WX8240/
CP-WX8255/CP-SX8350/CP-WU8440/
CP-WU8450
User's Manual (detailed)
Network Guide
Thank you for purchasing this product.
This manual is intended to explain only the network function. For proper use of this
product, please refer to this manual and the other manuals for this product.
Features
This projector has the network function that brings you the following main features.
►Before using this product, be sure to read all manuals for this
product. After reading them, store them in a safe place for future reference.
WARNING
• The information in this manual is subject to change without notice.
• The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in
this manual.
• The reproduction, transfer or copy of all or any part of this document is not
permitted without express written consent.
NOTE
Trademark acknowledgment
9 Network Presentation : allows the projector to project computer images transmitted
through a network. (
15)
9 Web Control : allows you to monitor and control the projector through a network from a
computer. (
16)
9 My Image : allows the projector to store up to four still images and project them. (
50)
9 Messenger : allows the projector to display text sent from a computer through a network.
(
51)
9 Network Bridge : allows you to control an external device through the projector from a
computer. (
52)
• Microsoft
®
, Internet Explorer
®
, Windows
®
, Windows Vista
®
and Aero
®
are registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.
• Adobe
®
and Flash
®
are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
• Pentium
®
is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation.
• JavaScript
®
is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
• HDMI
TM
, the HDMI logo and High-Denition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or
registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries.
• Crestron
®
, Crestron e-Control
®
, e-Control
®
, Crestron RoomView
®
and RoomView
TM
are
trademarks or registered trademarks of Crestron Electronics, Inc. in
the United States and other countries.
• Trademark PJLink is a trademark applied for trademark rights in
Japan, the United States of America and other countries and areas.
All other trademarks are the properties of their respective owners.
2
Contents
Contents
Caution .......................................................................................... 4
1. Connection to the network ...................................................... 5
1.1 System requirements ................................................................................. 5
1.1.1 Required equipment preparation ..................................................................................... 5
1.1.2 Hardware and software requirement for computer .......................................................... 5
1.2 Quick connection ........................................................................................ 6
1.3 Manual network connection setting - Wired LAN -. ..................................... 7
1.3.1 Equipments connection .................................................................................................... 7
1.3.2 Network settings .............................................................................................................. 7
1.3.3 “Internet Option” setting ................................................................................................. 10
1.4 Manual network connection setting - Wireless LAN - ............................... 11
1.4.1 Preparation for wireless LAN connection ....................................................................... 11
1.4.2 Wireless LAN connection set up .................................................................................... 12
2. Network Presentation ............................................................. 15
3. Web Control ............................................................................ 16
3.1 Projector Web Control ............................................................................... 17
3.1.1 Logon ............................................................................................................................. 17
3.1.2 Network Information ....................................................................................................... 18
3.1.3 Network Settings ............................................................................................................ 19
3.1.4 Port Settings .................................................................................................................. 22
3.1.5 Mail Settings .................................................................................................................. 24
3.1.6 Alert Settings .................................................................................................................. 25
3.1.7 Schedule Settings .......................................................................................................... 27
3.1.8 Date/Time Settings ......................................................................................................... 30
3.1.9 Security Settings ............................................................................................................ 32
3.1.10 Projector Control .......................................................................................................... 33
3.1.11 Remote Control ............................................................................................................ 39
3.1.12 Projector Status ........................................................................................................... 41
3.1.13 Network Restart ........................................................................................................... 41
3.2 Crestron e-Control
®
.................................................................................. 42
3.2.1 Main window .................................................................................................................... 43
3.2.2 Tools window ................................................................................................................... 45
3.2.3 Info window ..................................................................................................................... 47
3.2.4 Help Desk window ........................................................................................................... 48
3.2.5 Emergency Alert .............................................................................................................. 49
4. My Image Function ................................................................. 50
5. Messenger Function ............................................................... 51
3
Contents
6. Network Bridge Function ....................................................... 52
6.1 Connecting devices .................................................................................. 52
6.2 Communication setup ............................................................................... 53
6.3 Communication port ................................................................................. 53
6.4 Transmission method ............................................................................... 54
6.4.1 HALF-DUPLEX .............................................................................................................. 54
6.4.2 FULL-DUPLEX ............................................................................................................... 55
7. Other Functions ...................................................................... 56
7.1 E-mail Alerts ............................................................................................. 56
7.2 Projector Management using SNMP ........................................................ 58
7.3 Event Scheduling ..................................................................................... 59
7.4 Command Control via the Network .......................................................... 62
7.5 Crestron RoomView
®
................................................................................. 67
8. Troubleshooting ..................................................................... 68
6SHFL¿FDWLRQV ......................................................................... 69
10. Warranty and after-sales service ........................................ 70
4
Caution
Caution
To use the wireless network function of this projector, the designated USB wire-
less adapter that is sold as an option is required. For precautions according to the
standards and laws, refer to the documents that come with the adapter.
[Restriction on plugging and unplugging the USB wireless adapter]
Before you insert or pull out the USB wireless adapter from the projector, turn off
the power of the projector and pull out the power cord’s plug from the outlet. Do
not touch the USB wireless adapter that is connected to the projector while the
projector is receiving AC power.
Do not use any extension cable or device when connecting the adapter to the projector.
[Security precautions when using wireless LAN]
It is recommended that security settings, such as SSID and ENCRYPTION, are
specied when using wireless LAN communication. If the security settings are not
specied, the contents may be intercepted or it may cause unauthorized access
to the system. For details on wireless LAN security settings, refer to 3.1 Projector
Web Control or
NETWORK menu in the Operating Guide.
►The optional IEEE802.11b/g/n USB wireless adapter uses
the 2.4GHz radio frequency band. You do not need a radio license to use the
adapter, but you should be aware of the following:
•
DO NOT USE NEAR THE FOLLOWING!
• Microwave ovens
• Industrial, scientic or medical devices
• Designated low power radio stations
• Premises radio stations
Using the USB wireless adapter near the above may cause radio interference,
which would result in a decrease in transmission speed or interruption, and
even lead to malfunctioning of devices such as pacemakers.
•
Depending on the location where the USB wireless adapter is used, radio wave
interference may occur, which may result in a decrease in transmission speed
or interruption in communication.In particular, please be aware that using the
USB wireless adapter at locations where there is reinforced steel, other types
of metals or concrete is likely to cause radio wave interference.
• Available Channels
The USB wireless adapter uses the 2.4GHz radio frequency band, but
depending on the country or region you are in, the channels that you can use
might be limited. Please consult your dealer for information on the usable
channels.
• Bringing the optional USB wireless adapter out of the country or region you
reside in and using it there could lead to a violation of the radio laws of that
country or region.
CAUTION
5
1. Connection to the network
1.1 System requirements
1. Connection to the network
The following equipments are required to connect the projector to your computer
through the network.
Ŷ&RPPRQ The projector: 1 unit, Computer : minimum 1 set
Ŷ'HSHQGLQJRQKRZ\RXZDQWWRFRQQHFW
1) For the wired connection *1
LAN cable (CAT-5 or greater): 1 piece
2) For the wireless connection *2
- Projector side
IEEE802.11b/g/n USB wireless adapter (option : USB-WL-11N) : 1 unit
- Computer side
IEEE802.11 b/g/n wireless LAN equipment: 1 unit for each *3
To connect your computer to the projector and use the network function of the
projector, your computer needs to meet the following requirements.
1.1.1 Required equipment preparation
1.1.2 Hardware and software requirement for computer
9 OS: One of the following.
Windows
®
XP Home Edition /Professional Edition
Windows Vista
®
Home Basic /Home Premium /Business /Ultimate /Enterprise
Windows
®
7 Starter /Home Basic /Home Premium /Professional /Ultimate /
Enterprise
9 CPU: Pentium 4 (2.8 GHz or higher)
9 Graphic card: 16 bit, XGA or higher
* When using the “LiveViewer” it is recommended that the display resolution of
your computer is set to 1024 x 768.
9 Memory: 512 MB or higher
9 Hard disk space: 100 MB or higher
9 Web browser: Internet Explorer
®
6.0 or higher
9 &'520'9'520GULYH
*1: The system for using the network function of the projector requires
communication environment conforming 100Base-TX or 10Base-T.
*2: An access point is required when the wireless LAN connection is used as
Infrastructure mode.
*3: Depending on the type of wireless network device and computer you are using,
the projector may not be able to communicate properly with your computer,
even if the computer is equipped with a built-in wireless LAN function.
To eliminate communication problems, please use a Wi-Fi certied wireless
network device.
6
1. Connection to the network
1.1 System requirements (continued)
• The network communication control is disabled while the projector is
in standby mode if the STANDBY MODE item is set to SAVING. Please connect
the network communication to the projector after setting the STANDBY MODE
to NORMAL. (
SETUP menu in the Operating Guide)
• You can get the latest version of the applications for the network functions of
the projector and the latest information for this product from the Hitachi website.
(http://www.hitachi-america.us/digitalmedia or http://www.hitachidigitalmedia.
com).
NOTE
1.2 Quick connection
The “LiveViewer” supports very quick and simple connection to the network.
When making use of the network function, it is recommended that you install the
"LiveViewer" on your computer. For details, refer to the manual for "LiveViewer".
In case you don’t want to use the “LiveViewer” or you cannot use it by some
reason, proceed to the manual setting, the item 1.3 for the wired LAN (
7) and
the item 1.4 for the wireless LAN. (
11)
7
1. Connection to the network
1.3 Manual network connection setting - Wired LAN -
This section explains how to set it up manually.
1.3.1 Equipments connection
Connect the projector and a computer with a LAN cable.
* Before connecting with an existing network, contact the network administrator.
Next, check the following computer settings.
1.3.2 Network settings
This is the explanation of network connection settings for Windows
®
7 and Internet
Explorer.
1) Log on to Windows
®
7 as administrator authority. Administrator authority is the
account, which can access to all functions.
2) Open “Control Panel” from “Start” menu.
3) Open “View network status and tasks” in “Network and Internet”.
With the icons in the "Control Panel" window displayed, click "Network and
Sharing Center"..
4) Click "Change adapter settings" in the menu
on the left side of the "Network and Sharing
Center" window.
(continued on next page)
8
1. Connection to the network
1.3 Manual network connection setting - Wired LAN - (continued)
7) Select "Use the following IP address" and congure the IP
address, Subnet mask and Default gateway for the computer
accordingly. If a DHCP server exists in the network, you
can select "Obtain an IP address automatically" and the IP
address will be assigned automatically.
After setting is complete, click [OK] to close the window.
5) Right-click "Local Area Connection" to open the menu,
and select "Properties".
6) Select "Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)" and click
[Properties].
(continued on next page)
9
1. Connection to the network
1.3 Manual network connection setting - Wired LAN - (continued)
[About IP address]
Ŷ6HWWLQJPDQXDOO\
The Network address portion of the IP address setting on your computer must
be the same as the setting on the projector. Also, the entire IP address on the
computer must not overlap with that of the other devices on the same network,
including the projector.
The projector’s settings are as follows.
IP address: 192.168.1.254
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
(Network address: 192.168.1 in this case)
Therefore, specify the computer’s IP address as follows.
IP address: 192.168.1.xxx (xxx shows decimal number.)
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
(Network address: 192.168.1 in this case)
For example
Select from 1 to 254 for “xxx” not duplicating with any other equipments.
In this case, since the IP address of the projector is “192.168.1.254”, specify a
setting between 1 to 253 for the computer.
• “0.0.0.0” cannot be set to the IP address.
• The projector’s IP address can be changed by using the conguration utility
via a web browser. (
21)
• If the projector and the computer exist in the same network (i.e., same
network address), you can leave the default gateway eld blank.
• When the projector and the computer exist in different networks, the default
gateway must be set. Consult to the network administrator in detail.
NOTE
Ŷ6HWWLQJDXWRPDWLFDOO\
When a DHCP server exists in the connected network, it is possible to assign an
IP address to the projector and computer automatically.
* DHCP is abbreviation for “Dynamic Host Conguration Protocol” and has the
function to provide necessary setting for network like IP address from server to
client. A server that has DHCP function is called DHCP server.
(continued on next page)
10
1. Connection to the network
1.3 Manual network connection setting - Wired LAN - (continued)
2) Click “Connections” tab and then click [LAN settings] button
to open “Local Area Network (LAN) Settings”.
1.3.3 “Internet Option” setting
1) Click “Internet Options” in “Network and
Sharing Center” window to open “Internet
Properties” window.
3) Uncheck all boxes in “Local Area Network (LAN) Settings”
window.
After setting is complete, click [OK] to close the window.
11
1. Connection to the network
1.4
Manual network connection setting
-
Wireless LAN -
Using the designated USB wireless adapter (option) on the projector enables the
projector and computer to communicate in both the Ad-Hoc and Infrastructure
modes.
This section is intended to explain how to set up wireless LAN connection
manually.
1.4.1 Preparation for wireless LAN connection
* Ad-Hoc is one of the wireless LAN communication methods without having
access point to communicate.
* Infrastructure is one of the wireless LAN communication methods with having
access point to communicate. If certain quantities of equipments are used, this
mode is efcient.
If communicating with existing network, consult to your network administrator.
Fig. 1.4.1.a Without an access point communication (Ad-Hoc)
Fig. 1.4.1.b With an access point communication (Infrastructure)
First, insert the USB wireless adapter into one of the USB TYPE A ports.
( Connecting with your devices in the Operating Guide)
Then, set up the computer for wireless communication.
When the computer comes with a built-in IEEE802.11b/g/n wireless LAN device,
enable it and disable other network connections. If a wireless LAN device is not
built into the computer, connect an IEEE802.11b/g/n wireless LAN device and
install the device driver. For details, refer to the user's guide for the computer and
wireless LAN device.
12
1. Connection to the network
1.4.2 Wireless LAN connection set up
Using wireless LAN utility for Windows
®
7 standard.
Wireless LAN initial settings for the projector is as follows.
1.4 Manual network connection setting - Wireless LAN - (continued)
Connection Control : Ad-Hoc
SSID : wireless
Channel : 1
Encryption rating : None
IP address : 192.168.10.254
* You can change these settings via a web browser on your computer or from the
menu of the projector. Refer to the item 3.1.3 Network Settings (
20) or
NETWORK menu in the Operating Guide.
1) Select "Change adapter settings" from the
menu on the left side of the "Network and
Sharing Center" window.
2) Right-click "Wireless Network Connection" to open the
menu, and select "Properties".
(continued on next page)
3) Select "Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)" and click
[Properties].
13
1. Connection to the network
1.4 Manual network connection setting - Wireless LAN - (continued)
4) Select "Use the following IP address" and congure the IP
address, Subnet mask and Default gateway for the computer
accordingly.
After setting is complete, click [OK] to close the window.
(continued on next page)
[About IP address]
The Network address portion of the IP address setting on your computer must
be the same as the setting on the projector. Also, the entire IP address on the
computer must not overlap with that of the other devices on the same network,
including the projector.
The projector’s settings are as follows.
IP address: 192.168.10.254
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
(Network address: 192.168.10 in this case)
Therefore, specify the computer’s IP address as follows.
IP address: 192.168.10.xxx (xxx shows decimal number.)
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
(Network address: 192.168.10 in this case)
For example
Select from 1 to 254 for “xxx” not duplicating with any other equipments.
In this case, since the IP address of the projector is “192.168.10.254”, specify
a setting between 1 to 253 for the computer.
• “0.0.0.0” cannot be set to the IP address.
• The projector’s IP address can be changed by using the conguration utility
via a web browser. (
20)
• If the projector and the computer exist in the same network (i.e., same
network address), you can leave the default gateway eld blank.
• When the projector and the computer exist in different networks, the default
gateway must be set.
NOTE
14
1. Connection to the network
1.4 Manual network connection setting - Wireless LAN - (continued)
6) From the connectable wireless networks, select the SSID of the
projector (set to "wireless" by default), and click [Connect]. If
you have enabled encryption, a window asking for input of the
encryption key will be displayed. Input the preset key.
5) Right-click "Wireless Network Connection" to open
the menu, and select "Connect / Disconnect".
7) After connection is established, "Connected" will appear to the
right of SSID.
15
2. Network Presentation
The projector can display or play back the computer screen images and audio
data that are transmitted through the network. This Network Presentation feature
helps you to smoothly make your presentations and conduct conferences.
2. Network Presentation
To start the Network Presentation, select the LAN port as the input source on the
projector and click the Starting Capture button on the “LiveViewer”.
"LiveViewer" function use depends on the model you are using. If you want to use
the latest downloaded "LiveViewer", please refer for the appropriate group item in
the "LiveViewer" User's Manual. This model will be in the Group of E.
To use Network Presentation, an exclusive application, "LiveViewer" is required.
It can be installed from the bundled application CD. You can also download the
latest version and relevant information from the Hitachi website (http://www.
hitachi-america.us/digitalmedia or http://www.hitachidigitalmedia.com). For details
of Network Presentation and instructions to install the "LiveViewer", refer to the
manual for "LiveViewer".
Wired LAN
Wireless LAN
• When the screen resolution of your computer is over specied, the
computer image is shrunk in specied size as below before transferring to the
projector.
CP-X8150, CP-X8160: 1024 x 768 (XGA)
The other models: 1280 x 800
The transferred image is displayed as shrunk on the projected screen even if
the panel resolution of the projector is larger than above.
NOTE
16
You can adjust or control the projector via a network from a web browser on a
computer that is connected to the same network.
• Internet Explorer
®
6.0 or later is required.
• If JavaScript
®
is disabled in your web browser conguration, you must enable
JavaScript
®
in order to use the projector web pages properly. See the Help les
for your web browser for details on how to enable JavaScript
®
.
• It is recommended that all web browser updates are installed.
• If data is transferred via wireless and wired LAN at the same time, the
projector may not be able to process the data correctly.
NOTE
3. Web Control
3. Web Control
Refer to the following for conguring or controlling the projector via a web browser.
Make sure that your computer and the projector is connected via network, and
then start Web browser.
Enter the projector's IP address into URL input box of the Web browser as the
example below, and then press the Enter key or
button.
Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10:
Enter “KWWS” into the address bar of the web browser
and press the Enter key or click
button.
If a correct URL is input, and the
projector and your computer are
connected to the same network
correctly, the selection window as
shown on the right will be displayed.
You can choose to use Projector Web
Control or Crestron e-Control® as a tool
for controlling the projector. Click one of
them.
For more details, refer to 3.1 Projector
Web Control (
17) or 3.2 Crestron
e-Control
®
(42).
• Do not attempt to control the projector with the projector's menu or
remote control, and via Web Control at the same time.
It may cause some
operational errors in the projector.
• If Crestron e-Control in the Network Settings (
21) is set to Disable,
the selection window above does not appear, but the Logon window of the
Projector Web Control is displayed.
• Crestron e-Control
®
is created using Flash
®
. You need to install Adobe
®
Flash
®
Player on your computer to use Crestron e-Control
®
.
NOTE
17
3. Web Control
3.1.1 Logon
To use the Projector Web Control function, you need
to logon with your user name and password.
• The language used on the Projector Web Control screen is the
same as that of the OSD on the projector. If you want to change it, you need
to change the OSD language on the projector. (
SCREEN menu in the
Operating Guide)
NOTE
Below are the factory default settings for user
name and password.
User name Password
Administrator <blank>
Enter your user name and password, and then click the [OK].
If you logon successfully, the screen below will be displayed.
Main menu
Click the desired operation or conguration item on the main menu.
3.1 Projector Web Control
Logon window
18
3.1.2 Network Information
Displays the projector’s current network
conguration settings.
Item 'HVFULSWLRQ
Common Information
Displays information common to both wireless and wired
LAN.
Projector Name Displays the projector name settings.
Wireless Information Displays the current settings of wireless LAN.
Mode Displays the mode of wireless LAN communication.
'+&3 Displays the DHCP setting.
IP Address Displays the IP address.
Subnet Mask Displays the subnet mask.
'HIDXOW*DWHZD\ Displays the default gateway.
'166HUYHU$GGUHVV Displays the DNS server address.
MAC Address Displays the MAC address.
Ch Displays the channel used for wireless LAN.
Encryption Displays the data encryption setting.
66,' Displays the SSID used by the projector.
Speed Displays the current wireless LAN transmission speed.
Wired Information Displays the current wired LAN settings.
'+&3 Displays the DHCP setting.
IP Address Displays the IP address.
Subnet Mask Displays the subnet mask.
'HIDXOW*DWHZD\ Displays the default gateway.
'166HUYHU$GGUHVV Displays the DNS server address.
MAC Address Displays the MAC address.
3. Web Control
3.1 Projector Web Control (continued)
19
3.1.3 Network Settings
Displays and congures network settings.
Item 'HVFULSWLRQ
Common Setup
Congures the settings common to wireless and wired LAN.
Projector Name
Congures the name of the projector.
The length of the Projector Name can be up to 64
alphanumeric characters. Only alphabets, numbers and
following symbols can be used.
!"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>?@[\]^_`{|}~ and space.
Particular projector name is pre-assigned by default.
sysLocation (SNMP)
Congures the location to be referred to when using SNMP.
The length of the sysLocation can be up to 255 alphanumeric
characters. Only numbers ‘0-9’ and alphabet ‘a-z’, ‘A-Z’ can
be used.
sysContact (SNMP)
Congures the contact information to be referred to when
using SNMP.
The length of the sysContact can be up to 255 alphanumeric
characters. Only numbers ‘0-9’ and alphabet ‘a-z’, ‘A-Z’ can
be used.
$0;''
$0;'HYLFH
'LVFRYHU\
Congures the AMX Device Discovery setting to detect the
projector from the controllers of AMX connected to the same
network. For the details of AMX Device Discovery, visit the
AMX web site.
URL: http://www.amx.com (as of Feb. 2012)
(continued on next page)
3. Web Control
3.1 Projector Web Control (continued)
20
3.1 Projector Web Control - Network Settings (continued)
3. Web Control
Item 'HVFULSWLRQ
Wireless Setup Congures the wireless LAN settings.
Mode Select "Ad-Hoc" or "Infrastructure".
,3&RQ¿JXUDWLRQ Congures network settings.
'+&321 Enables DHCP.
'+&32)) Disables DHCP.
IP Address Congures the IP address when DHCP is disabled.
Subnet Mask Congures the subnet mask when DHCP is disabled.
'HIDXOW
Gateway
Congures the default gateway when DHCP is disabled.
'166HUYHU$GGUHVV Congures the DNS server address.
Ch
Select from “1” to “11” a channel to use in the Ad-Hoc mode.
Encryption Select data encryption method.
WEP Key
Input the WEP key.
Either ASCII characters or hexadecimal numbers can be
used during WEP key input. However, you cannot use a
combination of both.The length of the key is dened as
follows according to the WEP and character formats.
Encryption ASCII characters HEX numbers
WEP 64bit 5 characters 10 characters
WEP 128bit 13 characters 26 characters
WPA Passphrase
Input WPA Passphrase.
Available number of input characters is 8 to 63. Only
alphabets, numbers and following symbols can be used.
!"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>?@ [\]^_`{|}~ and space
66,'
Select an SSID from the list.
If you require to set your unique SSID, select [Custom], then
set your own SSID following the rules below.
Maximum number of input characters is 32.
Only alphabets, numbers and following symbols can be used.
!"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>?@[\]^_`{|}~ and space.
(continued on next page)
• Depending on the country where you are
the channels may vary. In addition, depending on the
country or region where you are may be required to use a
wireless network card that conrm to the standards in the
respective country or region.
NOTE
21
Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
3.1 Projector Web Control - Network Settings (continued)
Item 'HVFULSWLRQ
Wired Setup Congures the wired LAN settings.
,3&RQ¿JXUDWLRQ Congures network settings.
'+&321 Enables DHCP.
'+&32)) Disables DHCP.
IP Address Congures the IP address when DHCP is disabled.
Subnet Mask Congures the subnet mask when DHCP is disabled.
'HIDXOW
Gateway
Congures the default gateway when DHCP is disabled.
'166HUYHU$GGUHVV Congures the DNS server address.
Other Setup Congures other network settings.
Crestron e-Control
Set whether to or not to use Crestron e-Control
®
.
If you choose Disable, the Logon window of Projector Web
Control and not the selection window will be displayed at rst
of the Web Control.
3. Web Control
• The new conguration settings are activated after restarting the
network connection. When the conguration settings are changed, you must
restart the network connection. You can restart the network connection from
Network Restart on the main menu (
41).
• If you connect the projector to an existing network, consult a network
administrator before setting server addresses.
• The WEP Key, WPA passphrase and SSID settings will not be set if the invalid
characters are used.
• The projector does not allow both wireless and wired LAN to be connected to
the same network. Do not set the same network address for both wireless and
wired LAN.
NOTE
22
3.1.4 Port Settings
Displays and congures communication port
settings.
Item 'HVFULSWLRQ
Network Control Port1
(Port:23)
Congures command control port 1 (Port:23).
Port open Click the [Enable] check box to use port 23.
Authentication
Click the [Enable] check box when authentication is required
for this port.
Network Control Port2
(Port:9715)
Congures command control port 2 (Port:9715).
Port open Click the [Enable] check box to use port 9715.
Authentication
Click the [Enable] check box when authentication is required
for this port.
PJLink
TM
Port
(Port:4352)
Congures the PJLink
TM
port (Port:4352).
Port open Click the [Enable] check box to use port 4352.
Authentication
Click the [Enable] check box when authentication is required
for this port.
My Image Port
(Port:9716)
Congures the My Image Port (Port:9716).
Port open Click the [Enable] check box to use port 9716.
Authentication
Click the [Enable] check box when authentication is required
for this port.
Messenger Port
(Port:9719)
Congures the Messenger Port (Port:9719).
Port open Click the [Enable] check box to use port 9719.
Authentication
Click the [Enable] check box when authentication is required
for this port.
(continued on next page)
3. Web Control
3.1 Projector Web Control (continued)
23
Item 'HVFULSWLRQ
SNMP Port Congures the SNMP port.
Port open Click the [Enable] check box to use SNMP.
Trap address
Congures the destination of the SNMP Trap in IP format.
• The address allows not only IP address but also domain
name if the valid DNS server is setup in the Network
Settings. The maximum length of host or domain name is up
to 255 characters.
'RZQORDG0,%¿OH Downloads a MIB le from the projector.
Network Bridge Port Congures the Bridge port number.
Port number
Input the port number.
Except for 41794, 9715, 9716, 9719, 9720, 5900, 5500, 4352
between 1024 and 65535 can be set up. It is set to 9717 as
the default setting.
Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
3.1 Projector Web Control - Port Settings (continued)
• The new conguration settings are activated after restarting the
network connection. When the conguration settings are changed, you must
restart the network connection. You can restart the network connection from
Network Restart on the main menu(
41).
NOTE
3. Web Control
24
3.1.5 Mail Settings
Displays and congures e-mail addressing
settings.
Item 'HVFULSWLRQ
Send Mail
Click the [Enable] check box to use the e-mail function.
Congure the conditions for sending e-mail under the Alert
Settings.
SMTP Server Address
Congures the address of the mail server in IP format.
• The address allows not only IP address but also domain
name if the valid DNS server is setup in the Network
Settings. The maximum length of host or domain name is up
to 255 characters.
Sender E-mail address
Congures the sender e-mail address.
The length of the sender e-mail address can be up to 255
alphanumeric characters.
Recipient E-mail address
Congures the e-mail address of up to ve recipients. You
can also specify the [TO] or [CC] for each address. The
length of the recipient e-mail address can be up to 255
alphanumeric characters.
Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
• You can conrm whether the mail settings work correctly using the
[Send Test Mail] button. Please enable Send mail setting before clicking the
[Send Test Mail].
• If you connect the projector to an existing network, consult a network
administrator before setting server addresses.
NOTE
3. Web Control
3.1 Projector Web Control (continued)
25
3.1.6 Alert Settings
Displays and congures failure & alert settings.
Item 'HVFULSWLRQ
Cover Error The lamp cover has not been properly xed.
Fan Error The cooling fan is not operating.
Lamp Error
The lamp does not light, and there is a possibility that interior
portion has become heated.
Temp Error
There is a possibility that the interior portion has become heated.
Air Flow Error The internal temperature is rising.
Cold Error
There is a possibility that the interior portion has become
overcooled.
Filter Error Filter time over.
Other Error
Other error.
If displaying this error, please contact your dealer.
Schedule Execution
Error
Schedule Execution error. (
27
)
Lamp Time Alarm Lamp time over Alarm Time setting.
Filter Time Alarm Filter time over Alarm Time setting.
)LOWHU6WDWXV1RWL¿FDWLRQ
The status to clean the air lter is changed.
7UDQVLWLRQ'HWHFWRU
Alarm
Transition Detector Alarm. (
SECURITY menu in the
Operating Guide)
Cold Start
When the projector is supplied with the power, it works as
below.
•
If the STANDBY MODE is set to the NORMAL:the projector's
power status changes from “OFF” to “Standby state”.
•
If the STANDBY MODE is set to the SAVING:the projector's power
status changes from “Standby state” to “ON (lamp is turned on)”.
(
SETUP menu in the Operating Guide)
Authentication Failure
The SNMP access is detected from the invalid SNMP community.
Refer to
Troubleshooting in the Operating Guide for further detailed
explanation of Error except Other Error and Schedule Execution Error.
3. Web Control
3.1 Projector Web Control (continued)
26
The Alert Items are shown below.
Item 'HVFULSWLRQ
Alarm Time
Congures the time to alert.
(Only Lamp Time Alarm and Filter Time Alarm.)
SNMP Trap Click the [Enable] check box to enable SNMP Trap alerts.
Send Mail
Click the [Enable] check box to enable e-mail alerts.
(Except Cold Start and Authentication Failure.)
Mail Subject
Congures the subject line of the e-mail to be sent.
The length of the subject line can be up to 100 alphanumeric
characters.
(Except Cold Start and Authentication Failure.)
Mail Text
Congures the text of the e-mail to be sent.
The length of the text can be up to 1024 alphanumeric
characters, but if you are using some of special characters
below the length may be shorter.
Special characters " ' : & , % \
and space
(Except Cold Start and Authentication Failure.)
Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
• The trigger of Filter Error e-mail is depending on the FILTER
MESSAGE setting in the SERVICE item of the OPTION menu which denes
the period until the lter message is displayed on the projector screen. An
e-mail will be sent when the usage time of the lter exceeds the time limit that is
set. No notication e-mail will be sent if the FILTER MESSAGE is set to TURN
OFF. (
OPTION menu in the Operating Guide)
• Lamp Time Alarm is dened as a threshold for e-mail notication (reminder)
of the lamp time. When the lamp hour exceeds the limit that is congured in the
Projector Web Control, an e-mail will be sent.
• Filter Time Alarm is dened as a threshold for e-mail notication (reminder)
of the lter time. When the lter hour exceeds the limit that is congured in the
Projector Web Control, an e-mail will be sent.
• )LOWHU6WDWXV1RWL¿FDWLRQ can be enabled for both or either one of Status
1 and 2. These notications are equivalent to the changing of the FILTER
indicator on the projector. (Status 1: off to orange, Status 2: orange to red)
Refer to the Operating Guide for details of the FILTER indicator.
NOTE
3.1 Projector Web Control - Alert Settings (continued)
3. Web Control
27
3.1.7 Schedule Settings
Displays and congures schedule settings.
Item 'HVFULSWLRQ
'DLO\ Congures the daily schedule.
Sunday Congures the Sunday schedule.
Monday Congures the Monday schedule.
Tuesday Congures the Tuesday schedule.
Wednesday Congures the Wednesday schedule.
Thursday Congures the Thursday schedule.
Friday Congures the Friday schedule.
Saturday Congures the Saturday schedule.
6SHFL¿FGDWH1R Congures the specic date (No.1) schedule.
6SHFL¿FGDWH1R Congures the specic date (No.2) schedule.
6SHFL¿FGDWH1R Congures the specic date (No.3) schedule.
6SHFL¿FGDWH1R Congures the specic date (No.4) schedule.
6SHFL¿FGDWH1R Congures the specic date (No.5) schedule.
3. Web Control
3.1 Projector Web Control (continued)
28
3.1 Projector Web Control - Schedule Settings (continued)
The schedule settings are shown below.
Item 'HVFULSWLRQ
Schedule Click the [Enable] check box to enable the schedule.
'DWH0RQWK'D\
Congures the month and date.
This item appears only when Specic date (No. 1-5) is
selected.
Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
The current event settings are displayed on the schedule list. To add additional
functions and events, set the following items.
Item 'HVFULSWLRQ
Time Congures the time to execute commands.
Command
[Parameter]
Congures the commands to be executed.
Power Congures the parameters for power control.
Input Source Congures the parameters for input switching.
My Image
Congures the parameters for My Image data display. (
50)
Messenger Congures the parameters for Messenger data display. (
51
)
Slideshow Congures the Start/Stop parameters for the Slideshow.
Click the [Register] button to add new commands to the schedule list.
Click the >'HOHWH@ button to delete commands from the schedule list.
Click the [Reset] button to delete all commands and reset the schedule settings
from the schedule list.
3. Web Control
29
• After the projector is moved, check the date and time set for the
projector before conguring the schedules.
• The internal clock’s time may not remain accurate. Using SNTP is
recommended to maintain accurate time.
• Events “My Image” and “Messenger” will not be executed appropriately but
result in “schedule execution error” status in case lamp does not light or/and
display data are not stored in the projector at the scheduled event execution
time.
• Events “Input Source” and “My Image” will not be executed if security feature
is enabled and the projector is locked due to the feature.
• Certain error state in the projector (such as temperature error, lamp error) will
prevent the projector from appropriate execution of scheduled functions/events.
• If no USB memory device is inserted to the projector or no image data for
display exists at the scheduled event time, a schedule execution error occurs
against the scheduled Slideshow event.
• When you start the Slideshow, input source will be automatically switched to
the USB TYPE A.
• Image les stored in the root directory of the USB memory device will be
displayed for the scheduled Slideshow.
• Please refer to
Troubleshooting in the Operating Guide in case
scheduled functions/events are not executed appropriately as you've set.
NOTE
3.1 Projector Web Control - Schedule Settings (continued)
3. Web Control
30
3.1.8 Date/Time Settings
Displays and congures the date and time
settings.
Item 'HVFULSWLRQ
&XUUHQW'DWH Congures the current date in \HDUPRQWKGD\ format.
Current Time Congures the current time in hour:minute:second format.
'D\OLJKW6DYLQJV7LPH
Click the [ON] check box to enable daylight savings time and
set the following items.
Start Congures the date and time daylight savings time begins.
Month Congures the month daylight savings time begins (1~12).
Week
Congures the week of the month daylight savings time
begins (First, 2, 3, 4, Last).
'D\
Congures the day of the week daylight savings time begins
(Sun, Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat).
Time
hour Congures the hour daylight savings time begins (0 ~ 23).
minute Congures the minute daylight savings time begins (0 ~ 59).
End Congures the date and time daylight savings time ends.
Month Congures the month daylight savings time ends (1 ~ 12).
Week
Congures the week of the month daylight savings time ends
(First, 2, 3, 4, Last).
'D\
Congures the day of the week daylight savings time ends
(Sun, Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat).
Time
hour Congures the hour daylight savings time ends (0 ~ 23).
minute Congures the minute daylight savings time ends (0 ~ 59).
(continued on next page)
3. Web Control
3.1 Projector Web Control (continued)
31
Item 'HVFULSWLRQ
Time difference
Congures the time difference. Set the same time difference
as the one set on your computer. If unsure, consult your IT
manager.
SNTP
Click the [ON] check box to retrieve Date and Time
information from the SNTP server and set the following items.
SNTP Server Address
Congures the SNTP server address in IP format.
• The address allows not only IP address but also domain
name if the valid DNS server is setup in the Network
Settings. The maximum length of host or domain name is up
to 255 characters.
Cycle
Congures the interval at which to retrieve Date and Time
information from the SNTP server (hour:minute).
Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
• The new conguration settings are activated after restarting the
network connection. When the conguration settings are changed, you must
restart the network connection. You can restart the network connection from
Network Restart on the main menu(
41).
• If you connect the projector to an existing network, consult a network
administrator before setting server addresses.
• Once you turn off the projector in the SAVING mode (
SETUP menu in the
Operating Guide) or the AC power, the current date and time setting is reset.
• To enable the SNTP function, the time difference must be set.
• The projector will retrieve Date and Time information from the time server and
override time settings when SNTP is enabled.
• The internal clock’s time may not remain accurate. Using SNTP is
recommended to maintain accurate time.
NOTE
3.1 Projector Web Control - Date/Time Settings (continued)
3. Web Control
32
3.1.9 Security Settings
Displays and congures passwords and other
security settings.
Item 'HVFULSWLRQ
User Account Congures the user name and password.
User name
Congures the user name.
The length of the text can be up to 32 alphanumeric
characters.
Password
Congures the password.
The length of the text can be up to 255 alphanumeric
characters.
Re-enter Password Reenter the above password for verication.
Network Control
Congures the Authentication password for Network Control
Port1 (Port: 23), Network Control Port2 (Port: 9715),
PJLink™ Port (Port: 4352), My Image Port (Port: 9716),
and Messenger Port (Port: 9719) (
22, 23)
.
Authentication
Password
Congures the Authentication password.
The length of the text can be up to 32 alphanumeric
characters.
Re-enter
Authentication
Password
Reenter the above password for verication.
SNMP Congures the community name if SNMP is used.
Community name
Congures the community name. The length of the text can
be up to 64 alphanumeric characters.
Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
• The new conguration settings are activated after restarting the
network connection. When the conguration settings are changed, you must
restart the network connection. You can restart the network connection from
Network Restart on the main menu(41).
• Only numbers ‘0-9’ and alphabet ‘a-z’, ‘A-Z’ can be used.
NOTE
3. Web Control
3.1 Projector Web Control (continued)
33
3.1.10 Projector Control
Item 'HVFULSWLRQ
MAIN
POWER Turns the power on/off.
INPUT SOURCE Selects the input source.
3,&785(02'( Selects the picture mode setting.
%/$1.212))
Turns the BLANK screen on/off.
MUTE Turns the audio mute on/off.
FREEZE Turns Freeze on/off.
MAGNIFY
Controls the magnify setting.
In some input signal sources, it might stop “Magnify” even
though it does not reach to maximum setting value.
0$*1,)<326,7,219
Adjusts the vertical magnify position.
MAGNIFY POSITION H
Adjusts the horizontal magnify position.
TEMPLATE Turns template on/off.
6+$'(
Turns the lens shade on(closed)/off(opened).
ZOOM Adjusts the zoom setting.
FOCUS Adjusts the focus setting.
/(166+,)79 Adjusts the vertical lens shift.
LENS SHIFT H Adjusts the horizontal lens shift.
LENS MEMORY
Saves, Loads or Clears the lens memory data.
PbyP* Turns the PbyP mode on/off.
PbyP LEFT SOURCE* Selects the PbyP left side area signal source.
PbyP RIGHT SOURCE*
Selects the PbyP right side area signal source.
PbyP MAIN AREA* Selects the PbyP main area posotion.
MY IMAGE Selects MY IMAGE data.
0<,0$*('(/(7( Deletes MY IMAGE data.
(continued on next page)
Operations of the projector can be performed
with the items on the screen.
The categories of the items are shown in the
main menu.
Most of the items have a submenu.
Refer to the table below for details.
• The setting value may not match with the actual value if the user
changes the value manually. In that case, please refresh the page by clicking
the [Refresh] button.
NOTE
3. Web Control
3.1 Projector Web Control (continued)
* Only for CP-WU8440 and CP-WU8450.
34
3.1 Projector Web Control - Projector Control (continued)
Item 'HVFULSWLRQ
PICTURE
BRIGHTNESS Adjusts the brightness setting.
CONTRAST Adjusts the contrast setting.
GAMMA Selects the gamma setting.
COLOR TEMP Selects the color temperature setting.
COLOR Adjusts the color setting.
TINT Adjusts the tint setting.
SHARPNESS Adjusts the sharpness setting.
$&7,9(,5,6 Selects the active iris setting.
0<0(025<6$9( Saves the MyMemory data.
MYMEMORY RECALL Recalls the MyMemory data.
IMAGE
ASPECT Selects the aspect setting.
29(56&$1 Adjusts the over scan setting.
9326,7,21 Adjusts the vertical position.
H POSITION Adjusts the horizontal position.
H PHASE Adjusts the horizontal phase.
H SIZE Adjusts the horizontal size.
$872$'-867
EXECUTE
Performs the automatic adjustment.
INPUT
352*5(66,9( Selects the progressive setting.
9,'(215 Selects the video noise reduction setting.
COLOR SPACE Selects the color space.
COMPONENT Selects the COMPONENT port setting.
9,'(2)250$7
69,'(2
Selects the s-video format setting.
9,'(2)250$7
9,'(2
Selects the video format setting.
+'0,)250$7
+'0,
Selects the HDMI
TM
format setting of the +'0, port.
+'0,)250$7
+'0,
Selects the HDMI
TM
format setting of the +'0, port.
+'0,5$1*(
+'0,
Selects the HDMI
TM
range setting of the +'0, port.
+'0,5$1*(
+'0,
Selects the HDMI
TM
range setting of the +'0, port.
(continued on next page)
3. Web Control
35
3.1 Projector Web Control - Projector Control (continued)
Item 'HVFULSWLRQ
INPUT (continued)
COMPUTER IN -
COMPUTER IN1
Selects the COMPUTER IN1 input signal type.
COMPUTER IN -
COMPUTER IN2
Selects the COMPUTER IN2 input signal type.
FRAME LOCK -
COMPUTER IN1
Turns the FRAME LOCK-COMPUTER IN1 function on/off.
FRAME LOCK -
COMPUTER IN2
Turns the FRAME LOCK-COMPUTER IN2 function on/off.
)5$0(/2&.+'0,
Turns the FRAME LOCK-HDMI 1 function on/off.
)5$0(/2&.+'0,
Turns the FRAME LOCK-HDMI 2 function on/off.
SETUP
AUTO KEYSTONE
EXECUTE
Performs the automatic keystone distortion setting.
.(<6721(9 Adjusts the vertical keystone distortion setting.
KEYSTONE H Adjusts the horizontal keystone distortion setting.
PERFECT FIT
Adjusts the shape of the projected image in each of the
corners and sides.
$872(&202'( Turns on/off the automatic eco mode function.
(&202'( Selects the eco mode.
INSTALLATION Selects the installation status.
67$1'%<02'( Selects the standby mode.
MONITOR OUT -
COMPUTER IN1
Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the COMPUTER IN1 input
port is selected.
MONITOR OUT -
COMPUTER IN2
Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the COMPUTER IN2 input
port is selected.
MONITOR OUT - LAN
Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the LAN input port is selected.
MONITOR OUT -
USB TYPE A
Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the USB TYPE A input
port is selected.
MONITOR OUT -
USB TYPE B
Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the USB TYPE B input
port is selected.
MONITOR OUT -
+'0,
Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the +'0, input port is
selected.
MONITOR OUT -
+'0,
Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the +'0, input port is
selected.
MONITOR OUT -
COMPONENT
Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the COMPONENT input
port is selected.
MONITOR OUT -
69,'(2
Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the 69,'(2 input port is
selected.
021,7252879,'(2
Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the 9,'(2 input port is selected.
MONITOR OUT -
67$1'%<
Assigns the MONITOR OUT in the standby mode.
(continued on next page)
3. Web Control
36
3.1 Projector Web Control - Projector Control (continued)
3. Web Control
Item 'HVFULSWLRQ
$8',2
92/80( Adjusts the volume setting.
SPEAKER Turns the built-in speaker on/off.
$8',26285&(
COMPUTER IN1
Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE - COMPUTER IN1 input port.
$8',26285&(
COMPUTER IN2
Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE - COMPUTER IN2 input port.
$8',26285&(/$1 Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE - LAN input port.
$8',26285&(86%
TYPE A
Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE - USB TYPE A input port.
$8',26285&(86%
TYPE B
Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE - USB TYPE B input port.
$8',26285&(
+'0,
Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE - +'0, input port.
$8',26285&(
+'0,
Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE - +'0, input port.
$8',26285&(
COMPONENT
Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE - COMPONENT input port.
$8',26285&(
69,'(2
Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE - 69,'(2 input port.
$8',26285&(
9,'(2
Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE - 9,'(2 input port.
$8',26285&(
$8',228767$1'%<
Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE in the standby mode.
+'0,$8',2
+'0,
Selects the HDMI
TM
audio setting of the +'0, port.
+'0,$8',2
+'0,
Selects the HDMI
TM
audio setting of the +'0, port.
SCREEN
LANGUAGE Selects the language for the OSD.
0(18326,7,219 Adjusts the vertical Menu position.
MENU POSITION H Adjusts the horizontal Menu position.
BLANK Selects the BLANK screen.
START UP Selects the start up screen mode.
MyScreen Lock Turns MyScreen lock function on/off.
MESSAGE Turns the message function on/off.
TEMPLATE Selects the template setting.
&&',63/$< Selects Closed Caption DISPLAY setting.
&&02'( Selects Closed Caption MODE setting.
C.C. - CHANNEL Selects Closed Caption CHANNEL setting.
(continued on next page)
37
Item 'HVFULSWLRQ
OPTION
SOURCE SKIP -
COMPUTER IN1
Selects the Source Skip - COMPUTER IN1 setting.
SOURCE SKIP -
COMPUTER IN2
Selects the Source Skip - COMPUTER IN2 setting.
SOURCE SKIP - LAN Selects the Source Skip - LAN setting.
SOURCE SKIP -
USB TYPE A
Selects the Source Skip - USB TYPE A setting.
SOURCE SKIP -
USB TYPE B
Selects the Source Skip - USB TYPE B setting.
SOURCE SKIP -
+'0,
Selects the Source Skip - HDMI 1 setting.
SOURCE SKIP -
+'0,
Selects the Source Skip - HDMI 2 setting.
SOURCE SKIP -
COMPONENT
Selects the Source Skip - COMPONENT setting.
SOURCE SKIP -
69,'(2
Selects the Source Skip - S-VIDEO setting.
SOURCE SKIP -
9,'(2
Selects the Source Skip - VIDEO setting.
AUTO SEARCH Turns the automatic signal search function on/off.
AUTO KEYSTONE
Turns the automatic keystone distortion correction function
on/off.
',5(&732:(521 Turns the direct power on function on/off.
AUTO POWER OFF
Congures the timer to shut off the projector when no signal
is detected.
6+$'(7,0(5 Selects the shade timer setting.
USB TYPE B Selects the USB TYPE B setting.
MY BUTTON-1
Assigns the functions for the MY BUTTON-1 button on the
included remote control.
MY BUTTON-2
Assigns the functions for the MY BUTTON-2 button on the
included remote control.
MY BUTTON-3
Assigns the functions for the MY BUTTON-3 button on the
included remote control.
MY BUTTON-4
Assigns the functions for the MY BUTTON-4 button on the
included remote control.
(continued on next page)
3.1 Projector Web Control - Projector Control (continued)
3. Web Control
38
This item is performed when the button is clicked
without showing another conrmation message.
Click the [Quit Presenter Mode].
Item 'HVFULSWLRQ
6(59,&(
Quit Presenter Mode Quit compulsorily from the Presenter mode.
3.1 Projector Web Control - Projector Control (continued)
3. Web Control
Item 'HVFULSWLRQ
OPTION (continued)
5(027(5(&(,9 -
FRONT
Turns the remote receiv. front function on/off.
5(027(5(&(,9
REAR
Turns the remote receiv. rear function on/off.
REMOTE FREQ. -
NORMAL
Turns the remote control signal frequency nomal function on/
off.
REMOTE FREQ. -
HIGH
Turns the remote control signal frequency high function on/
off.
5(027(,' Selects Remote ID setting.
39
3.1.11 Remote Control
The functions on the bundled remote control are
assigned to the Web Remote Control screen.
Do not attempt to control the projector with the
projector's remote control and via Web Remote
Control at the same time. It may cause some
operational errors in the projector.
Item 'HVFULSWLRQ
67$1'%< Assigned the same operation as 67$1'%< button.
ON Assigned the same operation as ON button.
COMPUTER IN1 Assigned the same operation as COMPUTER IN1 button.
COMPUTER IN2 Assigned the same operation as COMPUTER IN2 button.
LAN Assigned the same operation as LAN button.
USB TYPE A Assigned the same operation as USB TYPE A button.
USB TYPE B Assigned the same operation as USB TYPE B button.
COMPONENT Assigned the same operation as COMPONENT button.
69,'(2 Assigned the same operation as 69,'(2 button.
9,'(2 Assigned the same operation as 9,'(2 button.
+'0, Assigned the same operation as +'0, button.
+'0, Assigned the same operation as +'0, button.
FREEZE Assigned the same operation as FREEZE button.
$9087( Assigned the same operation as $9MUTE button.
▲ Assigned the same operation as ▲ button.
▼ Assigned the same operation as ▼ button.
◄ Assigned the same operation as ◄ button.
► Assigned the same operation as ► button.
ENTER Assigned the same operation as ENTER button.
MENU Assigned the same operation as MENU button.
RESET Assigned the same operation as RESET button.
PAGE UP Assigned the same operation as PAGE UP button.
3$*('2:1 Assigned the same operation as 3$*('2:1 button.
6/,'(6+2: Starts the Slideshow.
3. Web Control
3.1 Projector Web Control (continued)
(continued on next page)
40
3. Web Control
3.1 Projector Web Control - Remote Control (continued)
• The Web Remote Control does not support repeat function that
performs an action while holding a button clicked down.
• Since the repeat function is not available, click the button repeatedly as many
times as you require.
•
Even if you hold the button clicked down for a while, the Web Remote Control
sends your request command one time only. Release the button, then click it again.
•
When the >67$1'%<@ or [ON] button is pushed, a message window comes
up to conrm the operation. To control the power, push [OK], otherwise push
[Cancel].
• The >3$*('2:1@ and [PAGE UP] buttons on the Web Remote Control
cannot be used as mouse emulation function of the projector.
NOTE
41
3.1.12 Projector Status
Displays the settings and status of the projector.
Item 'HVFULSWLRQ
Error Status Displays the current error status
Lamp Time Displays the usage time for the current lamp.
Filter Time Displays the usage time for the current lter.
Filter Status
Displays the current cleanliness level of the air lter.
Power Status Displays the current power status.
Input Status Displays the current input signal source.
%ODQN2Q2II
Displays the current BLANK screen on/off status.
Mute Displays the current audio mute on/off status.
Freeze Displays the current Freeze status.
Shade Displays the current Shade status.
3.1.13 Network Restart
Restarts the projector’s network connection.
Item 'HVFULSWLRQ
Restart
Restarts the projector’s network connection in order to
activate new conguration settings.
• Restarting requires you to re-log on in order to further control or
congure the projector via a web browser. Wait 30 seconds or more after
clicking the [Restart] button to log on again.
NOTE
3. Web Control
3.1 Projector Web Control (continued)
42
3. Web Control
The Main window as shown above is
displayed at rst. However, if you have
enabled User Password on the Tools window
(
46), a dialog prompting you to enter
the password as shown on the right will be
displayed, and no operation is enabled until
you have entered the password. After entering
the preset password, the dialog disappears
and the Main window will be displayed.
As shown below, you can open a window by
clicking the corresponding tab at the top right
of the window.
• If Crestron e-Control in the Network Settings (21) is set to
Disable, Crestron e-Control
®
cannot be used to operate the projector. Enable
Crestron e-Control and close the web browser. Next, restart the web browser,
followed by entering the projector's IP address.
• Only English is supported on Crestron e-Control
®
.
• If the connection is terminated, the "Loading..." screen will appear. Check the
connection between the projector and the computer, then return or refresh the
Web page.
NOTE
3.2 Crestron e-Control
®
User Password dialog
Tab
Tab 'HVFULSWLRQ
Logout
Logs out from e-Control
®
.
This tab appears only when User Password of the Tools window is
enabled.
Tools Opens Tools window
(
45)
.
Info Opens Info window
(
47)
.
Contact IT Help Opens Help Desk window
(
48)
.
43
3. Web Control
3.2 Crestron e-Control
®
(continued)
3.2.1 Main window
You can operate the basic controls of the projector on this screen.
• If the projector is in the standby mode, only the [Power] button can
be operated.
NOTE
1 Click a button and operate as follows.
Button 'HVFULSWLRQ
Power Turns the power on/off.
9RO9RO Adjusts the volume setting.
Mute Turns the audio mute on/off.
2 Sources List
You can click a button to switch the input channel. The cursor will move
according to the currently selected input port.
Button 'HVFULSWLRQ
Computer in1 Selects input from COMPUTER IN1 port.
Computer in2 Selects input from COMPUTER IN2 port.
LAN Selects input from LAN port.
USB Type A Selects input from USB TYPE A ports.
USB Type B Selects input from USB TYPE B port.
+'0, Selects input from +'0, port.
+'0, Selects input from +'0, port.
Component Selects input from COMPONENT port.
69LGHR Selects input from 69,'(2 port.
9LGHR Selects input from 9,'(2 port.
1
4
2
3
44
3. Web Control
3.2 Crestron e-Control
®
- Main window (continued)
3 Click a button and operate as follows. To show the hidden buttons, click the ◄ /
► icons at the left and right ends.
Button 'HVFULSWLRQ
Freeze Turns Freeze on/off.
Contrast Adjusts the contrast setting.
Brightness Adjusts the brightness setting.
Color Adjusts the color setting.
Sharpness Adjusts the sharpness setting.
Magnify
Controls the magnication setting using the [+] / [-] buttons.
Use the [▲] [▼] [◄] [►] buttons to move to the area you want
to magnify.
Auto Performs the automatic adjustment.
Blank Turns the BLANK screen on/off.
4 Click the button and operate in the same way as the bundled remote control.
Button 'HVFULSWLRQ
Menu Assigned the same operation as MENU button.
Enter Assigned the same operation as ENTER button.
Reset Assigned the same operation as RESET button.
Ÿ Assigned the same operation as Ÿ button.
▼ Assigned the same operation as ▼ button.
◄ Assigned the same operation as ◄ button.
► Assigned the same operation as ► button.
45
3. Web Control
3.2 Crestron e-Control
®
(continued)
3.2.2 Tools window
Congures the settings between the projector and Crestron
®
control system.
Click the [Exit] button to return to the Main window.
1 Crestron Control
Congures the settings of Crestron
®
control system devices.
Item 'HVFULSWLRQ
IP Address Congures the IP address of the control system.
,3,' Congures the IP ID of the control system.
Port
Species the port number used for communication by the
control system.
To apply the settings, click the [Send] button.
2 Projector
Congures the network settings of the projector.
Item 'HVFULSWLRQ
Projector Name
Congures the name of the projector. The length of the
Projector Name can be up to 64 alphanumeric characters.
Location
Congures the location name of the projector. You can specify
a Location name up to 32 alphanumeric characters.
Assigned To:
Congures the user name for the projector. You can specify a
user name up to 32 alphanumeric characters.
The usable symbols are space and the following:
!"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>?@[\]^_`{|}~
To apply the settings, click the [Send] button.
1
4
5
3
2
• If two-byte characters are used, the input text or numbers cannot be
set correctly.
• All items on this window cannot be left blank.
NOTE
46
3. Web Control
3.2 Crestron e-Control
®
- Tools window (continued)
3 Projector (continued)
Congures the network settings of the projector.
Item 'HVFULSWLRQ
'+&3 Enables DHCP.
IP Address Congures the IP address when DHCP is disabled.
Subnet Mask Congures the subnet mask when DHCP is disabled.
'HIDXOW*DWHZD\ Congures the default gateway when DHCP is disabled.
'166HUYHU Congures the DNS server address.
To apply the settings, click the [Send] button.
4 User Password
Congures the User Password. To prompt the entry of User Password before
starting e-Control
®
, select the checkbox.
Item 'HVFULSWLRQ
New Password
Congures the password.
You can specify a password up to 26 alphanumeric characters.
The usable symbols are space and the following:
!"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>?@[\]^_`{|}~
&RQ¿UP
Reenter the above password for verication. If the password is
incorrect, an error message is displayed.
To apply the settings, click the [Send] button.
5 Admin Password
Congures the Admin Password. To prompt the entry of Admin Password before
displaying the Tools window, select the checkbox.
Item 'HVFULSWLRQ
New Password
Congures the password.
You can specify a password up to 26 alphanumeric characters.
The usable symbols are space and the following:
!"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>?@[\]^_`{|}~
&RQ¿UP
Reenter the above password for verication. If the password is
incorrect, an error message is displayed.
To apply the settings, click the [Send] button.
47
3. Web Control
3.2 Crestron e-Control
®
(continued)
3.2.3 Info window
Displays the settings and status of the projector.
Click the [Exit] button to return to the Main window.
1 Projector Information
Item 'HVFULSWLRQ
Projector Name Displays the projector name settings.
Location Displays the location name of the projector.
MAC Address Displays the wired LAN MAC address of the projector.
Resolution
Displays the resolution and vertical frequency of the signal
input selected on the projector.
Lamp Hours Displays the usage time for the current lamp.
Assigned To: Displays the user name for the projector.
2 Projector Status
Item 'HVFULSWLRQ
Power Status Displays the current power status.
Input Source Displays the current input signal source.
Picture Mode Displays the current picture mode setting.
Installation Displays the current installation setting.
Eco Mode Displays the current eco mode setting.
Error Status Displays the current error status.
1 2
• Projector Name, Location and the user name for Assigned To: may
appear truncated if they are too long.
NOTE
48
3. Web Control
3.2 Crestron e-Control
®
(continued)
3.2.4 Help Desk window
Sends/receives messages to/from the administrator for Crestron RoomView®
Express.
Button 'HVFULSWLRQ
Send Sends a message.
Check the received message.
49
3. Web Control
3.2 Crestron e-Control
®
(continued)
3.2.5 Emergency Alert
When the administrator for Crestron RoomView
®
Express sends out an alert
message, it will be displayed on the screen.
You can reply to the alert message via a chat format. Input a message in the box
below the alert message, and click the [Send] button.
• For details of Emergency Alert, refer to the manual of Crestron
RoomView
®
Express.
• The alert message from Crestron RoomView® is displayed on the screen of
the projector in a way similar to the real-time text of the Messenger function
(
51). If another real-time text is currently being displayed, it will be overwritten
by the alert message. However, if the priority of the real-time text is set to high,
it will not be overwritten by the alert message, and the latter will not appear on
the screen of the projector. For details, refer to the manual for the application of
the Messenger.
NOTE
50
4. My Image Function
The projector can display still images that are transferred via the network.
• It is possible to allocate the image le up to 4 in the maximum.
• Using MY BUTTON that registered MY IMAGE can display transferred image.
(
OPTION menu in the Operating Guide)
• The image le also can be displayed by using schedule function from the web
browser. Refer to item 7.3 Event Scheduling (
59) in detail.
• If you display MY IMAGE data on screen while you are using the USB Display
function, the application for the USB Display will be closed. To restart the
application, exit the MY IMAGE function, and then the software in the projector,
LiveViewerLiteUSB.exe, will run again. (
86%'LVSOD\ in the Operating
Guide)
• If data is transferred via wireless and wired LAN at the same time, the
projector may not be able to process the data correctly.
NOTE
MY IMAGE transmission requires an exclusive application for your computer.
Use the application to transfer the image data.
It can be downloaded from the Hitachi web site (http://www.hitachi-america.us/
digitalmedia or http://www.hitachidigitalmedia.com).
For information on the necessary settings and operations for the computer and
projector, refer to the manual for the application.
To display the transferred image, select the MY IMAGE item in the NETWORK
menu. For more information, please see the description of the MY IMAGE item of
the NETWORK menu. (
NETWORK menu in the Operating Guide)
4. My Image Function
Transfer image data
Display image data (ex.
)
1
43
2
51
5. Messenger Function
The projector can display text data transferred via the network on the screen and
play back audio data inside the projector.
The text data can be displayed on the screen in two ways that displays the text
transferred from the computer on real time, and the other chooses and displays
the text data from the ones once stored in the projector.
• It is possible to store the text data up to 12 in the maximum.
• Using MY BUTTON that registered MESSENGER can turn the displaying
messenger text on/off. (
OPTION menu in the Operating Guide)
• The text le also can be displayed by using schedule function via the web
browser. Refer to item 7.3 Event Scheduling (
59) for the detail.
• If data is transferred via wireless and wired LAN at the same time, the
projector may not be able to process the data correctly.
NOTE
Messenger function requires an exclusive application for your computer. To
edit, transfer and display the text data, use the application. You can download
it from the Hitachi web site (http://www.hitachi-america.us/digitalmedia or http://
www.hitachidigitalmedia.com). For information on the necessary settings and
operations for the computer and projector, refer to the manual for the application.
5. Messenger Function
Transfer text data
Display text data (ex.
)
1
4
3
2
12
52
6. Network Bridge Function
This projector is equipped with the NETWORK BRIDGE function to perform
mutual conversion of a network protocol and a serial interface.
By making use of the NETWORK BRIDGE function, a computer that is connected
to the projector via wireless or wired LAN is able to control an external device via
RS-232C communication using the projector as a network terminal.
6.1 Connecting devices
1) Connect the projector’s LAN port to the computer’s LAN port with a LAN
cable, or insert the USB wireless adapter into one of the USB TYPE A ports.
2) Connect the projector’s CONTROL port and the device’s RS-232C port with
an RS-232C cable, for RS-232C communication.
• Before connecting the devices, read the manuals for the devices
to ensure the connection.
For RS-232C connection, check the specications
of each port and use the suitable cable. (
Connection to the ports in the
Operating Guide - Technical)
NOTE
6. Network Bridge Function
RS-232C
RS-232C cable
CONTROL port
LAN port
External device
Wired LAN
LAN cable
Computer
Protocol change
TCP/IP data Serial data
USB TYPE A ports
(USB wireless adapter)
Wireless
LAN
53
6. Network Bridge Function
6.2 Communication setup
6.3 Communication port
1) In the COMMUNICATION TYPE menu, select NETWORK BRIDGE
(WIRELESS or WIRED depending on the type of connection you use) for the
CONTROL port.
2) Using the SERIAL SETTINGS menu, select the proper baud rate and parity
for the CONTROL port, according to the specication of the RS-232C port of
the connected device.
For the NETWORK BRIDGE function, send the data from the computer to the
projector with using the Network Bridge Port that is congured in the Port
Settings of web browser. (
23)
3) Using the TRANSMISSION METHOD menu, set up the proper method for the
CONTROL port according to your use.
• The OFF is selected for the COMMUNICATION TYPE as the default
setting.
• Using the COMMUNICATION menu, set up the communication. Remember
that an unsuitable setup could cause malfunction of communication.
• When either one of the NETWORK BRIDGE settings is selected in the
COMMUNICATION TYPE menu, RS-232C commands cannot be received from
the CONTROL port.
• Except for 41794, 9715, 9716, 9719, 9720, 5900, 5500, 4352
between 1024 and 65535 can be set up as the Network Bridge Port number.
It is set to 9717 as the default setting.
NOTE
NOTE
Item Condition
BAUD RATE 4800bps/9600bps/19200bps/38400bps
PARITY NONE/ODD/EVEN
Data length 8 bit (xed)
Start bit 1 bit (xed)
Stop bit 1 bit (xed)
To congure the setup of the communication using NETWORK BRIDGE for
the projector, use items in the COMMUNICATION menu. Open the menu of
the projector and select the OPTION - SERVICE - COMMUNICATION menu.
(
OPTION menu >6(59,&(> COMMUNICATION in the Operating Guide)
54
6.4 Transmission method
6.4.1 HALF-DUPLEX
The transmission method can be selected from the menus, only when the
NETWORK BRIDGE is selected for the COMMUNICATION TYPE.
(
OPTION menu >6(59,&(> COMMUNICATION in the Operating Guide)
HALF-DUPLEX FULL-DUPLEX
This method lets the projector make two way communication, but only one
direction, either transmitting or receiving data, is allowed at a time.
The method does not allow the projector to receive the data from the computer
while waiting for response data from an external device. After the projector
receives the response data from an external device or the response limit time is
past, the projector can receive the data from the computer.
That means that the projector controls transmitting and receiving the data to
synchronize the communication.
To use the HALF-DUPLEX method, set up the RESPONSE LIMIT TIME following
the instructions below.
Using the RESPONSE LIMIT TIME menu, set the waiting time for response data
from an external device. (
OPTION menu >6(59,&(> COMMUNICATION
in the Operating Guide)
OFF 1s 2s 3s ( OFF)
6. Network Bridge Function
RS-232C
RS-232C cable
External device
Wired LAN
LAN cable
Computer
Protocol change
TCP/IP data Serial data
Transmitting data
Discarding data
Transmitting data
Response limit
time
Transmitting data
Response data
Response data
Wireless LAN
55
• With using the HALF-DUPLEX method, the projector can send out
254 byte data as maximum at once.
• If it is not required to monitor the response data from an external device and
the RESPONSE LIMIT TIME is set to OFF, the projector can receive the data
from the computer and send it out to an external device continuously.
The OFF is selected as the default setting.
• In case that the computer controls to synchronize transmitting
and receiving the data, it may not be able to control an external device well
depending on the processing status of the projector.
NOTE
NOTE
6.4.2 FULL-DUPLEX
This method lets the projector make two way communication, transmitting and
receiving data at the same time, without monitoring response data from an
external device.
With using this method, the computer and an external device will send the data
out of synchronization. If it is required to synchronize them, set the computer to
make the synchronization.
6. Network Bridge Function
6.4 Transmission method (continued)
56
7. Other Functions
7.1 E-mail Alerts
The projector can automatically send an alert message to the specied e-mail
addresses when the projector detects a certain condition that is requiring
maintenance or detected an error.
• Up to ve e-mail addresses can be specied.
• The projector may be not able to send e-mail if the projector suddenly loses
power.
NOTE
Mail Settings (
24
)
To use the projector’s e-mail alert function, please congure the following items
through a web browser.
Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10:
1) Enter “KWWS” into the address bar of the web browser, and select
Projector Web Control from the selection window.
2) Enter your user name and password, and then click the [OK].
3) Click the [Mail Settings] and congure each item. Refer to item 3.1.5 Mail
Settings (
24) for further information.
4) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
• Click the [Send Test Mail] button in the [Mail Settings] to conrm
that the e-mail settings are correct. The following mail will be delivered to the
specied addresses.
NOTE
Subject line :Test Mail <Projector name>
Text :Send Test Mail
Date <Testing date>
Time <Testing time>
IP Address <Projector IP address>
MAC Address <Projector MAC address>
7. Other Functions
57
7.1 E-mail Alerts (continued)
7. Other Functions
5) Click the [Alert Settings] on the main menu to congure the E-mail Alerts
settings.
6) Select and congure each alert item. Refer to item 3.1.6 Alert Settings (
31)
for further information.
7) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
Failure/Warning e-mails are formatted as follows:
Subject line : <Mail title> <Projector name>
Text : <Mail text>
Date <Failure/Warning date>
Time <Failure/Warning time>
IP Address <Projector IP address>
MAC Address <Projector MAC address>
58
7.2 Projector Management using SNMP
The SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) enables to manage the
projector information, which is a failure or warning status, from the computer on
the network. The SNMP management software will be required on the computer
to use this function.
• It is recommended that SNMP functions be carried out by a network
administrator.
• SNMP management software must be installed on the computer to monitor
the projector via SNMP.
• To use the downloaded MIB le, specify the le by your SNMP
manager.
NOTE
NOTE
SNMP Settings (
23
)
Congure the following items via a web browser to use SNMP.
Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10:
1) Enter “KWWS” into the address bar of the web browser, and select
Projector Web Control from the selection window.
2) Enter your user name and password, and then click the [OK].
3) Click the [Port Settings] on the main menu.
4) Click the >'RZQORDG0,%¿OH@ to download a MIB le.
5) Click the [Enable] check box to open the SNMP Port. Set the IP address to
send the SNMP trap to when a Failure/Warning occurs.
6) Click the [Security Settings] on the main menu.
7) Click the [SNMP] and set the community name on the screen that is displayed.
8) Congure the settings for Trap transmission of Failures/Warnings. Click the
[Alert Settings] on the main menu and select the Failure/Warning item to be
congured.
9) Click the [Enable] check box to send out the SNMP trap for Failures/Warnings.
Clear the [Enable] check box when SNMP trap transmission is not required.
10) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
7. Other Functions
• A Network Restart is required after the Community name has been
changed. Click [Network Restart] on the main menu and click the [Restart]
button. Then congure the following items.
NOTE
• A Network Restart is required after the SNMP Port conguration
settings have been changed. Click [Network Restart] on the main menu and
click the [Restart] button. Then congure the following items.
NOTE
59
7.3 Event Scheduling
The scheduling function enables to setup scheduled events including power on /
power off. It enables to be “self-management” projector.
• You can schedule the following control events: Power, Input Source,
My Image, Messenger, Slideshow. (
28)
• The power on event has the lowest priority among the all events that are
dened at the same time.
• There are 3 types of Scheduling, 1) daily 2) weekly 3) specic date. (
27)
• The priority for scheduled events is as follows 1) specic date 2) weekly 3)
daily.
• Up to ve specic dates are available for scheduled events. Priority is given to
those with the lower numbers when more than one event has been scheduled
for the same date and time (e.g., ‘Specic date No. 1’ has priority over ‘Specic
date No. 2’ and so on.
• Be sure to set the date and time before enabling scheduled events. (
30)
Once you turn off the projector in the SAVING mode (
SETUP menu in the
Operating Guide) or the AC power, the current date and time setting is reset.
NOTE
7. Other Functions
60
• In standby mode, the POWER indicator will ash green for approx. 3
seconds when at least 1 “Power ON” schedule is saved.
• When the schedule function is used, the power cord must be connected to the
projector and the outlet. The schedule function does not work when the breaker
in a room is tripped. The power indicator will lights orange or green when the
projector is receiving AC power.
NOTE
Schedule Settings (
27
)
7.3 Event Scheduling(continued)
Schedule settings can be congured from a web browser.
Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10:
1) Enter “KWWS” into the address bar of the web browser, and select
Projector Web Control from the selection window.
2) Enter your user name and password, and then click the [OK].
3) Click the [Schedule Settings] on the main menu and select the required
schedule item. For example, if you want to perform the command every
Sunday, please select the [Sunday].
4) Click the [Enable] check box to enable scheduling.
5) Enter the date (month/day) for specic date scheduling.
6) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
7) After congure the time, command and parameters, click the [Register] to add
the new event.
8) Click the >'HOHWH@ button when you want to delete a schedule.
There are three types of scheduling.
1) Daily: Perform the specied operation at a specied time every day.
2) Sunday ~ Saturday: Perform the specied operation at the specied time on a
specied day of the week.
3) Specic date: Perform the specied operation on the specied date and time.
7. Other Functions
61
7.3 Event Scheduling(continued)
Date/Time Settings (
30
)
• The internal clock’s time may not remain accurate. Using SNTP is
recommended to maintain accurate time (31).
• Once you turn off the projector in the SAVING mode (
SETUP menu in the
Operating Guide) or the AC power, the current date and time setting is reset.
NOTE
The Date/Time setting can be adjusted via a web browser.
Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10:
1) Enter “KWWS” into the address bar of the web browser, and select
Projector Web Control from the selection window.
2) Enter your user name and password, and then click the [OK].
3) Click the >'DWH7LPH6HWWLQJV@ on the main menu and congure each item.
Refer to item 'DWH7LPH6HWWLQJV (
30) for further information.
4) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
7. Other Functions
62
7.4 Command Control via the Network
You can congure and control the projector via the network using RS-232C
commands.
Communication Port
The following two ports are assigned for the command control.
Command Control Settings (
22
)
4) Click the [Enable] check box to open Network Control Port1 (Port: 23) to use
TCP #23. Click the [Enable] check box for the [Authentication] setting when
authentication is required, otherwise clear the check box.
5) Click the [Enable] check box to open Network Control Port2 (Port: 9715) to
use TCP #9715. Click the [Enable] check box for the [Authentication] setting
when authentication is required, otherwise clear the check box.
6) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
Congure the following items from a web browser when command control is used.
Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10:
1) Enter “KWWS” into the address bar of the web browser, and select
Projector Web Control from the selection window.
2) Enter your user name and password, and then click the [OK].
3) Click the [Port Settings] on the main menu.
7. Other Functions
TCP #23 (Network Control Port1 (Port: 23))
TCP #9715 (Network Control Port2 (Port: 9715))
• Command control is available only via the specied port above.
NOTE
63
7.4 Command Control via the Network (continued)
When the authentication setting is enabled, the following settings are required.
(
32)
7) Click the [Security Settings] on the main menu.
8) Click the [Network Control] and enter the desired authentication password.
* See NOTE.
9) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
NOTE
7. Other Functions
• The Authentication Password will be the same for Network Control
Port1 (Port: 23), Network Control Port2 (Port: 9715), PJLink™ Port (Port:
4352), My Image Port (Port: 9716) and Messenger Port (Port: 9719).
• The new conguration settings are activated after restarting the network
connection. When the conguration settings are changed, you must restart
the network connection. You can restart the network connection from Network
Restart on the main menu (
41).
64
Command Format
Command formats differ among the different communication ports.
● TCP #23
You can use the RS-232C commands without any changes. The reply data
format is the same as the RS-232C commands. (
RS-232C Communication
in the Operating Guide - Technical)
However, the following reply will be sent back in the event of authentication
failure when authentication is enabled.
Header 'DWDOHQJWK RS-232Ccommand Check Sum
Connection
,'
0x02 0x0D 13 bytes 1 byte 1 byte
Reply Error code
0x1F 0x04 0x00
<Reply in the event of an authentication error>
Header → 0x02, Fixed
Data length → RS-232C commands byte length (0x0D, Fixed)
RS-232C command → RS-232C commands that start with 0xBE 0xEF
(13 bytes)
Check Sum → This is the value to make zero on the addition of the
lower 8 bits from the header to the checksum.
Connection ID → Random value from 0 to 255 (This value is attached
to the reply data)
● TCP #9715
6HQG'DWDIRUPDW
The following formatting is added to the header (0 x 02), Data length (0 x 0D),
Checksum (1 byte) and Connection ID (1 byte) of the RS-232C commands.
7. Other Functions
7.4 Command Control via the Network (continued)
65
Reply Data format
The connection ID (the data is same as the connection ID data on the sending
data format) is attached to the RS-232C commands reply data.
<ACK reply>
Reply
Connection
,'
0x06 1 byte
<NAK reply>
Reply
Connection
,'
0x15 1 byte
<Error reply>
Reply Error code
Connection
,'
0x1C 2 bytes 1 byte
<Data reply>
<Projector busy reply>
<Authentication error reply>
Reply 'DWD
Connection
,'
0x1D 2 bytes 1 byte
Reply Status code
Connection
,'
0x1F 2 bytes 1 byte
Reply
Authentication
Error code
Connection
,'
0x1F 0x04 0x00 1 byte
7. Other Functions
7.4 Command Control via the Network (continued)
66
Automatic Connection Break
The TCP connection will be automatically disconnected after there is no
communication for 30 seconds after being established.
The projector does not accept commands without authentication success
when authentication is enabled. The projector uses a challenge response type
authentication with an MD5 (Message Digest 5) algorithm.
When the projector is using a LAN, a random 8 bytes will be returned if
authentication is enabled. Bind this received 8 bytes and the Authentication
Password and digest this data with the MD5 algorithm and add this in front of the
commands to send.
Following is a sample if the Authentication Password is set to “password” and the
random 8 bytes are “a572f60c”.
Authentication
1) Connect the projector.
2) Receive the random 8 bytes “a572f60c” from the projector.
3) Bind the random 8 bytes “a572f60c” and the Authentication Password
“password” and it becomes “a572f60cpassword”.
4) Digest this bind “a572f60cpassword” with MD5 algorithm.
It will be “e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde”.
5) Add this “e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde” in front of the commands
and send the data.
Send “e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde”+command.
6) When the sending data is correct, the command will be performed and the
reply data will be returned. Otherwise, an authentication error will be returned.
• As for the transmission of the second or subsequent commands, the
authentication data can be omitted when the same connection.
NOTE
7. Other Functions
7.4 Command Control via the Network (continued)
67
7. Other Functions
7.5 Crestron RoomView
®
Crestron RoomView
®
is a multi-user resource management program provided
by Crestron Electronics, Inc. It is an application for managing and controlling the
projector and other AV devices collectively.
For details of Crestron RoomView®, refer to the Crestron® website.
URL: http://www.crestron.com (as of Feb. 2012)
The following communication interfaces can be used to manage the entire facility.
1) Crestron RoomView
®
Express / Crestron RoomView
®
Server Edition
RoomView
TM
Express and RoomView
TM
Server Edition are software provided
by Crestron Electronics, Inc. They are used for managing all the AV devices,
and are also able to communicate with the help desk as well as send out alert
messages.
For details of the software, refer to the following website.
URL: http://www.crestron.com/getroomview (as of Feb. 2012)
2) Crestron e-Control
®
Crestron e-Control
®
is a system controller that can be operated via a web
browser (
42
).
68
8. Troubleshooting
8. Troubleshooting
Problem Likely Cause Things to Check
Reference
Page
Number
Can't communicate
Weak radio signal
• Bring the computer and
projector closer together.
• Radio waves won’t go
through concrete and metal
(steel doors, etc.)
–
Cannot communicate due
to congure wireless /
encryption settings.
If there is a wireless
conguration utility loaded
on your computer, check its
settings.
Please refer the manual of
your conguration utility.
–
The computer and/or
projector's network settings
are not congured correctly.
Check the network
configurations of the
computer and projector.
–
The same network address
is set for both wireless and
wired LAN.
Change the network address
setting for wireless or wired
LAN.
20,
21
<Only for wireless LAN>
The USB wireless adapter
is not inserted into the
projector.
Insert the optional USB
wireless adapter.
–
<Only for wireless LAN>
There is closely another
projector or other that has
the same wireless setting.
Try changing of SSID and IP
Address.
20
Others
- Information from
the projector
to computer is
not correct or
completed
- The projector does
not respond
Communication between the
projector and computer is not
working well.
NETWORK Functions of the
projector is not working well.
Try “NETWORK RESTART”
in SERVICE menu under the
NETWORK menu.
In the
Operating
Guide
69
Item Specifications
Control software Dedicated computer application and Web browser
Corresponding
protocol
TCP/IP, DHCP client and HTTP server
Network
Wireless LAN (IEEE802.11b/g/n)
(Ad-Hoc and Infrastructure modes)
Wired LAN(100Base-TX/10Base-T)
Security
WEP (64/128bit), WPA-PSK (TKIP/AES),
WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES), SSID
Computer
application's system
requirements
OS: Windows
®
XP Home
Windows
®
XP Professional
Windows Vista
®
Home Basic
Windows Vista
®
Home Premium
Windows Vista
®
Business
Windows Vista
®
Ultimate
Windows Vista
®
Enterprise
Windows
®
7 Starter
Windows
®
7 Home Basic
Windows
®
7 Home Premium
Windows
®
7 Professional
Windows
®
7 Ultimate
Windows
®
7 Enterprise
CPU: Pentium 4 (2.8 GHz or higher)
Graphic card: 16 bit, XGA or higher
Memory: 512 MB or higher
Hard disk space: 100 MB or higher
Web browser: Internet Explorer
®
6.0 or higher
CD-ROM/DVD-ROM drive
USB wireless adapter Gemtek USB-Link11n
9. Specifications
9. Specications
70
10. Warranty and after-sales service
10. Warranty and after-sales service
If a problem occurs with the equipment, please read 8. Troubleshooting (68)
section rst and review all suggested check points. After that, please contact your
dealer or service company, if you still have the problem. They will tell you what
warranty condition is applied.
1
Projector
CP-X8150/CP-X8160/CP-WX8240
CP-WX8255/CP-SX8350/CP-WU8440
CP-WU8450
User's Manual (detailed)
Instant Stack Guide
Thank you for purchasing this product.
WARNING ►Before using this product, be sure to read all manuals for this
product. After reading them, store them in a safe place for future reference.
►Follow all the instructions in the manuals or on the product. The manufacturer
assumes no responsibility for any damage caused by mishandling that is beyond
normal usage dened in the manuals.
NOTE • The information in this manual is subject to change without notice.
• The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in
this manual.
• The reproduction, transfer or copy of all or any part of this document is not
permitted without express written consent.
Trademark acknowledgment
All the trademarks in this manual are the properties of their respective owners.
Various symbols are used in this manual. The meanings of these symbols are
described below.
About this manual
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTICE
This symbol indicates information that, if ignored, could possibly
result in personal injury or even death due to incorrect handling.
This symbol indicates information that, if ignored, could possibly result
in personal injury or physical damage due to incorrect handling.
This entry notices of fear of causing trouble.
Please refer to the pages written following this symbol.
Features
This projector can be used with another projector of the same model to project an
image on the same screen using the Instant Stack feature.
The two projectors can be operated simultaneously to make the image brighter.
Moreover, if you connect two projectors with RS-232C cross-over cable, it turns to
a kind of intellectual stacking system. The two projectors can work alternately by
themselves, and once one projector has an accident the other voluntarily starts to
work to keep your presentation going.
These features, generically called Instant Stack, provide you with the broad use.
2

,QWURGXFWLRQ
1.1 Basic information
and preparations ............................. 3
Instant Stack ........................................ 3
Intellectual Stack and Simple Stack ..... 3
Remote control for Intellectual Stack
and Simple Stack ............................. 3
,QVWDOODWLRQ
2.1 Preparing for Intellectual Stack..... 5
2.2 Installing
the rst projector (Set A) ................ 6
Deciding installation position ...............6
Setting up Set A ................................... 6
2.3 Installing
the second projector (Set B) .......... 8
Deciding installation position ...............8
Connecting projectors .......................... 8
Setting up Set B ................................... 8
2.4 Conrming Main
and Sub settings ............................ 10
2.5 Fine adjusting
image position ............................... 11
For Intellectual Stack users ............... 11
For Simple Stack users ...................... 12
67$&.PHQXVHWWLQJV
3.1 Displaying STACK menu ............ 13
3.2 Selecting Main, Sub or off .......... 14
3.3 Selecting lamp operation mode .. 15
3.4 Selecting lamp switching mode .. 17
3.5 Selecting input source for Sub.... 18
3.6 Exiting Intellectual
Stack menu ................................... 19
STACK menu ..................................... 19
Dialog from STACK menu .................. 19
3.7 Important information
for Intellectual Stack ...................... 20
&RQQHFWLQJFDEOHV
4.1 Connecting an RS-232C cable ... 23
4.2 Connecting signal cables............ 24
Inputting image from Main to Sub ...... 24
Inputting image
to Sub and Main individually ........... 24
6HWWLQJLQSXWSRUWV
XVLQJPHQX
5.1 Preparing for menu operations ... 25
5.2 Checking Main projector's
operating status ............................. 25
5.3 Starting up Main projector .......... 26
5.4 Setting the menu ........................ 27
Inputting image from Main to Sub
- Computer signal ........................... 27
Inputting image from Main to Sub
- Video signal
(either component or video) ...........28
Inputting image to
Sub and Main individually ............... 28
5HVWULFWLRQV
RQ6FKHGXOHIXQFWLRQ
7URXEOHVKRRWLQJ
Contents
3
(continued on next page)
1. Introduction
1.1 Basic information and preparations
Instant Stack
Instant Stack is a feature that allows you to superimpose images projected from
two projectors easily.
Intellectual Stack and Simple Stack
Instant Stack includes the following two features.
When two projectors are connected via an RS-232C cable with necessary set-
tings performed on the projectors, these two projectors will automatically operate
in synchronization with each other according to the settings. This is known as
Intellectual Stack in this manual.
The two projectors operate individually without the RS-232C connection. This is
known as Simple Stack in this manual.
Remote control for Intellectual Stack and Simple Stack
For Intellectual Stack, one projector is set as Main and the other is set as Sub.
Only the Main projector is capable of receiving the remote control signals.
Operate
the projectors from the control panel of the Main projector or with the remote control
pointing at the Main projector. For details on operating by remote control and from the
control panel, refer to
3.7 Important Information for Intellectual Stack.
For Simple Stack, both projectors can receive the remote control signals. To avoid
incorrect operations with the remote control, it is recommended to operate both
projectors with the control panel or a wired remote control, or one projector with
the remote control and the other with the control panel or a wired remote control.
In this case, disable the remote control receiving on the other projector with the
KEY LOCK feature.
(Operating Guide → OPTION menu)
CAUTION ► Place the projector in a cool place with sufcient ventilation.
Keep a space of 30 cm or more between a side of the projector and other
objects such as a wall
. Keep a space of 100 cm or more between the two
projectors, especially if you are installing the projectors side by side. Take care
not to let the hot exhaust air from other projectors enter the intake vents of the
projector.
WARNING ► Do not place projectors directly on top of other projectors.
4
Introduction
1.1 Basic information and preparations (continued)
NOTICE ► Intellectual Stack can be operated only in pairs of the same model
projectors.
► A maximum of two projectors can be used as Intellectual Stack.
► Depending on the installation and surrounding environment, images
projected from the two projectors may not superimpose well enough. The
images cannot superimpose well enough especially when the screen is slanted,
deformed or the surface is uneven.
• Images projected immediately after turning on the projectors are unstable due
to rising internal temperature. Wait for more than 20 minutes before starting
to adjust the superimposed images.
• The image positions may shift due to temperature change, vibration, or shock
caused by hitting the projector. Install the projectors in a stable environment
when using Instant Stack. If the image positions are shifted, readjust the
images. (
6, 8, 11
)
• The image positions may shift over time due to the tension and the weight of
the connecting cables. Make sure not to impose any load on the projectors
when arranging the cables.
• If the volume level of the built-in speakers is too high, noise may occur and
the image quality may deteriorate. In this case, check the volume setting on
both projectors.
• When two projectors are connected using the RS-232C cable, the Main
projector will be able to control the Sub projector. This feature is known as
Intellectual Stack. (
8
) When Intellectual Stack by means of RS-232C
feature is used, RS-232C communication cannot be used to control the
projector.
If you wish to control the projectors from a computer, use the LAN
connection that is connected to any of the projectors.
• When Intellectual Stack is used, the operations or settings of some functions
are restricted. Refer to this manual for details. (
30
)
5
For safety reasons, read 1.1 Basic information and preparations (
3, 4
) carefully
before installation. In addition, take note of the followings for proper use of Instant
Stack.
● When using Intellectual Stack, both projectors will respond to the remote control
signals until STACK MODE on either projector is set to SUB.
If you control one projector with the remote control during installation, it is
recommended to operate the other with the control panel or a wired remote
control. In this case, disable the remote control receiving on the other projector
with the KEY LOCK feature. (
Operating Guide → OPTION menu)
● Images from Set A and Set B may superimpose well but the image positions
can shift over time.
Readjust to superimpose the images.
2.1 Preparing for Intellectual Stack
When using Intellectual Stack via RS-232C connection, ensure the following set-
tings are set on the two projectors. Otherwise, the Intellectual Stack menu cannot
be operated.
● STANDBY MODE in SETUP menu: NORMAL
(
Operating Guide → SETUP menu)
● COMMUNICATION TYPE under COMMUNICATION in SERVICE menu: OFF
(
Operating Guide → OPTION menu)
● STACK LOCK in SECURITY menu: OFF
When STACK LOCK is set to on, menus related to Instant Stack cannot be
operated. It is therefore necessary to set it to off during installation and menu
setting.
(1) Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to go into the following menu.
ADVANCED MENU > SECURITY
> STACK LOCK
STACK LOCK dialog will appear on screen. (
Operating
Guide
→ SECURITY menu)
(2) Use the ▲/▼ buttons to highlight OFF, and press the ► button to complete
the setting.
2. Installation
6
Installation
NOTE
• Set the tilt angle of Set A to within 9 degrees from the level line.
(continued on next page)
Deciding installation position
Decide the position of Set A and its projection angle. (User’s Manual (concise)
→
Arrangement and Adjusting the projector’s elevator)
2.2 Installing the first projector (Set A)
Setting up Set A
2. Perform the INSTALLATION setting rst if necessary as it may change the
image position. (Operating Guide → SETUP menu )
3. Adjust the image of Set A to t the screen with the ZOOM, FOCUS and LENS
SHIFT features. (Operating Guide → Adjusting the lens)
Adjust the image position using KEYSTONE and PERFECT FIT if necessary.
(
Operating Guide → EASY MENU or SETUP menu)
NOTE • KEYSTONE cannot be operated when PERFECT FIT is in use.
To adjust the image using both KEYSTONE and PERFECT FIT, adjust
KEYSTONE rst.
• If you are using Simple Stack, go to
2.3 Installation of the second projector
(Set B). (
8
)
1. Turn on Set A.
WARNING ►
Only for &3;, &3:; and &3:8, it is possible
to install the projector for any direction with specied mounting accessories.
Consult with your dealer about such a special installation.
7
Installation
4. Display the menu with the 0(18 button. (Operating Guide → Using the
menu function)
5. Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to go into the following menu.
ADVANCED MENU > OPTION
> SERVICE > COMMUNICATION
> STACK
STACK menu will appear on screen.
(
Operating Guide → OPTION menu)
NOTE • Set A will not be operated by the remote control hereafter. To
avoid crosstalk when operating with the remote control, it is recommended to
disable the remote control receiving using KEY LOCK.
• After the STACK MODE setting is completed, Set A (Sub) will not be able
to receive the remote control signals. When STACK MODE is set to OFF,
enable the remote control receiving using KEY LOCK if necessary.
8. If you are using Intellectual Stack, disable the remote control receiving using
KEY LOCK. (
Operating Guide → OPTION menu)
7. After pressing the ► button, a dialog to
conrm whether or not to save the setting is
displayed.
Press the ► button to complete the setting. (
19
)
6. Use the ▲/▼ buttons to highlight STACK
MODE, and press the ► button to display
the STACK MODE dialog.
Highlight SUB pressing the ▲/▼ buttons,
and press the ► button.
2.2 Installing the rst projector (Set A) - Setting up Set A (continued)
8
Installation
2.3 Installing the second projector (Set B)
Connecting projectors
To use Intellectual Stack, connect an RS-232C cross cable between the
&21752/ port of Set A and Set B.
(continued on next page)
NOTE • KEYSTONE cannot be operated when PERFECT FIT is in use. To
reset both functions, reset PERFECT FIT rst.
• Perform the INSTALLATION setting rst if necessary as it may change the
image position. (
Operating Guide → SETUP menu)
2. Reset the adjustment of KEYSTONE and PERFECT FIT on Set B.
(Operating Guide → EASY MENU or SETUP menu)
1. Turn on Set B.
NOTE • After turning on Set B, make sure the image of Set B is not
signicantly tilted compared to the image of Set A. If the image is overly
tilted, rotate the elevator feet of Set B to adjust the angle such that the tilt is
just about right.
Setting up Set B
NOTE • Set the tilt angle of Set B to within 9 degrees from the level line.
Deciding installation position
Decide the position of Set B and its projection angle. (User’s Manual (concise)
→
Arrangement and Adjusting the projector’s elevator)
WARNING ►
Only for &3;, &3:; and &3:8, it is possible
to install the projector for any direction with specied mounting accessories.
Consult with your dealer about such a special installation.
9
Installation
8. After pressing the ► button, a dialog to
conrm whether or not to save the setting is
displayed.
Press the ► button to complete the setting.
(
19
)
6. Use the ▲/▼ buttons to highlight STACK
MODE, and press the ► button to display the
STACK MODE dialog.
Highlight MAIN with the ▲/▼ buttons, and
press the ◄ button to return to the previous menu.
7. Use the ▲/▼ buttons to highlight LAMP
MODE, and press the ► button to display
the LAMP MODE dialog.
Highlight DUAL with the ▲/▼ buttons, and press the ► button.
2.3 Installing the second projector (Set B) - Setting up Set B (continued)
4. Display the menu with the 0(18 button. (Operating Guide → Using the
menu function
)
5. Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to go into the following menu.
ADVANCED MENU > OPTION
> SERVICE > COMMUNICATION
> STACK
STACK menu will appear on screen.
(
Operating Guide → OPTION menu)
3. Adjust the image size and position of Set B with the ZOOM, FOCUS and
LENS SHIFT features such that the image can be superimposed well to the
image of Set A.
(Operating Guide → Adjusting the lens)
NOTE • Fine adjustment of the image size and position thereafter with
functions such as KEYSTONE and PERFECT FIT does not increase the
image size. It is therefore important to have the image of Set B completely
overlapping the image of Set A.
•
When controlling Set B with the remote control, Set A may also respond to the
remote control. It is recommended to control Set B with the control panel on Set B.
• If you are using Simple Stack, go to For Simple Stack users. (
12
)
10
Installation
2.4 Confirming Main and Sub settings
NOTE • When Intellectual Stack is in use, only Main is capable of receiving
the remote control signals, Sub will not respond to the remote control signals.
2. The following dialogs appear on the lower right screen.
0DLQ6HWB
6XE6HWA
3. If you press the ► button, the dialog closes and the Main (Set B) menu will
appear when MAIN is highlighted.
If you press the ◄ button, the dialog closes and the menu will disappear.
NOTE • If these dialogs are not displayed on screen, check the RS-232C
connection (
8
) and the MAIN or SUB setting in the STACK MODE dialog.
(
14
)
1. Press the 0(18 button on the remote control for Main (Set B).
11
Installation
2.5 Fine adjusting image position
To superimpose the images of Main (Set B) and Sub (Set A), ne adjust the im-
age size and position of Main (Set B) using PERFECT FIT.
3. Using PERFECT FIT on Main (Set B), adjust the im-
age size and position of Main (Set B) to superimpose
well to the image of Sub (Set A). (Operating Guide
→
EASY MENU or SETUP menu)
It is recommended to adjust in the following ways.
(1) Roughly adjust the four corners in the order below.
Top left → Top right
→ Bottom right → Bottom left
(2) Fine adjust the four corners in the same way.
NOTE • Refer to NOTES for all users. (
12
)
For Intellectual Stack users
1. Press the 0(18 button on the remote control or the
control panel on Main (Set B) to display the MENU
dialog.
Highlight MAIN with the ▲/▼ buttons, and press the
► button.
Menu on Main (Set B) will appear.
2. Using the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons on the remote control or
the control panel on Main (Set B), select PERFECT
FIT from EASY MENU, or the SETUP menu of AD-
VANCED MENU. (
Operating Guide → EASY MENU
or
SETUP menu)
The image for Intellectual Stack appears on screen.
This image includes a TEMPLATE screen with the
PERFECT FIT dialog from Main (Set B) and another
TEMPLATE screen from Sub (Set A).
0DLQ6HWB
,PDJHIURP6XE6HWA
&3;&3;
&3:;&3:;!
,PDJHIURP0DLQ6HWB
&36;&3:8
&3:8!
&3;&3;
&3:;&3:;!
6XSHULPSRVHGLPDJH
&36;&3:8
&3:8!
6XSHULPSRVHGLPDJH
12
Installation
NOTES for all users
• For details on PERFECT FIT, refer to PERFECT FIT
of EASY MENU or SETUP menu in the Operating Guide.
• It is strongly recommended to use a at screen. If a curved or skewed screen
is used, it is very difcult to align the two images even if you use the pin/barrel
adjustment of PERFECT FIT.
• Even through ne adjustment of the images from the two projectors, it may
not be possible to superimpose the images well enough depending on the input
signals. In this case, try the following methods.
- Press the $872 button on the remote control or execute AUTO ADJUST
EXECUTE (
Operating Guide → IMAGE menu) on each of the projectors.
- Adjust H POSITION and V POSITION
(
Operating Guide → IMAGE menu)
on each of the projectors.
- Check the RESOLUTION setting in the INPUT menu, and change to the
same setting if the setting differs between Main and Sub. (
Operating Guide
→ INPUT menu)
5. Using PERFECT FIT on Set B, adjust the image size
and position of Set B to superimpose well to the
image of Set A. It is recommended to adjust in the
following ways.
(1) Roughly adjust the four corners in the order below.
Top left → Top right → Bottom right → Bottom left
(2) Fine adjust the four corners in the same way.
For Simple Stack users
1. Press the 0(18 button on the remote control to display the menu on Set A.
2. Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to open the TEMPLATE
dialog, then select STACK on the dialog.
(
Operating Guide → SCREEN menu)
3. Press the 0(18 button on the control panel of Set B
to display the menu.
4. Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to select PERFECT
FIT from EASY MENU, or the SETUP menu of
ADVANCED MENU. (
Operating Guide → EASY
MENU or SETUP menu)
PERFECT FIT dialog appears on screen.
Select the test pattern icon
shown in the lower
left of the dialog with the ◄/▼ buttons. When you
press the (17(5 or ,1387 button, the test pattern
appears or disappears.
67$&.RI7(03/$7(
&3;&3;
&3:;&3:;!
3(5)(&7),7GLDORJ
RQ67$&.RI7(03/$7(
&36;&3:8
&3:8!
13
3.1 Displaying STACK menu
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to go into the following menu.
ADVANCED MENU > OPTION
> SERVICE > COMMUNICATION > STACK
STACK menu will appear on screen.
(
Operating Guide → OPTION menu) The
setting for Intellectual Stack operation starts from this menu.
Set the Intellectual Stack operation using the STACK menu.
NOTE • If you are using Simple Stack without RS-232C connection, skip this
chapter.
• If you do not need to change the settings made during the installation
explained prior to this chapter, go to
3.3 Selecting lamp operation mode. (
15
)
• Read
3.7 Important information for Intellectual Stack carefully. (
20
)
NOTE • Check that the following settings are made on both projectors.
Otherwise, STACK menu on the projectors cannot be operated. (
5
)
- STANDBY MODE in SETUP menu: NORMAL
(
Operating Guide → SETUP menu)
- COMMUNICATION TYPE under COMMUNICATION in SERVICE menu: OFF
(
Operating Guide → OPTION menu)
- STACK LOCK in SECURITY menu: OFF (
5
)
3. STACK menu settings
14
STACK menu settings
NOTE
• After setting Main or Sub, the setting
information can be checked on Projector Web
Control. (
Network Guide → Projector Web
Control
)
Select Projector Status in the main menu of
Projector Web Control. The Stack Mode item
shows whether your projector is set to MAIN
or SUB even if STACK MODE is set to OFF.
3. Press the ◄ button to return to the previous menu, or press the ► button to
complete the setting. (
19
)
3.2 Selecting Main, Sub or off
To enable Intellectual Stack, select either MAIN or SUB. Intellectual Stack starts
when one projector is set to MAIN and the other is set to SUB in the STACK
MODE dialog. To disable Intellectual Stack, select OFF.
1. Highlight STACK MODE in the STACK menu with
the ▲/▼ buttons, then press the ► button to
display the STACK MODE dialog.
2. Use the ▲/▼ buttons in the dialog to highlight MAIN, SUB or OFF.
2)): Disables Intellectual Stack.
0$,1: Sets the projector to Main that functions as a control tower.
68%: Sets the projector to Sub that functions as a follower.
15
STACK menu settings
3. Press the ◄ button to return to the previous menu, or press the ► button to
complete the setting. (
19
)
NOTE • If DUAL is selected, a menu to select MAIN or SUB appears on
screen when a button on the control panel of the projector or remote control is
pressed. Select the projector that you want to operate. Refer to the examples
below.
- When the 0(18 button is pressed, a menu to select MAIN or SUB is
displayed. If MAIN is selected, EASY MENU or ADVANCED MENU of the
Main projector is displayed.
- When one of the buttons from .(<6721(, )2&86, =220, =220
and /(166+,)7 is pressed, a menu to select MAIN or SUB is displayed. If
MAIN is selected, each menu or dialog of the Main projector is displayed.
- <Only for &3;, &3:; and &3:8>
When the (17(5 button is pressed for three seconds, a menu to select
MAIN or SUB is displayed. If MAIN is selected, the Status Monitor on the
Main Projector can be operated.
• When DUAL is selected for
LAMP MODE, there are operating
restrictions as follows.
- AUTO POWER OFF and
FREEZE functions on both
projectors are disabled.
- The test patterns for CUSTOM of
GAMMA and COLOR TEMP are
not displayed.
- It takes slightly longer time to turn
on the projectors. This is not a
malfunction.
• There are cases in which the screen
will be darker when any of the OSDs are
displayed if DUAL is selected.
B
0HQXWRVHOHFW
0$,1RU68%
0HQXRQ0DLQSURMHFWRU
B
0HQXWRVHOHFW
0$,1RU68%
0HQXRQ0DLQSURMHFWRU
(continued on next page)
3.3 Selecting lamp operation mode
Select the DUAL or ALTERNATE lamp operation mode.
1. Highlight LAMP MODE in the STACK menu with
the ▲/▼ buttons, then press the ► button to
display the LAMP MODE dialog.
2. Use the ▲/▼ buttons in the dialog to highlight DUAL or ALTERNATE.
'8$/: Turns on the projectors at the same time.
$/7(51$7(: Turns on the projectors alternately.
16
STACK menu settings
NOTE • When DUAL is selected for LAMP MODE, the images projected
from the Main and Sub projectors may be different. It is recommended to set
the projectors as follows.
- Set the same image for TEMPLATE and START UP on the Main and Sub
projectors.
- Capture the same image for MyScreen on the Main and Sub projectors.
- Save the same image on MY IMAGE on the Main and Sub projectors.
- Set the same message content for the Messenger function (
Network Guide
→ Messenger Function) on the Main and Sub projectors.
• When DUAL is selected for LAMP MODE, image shift can result in image
quality degradation on the screen. Perform the INSTALLATION setting before
adjusting the image position as the image position will change when the
INSTALLATION setting is changed. (
Operating Guide → SETUP menu)
• When ALTERNATE is selected and an error occur on the projector in
operation causing the lamp to turn off, the other projector will automatically start
to operate. However, if the RS-232C cable is disconnected or AC power is not
supplied, the other projector will not turn on.
• In cases when PIN LOCK or TRANSITION DETECTOR on both projectors
is set to ON (
Operating Guide → SECURITY menu), the two projectors will
not turn on even if ALTERNATE is selected. Enter the security code on both
projectors and one of the projectors will turn on.
• When Intellectual Stack is in use, the 32:(5 indicator on the projector
operates differently from normal.
(
Operating Guide → Troubleshooting)
When both the Main and Sub projectors are in standby mode, the Main
projector determines which projector to turn on according to the STACK MODE
setting if the 21 button on the remote control or 67$1'%<21 button of the
Main projector is pressed.
- The 32:(5 indicator on the Main projector blinks in green while the Main
projector determines which projector to turn on.
- If the Main projector is turned on, the 32:(5 indicator on the Main projector
turns to steady green after lighting up, as per normal.
- If the Sub projector is turned on, the 32:(5 indicator on the Main projector
lights in orange after the Sub projector is turned on.
- If an error occurs on the Main projector, the Sub projector turns on and the
32:(5 indicator on the Main projector lights or blinks in red.
3.3 Selecting lamp operation mode (continued)
17
STACK menu settings
3. Press the ◄ button to return to the previous menu, or press the ► button to
complete the setting. (
19
)
NOTE • The ALTERNATE MODE dialog can be operated on the Main
projector when ALTERNATE is selected in the LAMP MODE dialog.
• To maintain the quality and reliability of the two projectors, the projector with
the most lamp usage may be turned on even if AUTO is selected.
3.4 Selecting lamp switching mode
The following setting is necessary only when ALTERNATE is selected in the
LAMP MODE dialog. (
15
) Select the AUTO or NORMAL lamp switching mode
when using ALTERNATE.
1. Highlight ALTERNATE MODE in the STACK
menu with the ▲/▼ buttons, then press the ►
button to display the ALTERNATE MODE dialog.
2. Use the ▲/▼ buttons in the dialog to highlight AUTO or NORMAL.
$872: Turns on the projector with the least lamp usage.
1250$/: Turns on the projector that was not used the previous time.
18
STACK menu settings
3. Press the ◄ button to return to the previous menu, or press the ► button to
complete the setting. (
19
)
NOTE • <Only for &3:8 and &3:8> When the projectors are in
the PbyP mode, the SUB INPUT SOURCE is xed at FOLLOW MAIN UNIT.
• If FIXED (COMPUTER IN 1) is selected, either the &20387(5,1 or ,1
port can be selected as an input source on the Main projector.
When any
button to select an input port on the remote control or the ,1387 button on the
projector is pressed, the MAIN INPUT SOURCE dialog will be displayed on
screen.
Select COMPUTER IN 1 or COMPUTER IN 2 with the ▲/▼ buttons.
• If FIXED (COMPUTER IN 1) is selected, the &20387(5,1 port on the
Sub projector should be connected to the 021,725287 port on the Main
projector with a computer cable. The image from the selected port is output
from the 021,725287 port on the Main projector to the &20387(5,1
port on the Sub projector. The MONITOR OUT setting on the Main projector is
disabled when FIXED (COMPUTER IN 1) is selected. (
Operating Guide →
SETUP menu)
• If FIXED (COMPUTER IN 1) is selected, video signals can be input to the
&20387(5,1 or ,1 port on the Main projector. Set the port for video
signal input in the COMPUTER IN menu and set the video format in the
VIDEO FORMAT menu. Refer to
Inputting image from Main to Sub (
24
) and
Inputting image from Main to Sub - Video signal (either component or video).
(
28
)
3.5 Selecting input source for Sub
1.
Highlight SUB INPUT SOURCE in the STACK
menu with the ▲/▼ buttons, then press the ►
button to display the SUB INPUT SOURCE dialog.
2. Use the ▲/▼ buttons in the dialog to highlight FOLLOW MAIN UNIT or FIXED
(COMPUTER IN 1).
)2//2:0$,181,7: Sets the input source on the Sub projector to the same
port as Main.
),;('&20387(5,1: Sets the input source on the Sub projector to the
&20387(5,1 port which is connected to the 021,725287 port on the
Main projector.
19
STACK menu settings
Before exiting menu operation for Intellectual Stack, it is recommended to check
all the settings in the STACK menu. For dialogs that are called from the STACK
menu, you can press the ◄ button to return to the STACK menu.
Refer to the following to exit menu operation for Intellectual Stack.
3.6 Exiting Intellectual Stack menu
Dialog from STACK menu
When you press the ► button (functioning as EXIT
key) after performing some changes to the set-
tings, a conrmation dialog will appear.
● Pressing the ► button (functioning as YES
key) in the dialog saves the setting and closes
the dialog. The screen becomes black while the setting is being applied.
Please wait for a while.
● Pressing the ◄ button (functioning as NO key) in the dialog closes the dialog
without saving the setting.
STACK menu
When you press the ◄ button (functioning
as RETURN key) after performing some
changes to the settings, a conrmation dialog
will appear.
● Pressing the ► button (functioning as YES
key) in the dialog saves the setting and
closes the dialog. The screen becomes black while the setting is being applied.
Please wait for a while.
● Pressing the ◄ button (functioning as NO key) in the dialog returns you to the
COMMUNICATION menu without saving the setting. (
Operating Guide →
OPTION menu → SERVICE)
20
STACK menu settings
(continued on next page)
3.7 Important information for Intellectual Stack
This section provides important information for setting up the Main and Sub
projectors, not explanations on operating the menus. Read all information carefully.
● To use Intellectual Stack, one projector must be set to Main and the other set to
Sub.
● All buttons except the 67$1'%<21 button on the control panel of the Sub
projector are disabled. Operate the projectors with the control panel of the Main
projector or the remote control.
● Pressing the 67$1'%<21 button of the Sub projector does not allow you to
turn off only the Sub projector. The Main and Sub projectors turn off when the
button is pressed for more than 3 seconds. And pressing the button does not
turn on the Main or Sub projector.
● The Main projector is capable of receiving the remote control signals but not the
Sub projector so the remote control should be pointed at the Main projector.
● <Only for &3;, &3:; and &3:8>
Each Status Monitor can also be operated individually from the respective
control panel of the Main and Sub projectors. Only the monitor on the projector
that has been turned on can be operated with the remote control.
● If a wired remote control is used, connect the cable to the Main projector instead
of the Sub projector.
● For simple PC mouse & keyboard functions, connect both the Main and Sub
projectors to your computer with USB cables. (
Operating Guide → Using as a
simple PC mouse & keyboard
)
● AUTO SEARCH function is disabled when the projector is used in Intellectual
Stack.
● Network communication to Sub and Web Control on Sub cannot turn on the Sub
projector. The Sub projector can only be controlled through the Main projector.
● The Web Remote Control function of the Sub projector is disabled. (
Network
Guide → 3.1.11 Remote Control)
● If you try to turn on the projectors using the Power on & Display on feature on
the Messenger function, the projectors will exit Intellectual Stack and display the
specied message. To start Intellectual Stack again, re-select MAIN/SUB on
both projectors in the STACK MODE dialog, or turn off and on both projectors
again.
21
STACK menu settings
● The Main and Sub projectors have the following common settings.
- AV MUTE (
Operating Guide → Temporarily turning off the screen and audio)
- Magnifying feature (
Operating Guide → Using the magnify feature)
- ASPECT and OVER SCAN (
Operating Guide → IMAGE menu)
- COMPUTER IN (
Operating Guide → INPUT menu)
- MESSEAGE (
Operating Guide → SCREEN menu)
- MY BUTTON (
Operating Guide → OPTION menu)
- TEMPLATE (
Operating Guide → SCREEN menu)
- Lens shade (
Operating Guide → Temporarily shading the screen)
- SHADE TIMER (
Operating Guide → OPTION menu)
- SOURCE SKIP (
Operating Guide → OPTION menu)
- PbyP (
Operating Guide → PbyP)
<Only for &3:8 and &3:8>
● The following functions are disabled.
- Executing of AUTO KEYSTONE (
Operating
Guide → SETUP menu)
- STANDBY MODE (
Operating Guide → SETUP
menu)
- AUTO SEARCH (
Operating Guide → OPTION menu)
- Turning on/off AUTO KEYSTONE (
Operating Guide →
OPTION menu)
- DIRECT POWER ON (
Operating Guide → OPTION menu)
- AUTO POWER OFF (
Operating Guide → OPTION menu)
- COMMUNICATION TYPE (
Operating Guide → OPTION menu → SERVICE
→ COMMUNICATION)
● The input source from the following ports cannot be selected.
- 86%7<3($, 86%7<3(%, /$1
● <Only for &3:8 and &3:8>
When the projectors are in the PbyP mode, SUB INPUT SOURCE is xed to
FOLLOW MAIN UNIT.
● When Intellectual Stack is in use, an error message will be displayed if an error
occurs on any of the projectors.
When an error occurs, a full dialog will be displayed on screen. The full dialog
changes to a small dialog after about 20 seconds without any key activity. While
the small dialog is displayed, pressing the ◄ button displays a full dialog again.
The numbers “
” and “” above the projector icons represent the Main and Sub
projectors respectively.
Refer to the on-screen messages as shown below and take the necessary
actions to resolve the problem.
(continued on next page)
3.7 Important information for Intellectual Stack (continued)
)XOOGLDORJ
6PDOOGLDORJ
22
STACK menu settings
([DPSOH
&RYHU(UURU Lamp cover is opened.
/DPS(UURU Lamp does not light up.
)DQ(UURU Problem with cooling fan.
7HPS(UURU Temperature of the projector is too
high.
$LU)ORZ(UURU Temperature of the projector is
too high, check that the exhaust vents are not
blocked.
)LOWHU(UURU The reading on the lter timer
exceeds the hours set in the FILTER
MESSAGE menu. (
Operating Guide →
OPTION menu → SERVICE)
&ROG(UURU The ambient temperature is too
low.
● If you need to turn off a projector for reasons such as taking corrective actions
for an error, turn off both the projectors so that Intellectual Stack can be started
properly when the projectors are turned on again.
● If the PIN LOCK or TRANSITION DETECTOR security function on both
projectors is set to ON, both projectors will turn on. Enter the security code for
Main rst then followed by Sub. If ALTERNATE mode is selected, one of the
projectors will turn off automatically. (
Operating Guide → SECURITY menu)
● If the PIN LOCK or TRANSITION DETECTOR security function on one of the
projectors is set to ON, it is necessary to enter the security code as follows
when turning on the projector.
- In DUAL mode, both projectors will turn on. Enter the security code for the
projector that is locked by the security function.
- In ALTERNATE mode, if the projector locked by the security function is due
to turn on according to the ALTERNATE mode setting, only that projector will
turn on. Otherwise, both projectors will turn on. Enter the security code for
the projector that is locked by the security function. After the security lock is
released, one of the projectors will turn off if both projectors are turned on.
3.7 Important information for Intellectual Stack (continued)
23
To superimpose two images onto one screen, the same image must be input to
the Main and Sub projectors. There are various methods to input the image to the
projectors. This chapter describes the ways of connecting the cables. Read this
chapter to nd a method that meets your needs.
4.1 Connecting an RS-232C cable
If you are using Intellectual Stack, connect an RS-232C cross cable between the
&21752/ ports on the Main and Sub projectors. (
8
) This connection is not
required if you are using Simple Stack.
4. Connecting cables
NOTE • If Simple Stack without an RS-232C connection is used, the Main and
Sub projectors described below do not exist. Main in this chapter is read as
one projector and Sub as the other projector.
• For details on the specications of the input ports, refer to
Connecting with
your devices (
Operating Guide → Setting up) and Connection to the ports.
(
Operating Guide - Technical)
NOTE • If the RS-232C cable connecting the two projectors operating in
Intellectual Stack is disconnected, the projectors will exit from Intellectual Stack
and start to operate individually. Intellectual Stack will not restart even if the
cable is reconnected. Follow the procedures below to restart Intellectual Stack.
(1) Do not operate the projectors for more than 10 seconds after disconnecting
the cable to allow the projectors to recognize the disconnection of the cable.
(2) Turn off both projectors and allow them to cool sufciently.
(3) Reconnect the two projectors with the RS-232C cable and turn them on
again. Intellectual Stack will restart.
24
Connecting cables
Inputting image to Sub and Main individually
1.
Split the output signal from your image device into two with device such as a
signal splitter.
2.
Connect the output ports of the image output device to the same input ports
on the Main and Sub projectors.
NOTES for Simple Stack
• &20387(5,1 and ,1 can be used
as the input port for the projector that is
connected with a computer cable at its
021,725287 port. (
Operating Guide
→
SETUP menu) If you wish to use other
input ports, input the image to Sub and Main
individually.
Inputting image from Main to Sub
1.
Connect the 021,725287 port on Main
to the &20387(5,1 port on Sub with a
computer cable.
2.
Connect the image output device to one of
the input ports on Main.
4.2 Connecting signal cables
There are two methods to input image to the Sub projector. (
18, 19
)
- Inputting image from the 021,725287 port on Main to Sub.
- Inputting image to Sub and Main individually.
NOTES for Intellectual Stack
• &20387(5,1 and ,1 can be used
as the input port for the Main projector in
Intellectual Stack. Do not use other ports for
image input.
- You can input component signals to
&20387(5,1 and ,1.
- You can input video signals to the Y pin of
the component video of &20387(5,1 and
,1.
NOTES for Intellectual Stack • /$1, 86%7<3($ and 86%7<3(%
cannot be used as the input ports on the Main projector in Intellectual Stack.
NOTES for Simple Stack • Any of the ports that is compatible with the
signal can be used. Input the same signal to the two projectors individually.
&RQQHFWLRQH[DPSOH
LQ,QWHOOHFWXDO6WDFN
6XE
0DLQ
25
5.1 Preparing for menu operations
If Simple Stack without an RS-232C connection is used, press the button
corresponding to the port on the remote control or the ,1387 button on the
projector to select the port to which the cable is connected.
For setting of
MONITOR OUT, refer to SETUP menu in Operating Guide.
This completes the setting.
If Intellectual Stack with the RS-232C connection is used, all settings or
modications related to Intellectual Stack menu operations must be performed on
the Main projector. The Main projector functions according to the input settings
for Intellectual Stack.
5.2 Checking Main projector's operating status
For Intellectual Stack, all settings or modications related to menu operations
must be performed on the Main projector. Before operating the menu for
Intellectual Stack, check if the Main projector is functioning.
1.
Press the 0(18 button on the remote control.
2.
If the MENU dialog as shown on the right appears on
the screen, the two projectors are operating in DUAL
mode and the Main projector is operating.
Go to
5.4 Setting the menu. (
27
)
If the dialog does not appear, LAMP MODE is set to ALTERNATE and either
the Main or Sub projector is operating. Go to next.
3.
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to go into the following menu.
ADVANCED MENU > OPTION
> SERVICE > COMMUNICATION
> STACK
STACK menu will appear on screen.
(
Operating Guide → OPTION menu)
4.
Check the STACK MODE setting in the STACK menu.
- If MAIN is displayed, the Main projector is operating. Go to 5.4 Setting the
menu
. (
27
)
- If SUB is displayed, the Main projector is turned off and the Sub projector is
operating. Go to
5.3 Starting up Main projector. (
26
)
5. Setting input ports using menu
26
Setting input ports using menu
5.3 Starting up Main projector
After performing section 5.2 Checking Main projector's operating status, the two
projectors are conrmed to have been set to ALTERNATE mode and the Sub
projector is currently operating. As the settings for Intellectual Stack can be
changed only when the Main projector is operating, this section explains how to
switch from the Sub projector to the Main projector.
1.
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to go into the following menu.
ADVANCED MENU > OPTION
> SERVICE > COMMUNICATION > STACK
STACK menu will appear on screen.
(
Operating Guide → OPTION menu)
2.
Check the ALTERNATE MODE setting in the menu.
If NORMAL is displayed, the two projectors are turned on alternately. Therefore,
the Main projector will be turned on if you restart the projectors.
(1)
Press the 67$1'%< button on the remote control or 67$1'%<21 button of
the Main projector. The Sub projector will turn off.
(2) After the projector has cooled down, press the 21 or 67$1'%<21 button to
turn on again. The Main projector will be turned on.
If AUTO is displayed, the projector with the least lamp usage is turned on.
Therefore, the Main projector may not be turned on even if you restart the
projectors. Follow the procedures below to turn on the Main projector.
(1) Use the ▲/▼ button to highlight STACK MODE, and press the ► button to
display the STACK MODE dialog.
(2) Use the ▲/▼ button to highlight OFF, and then press the ► button to complete
the setting. (
19
)
(3) Repeat the above procedures to display the STACK MODE dialog again.
(4) Use the ▲/▼ button to highlight SUB, and then press the ► button to
complete the setting. (
19
)
(5) After exiting the menu, wait for 10 seconds or more.
(6) Press the 67$1'%< button on the remote control or 67$1'%<21 button of
the Main projector. The Sub projector will turn off.
(7) After the projector has cooled down, press the 21 or 67$1'%<21 button to
turn on again. The Main projector will be turned on even if LAMP MODE has
been set to AUTO.
3.
You can change the settings for Intellectual Stack now that the Main projector
is operating. Go to
5.4 Setting the menu. (
27
)
NOTE • If the Main projector cannot be turned on due to error or certain
problems, the Sub projector will be turned on even if you follow the procedures
above. Take necessary actions to x the Main projector, and then change the
settings for Intellectual Stack.
27
Setting input ports using menu
5.4 Setting the menu
If Intellectual Stack with RS-232C connection is used, observe the followings.
When inputting image signals to Sub via Main, the operations differ between using
computer signals and video signals such as component and video signals.
Inputting image from Main to Sub - Computer signal
1.
If the STACK menu is already displayed on the screen, proceed to 3 below.
Otherwise press the 0(18 button on the remote control.
If the MENU dialog is displayed, use the ▲/▼ buttons to
highlight MAIN, and press the ► button. A menu will be
displayed.
If the MENU dialog is not displayed, the STACK menu will appear.
2.
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to go into the following menu.
ADVANCED MENU > OPTION
> SERVICE > COMMUNICATION > STACK
STACK menu will appear on screen.
(
Operating Guide → OPTION menu)
3.
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to highlight SUB INPUT
SOURCE, and press the ► button to display the
SUB INPUT SOURCE dialog.
4.
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to highlight FIXED (COMPUTER IN 1), and press the ►
button to complete the setting. (
19
)
5.
Press any button to select an input port on the
remote control or the ,1387 button of the Main
projector. The MAIN INPUT SOURCE dialog is
displayed on screen. Use the ▲/▼ buttons to
highlight the port to which the signal cable is
connected, and press the ► button to complete
the setting.
NOTE • When FIXED (COMPUTER IN 1) is selected, the MONITOR OUT
setting is invalid. (
Operating Guide → SETUP menu)
• When FIXED (COMPUTER IN 1) is selected, input sources other than
&20387(5,1 and &20387(5,1 cannot be selected.
• When FIXED (COMPUTER IN 1) is selected, if any button to select an
input port on the remote control or the ,1387 button on the Main projector is
pressed, the dialog for selecting the input source will be displayed.
28
Setting input ports using menu
Inputting image from Main to Sub
- Video signal (either component or video)
1.
If the STACK menu is already displayed on the screen, proceed to 3 below.
Otherwise press the 0(18 button on the remote control.
If the MENU dialog is displayed, use the ▲/▼ buttons to highlight MAIN, and
press the ► button. A menu will be displayed.
If the MENU dialog is not displayed, the STACK menu will appear.
1.
If the STACK menu is already displayed on the screen, proceed to 3 below.
Otherwise press the 0(18 button on the remote control.
If the MENU dialog is displayed, use the ▲/▼ buttons to highlight MAIN, and
press the ► button. A menu will be displayed.
If the MENU dialog is not displayed, the STACK menu will appear.
2.
Press the 0(18 button on the remote control
or control panel on the Main projector. Use the
▲/▼/◄/► buttons to open the COMPUTER IN
dialog. (
Operating Guide → INPUT menu)
3.
To input component signals to &20387(5,1 or ,1, set the port to AUTO.
Then, use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to highlight EXIT and press the ► button to
complete the setting.
To input video signals to &20387(5,1 or ,1, set the port to VIDEO. If it
is necessary to select a video format, use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to highlight
RETURN and press the ◄ button to display the INPUT menu. Otherwise, use
the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to highlight EXIT and press the ► button to complete
the setting.
4.
Select VIDEO FORMAT in the INPUT
menu to display the VIDEO FORMAT
dialog.
Select AUTO or an appropriate format for
the video signal input.
Then, use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to highlight EXIT and press the ► button to
complete the setting.
Inputting image to Sub and Main individually
2.
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to go into the following menu.
ADVANCED MENU > OPTION
> SERVICE > COMMUNICATION > STACK
STACK menu will appear on screen.
(
Operating Guide → OPTION menu)
(continued on next page)
29
Setting input ports using menu
5.4 Setting the menu - Inputting image to Sub and Main individually (continued)
3.
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to highlight SUB INPUT SOURCE, and press the ►
button to display the SUB INPUT SOURCE dialog.
4.
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to highlight FOLLOW MAIN
UNIT, and press the ► button to complete the set-
ting. (
19
)
5.
Press any button to select an input port on the
remote control or the ,1387 button of the Main
projector. The MAIN INPUT SOURCE dialog will
be displayed on screen.
Use the ▲/▼ buttons
to highlight the port to which the signal cable is
connected, and press the ► button to complete
the setting.
NOTE • If FOLLOW MAIN UNIT is selected, selecting the input source on
either the Main or Sub projector will automatically set the other projector to the
same source.
• If FOLLOW MAIN UNIT is selected, /$1, 86%7<3($ and 86%7<3(%
cannot be selected.
• When FOLLOW MAIN UNIT is selected, if any button to select an input port
on the remote control or the ,1387 button on the Main projector is pressed, the
dialog for selecting the input source will be displayed.
30
6. Restrictions on Schedule function
This model supports the Schedule function on the Projector Web Control feature.
(
Network Guide → 3.1.7 Schedule Settings) There are some restrictions on
the functions when Intellectual Stack with RS-232C connection is used. But for
Simple Stack without an RS-232C connection, there is no restriction on the
functions.
Regardless of whether Intellectual Stack or Simple Stack is used, take note of the
Schedule settings before using the Stack function. Unexpected setting changes
may occur when using the Stack function.
Refer to the following for the restrictions concerning Intellectual Stack. If you are
using Simple Stack, skip this chapter.
(continued on next page)
9
: This Schedule can be input to Projector Web Control and be executed even if
the projectors are operating in Intellectual Stack.
9
*1): This Schedule can be input to Projector Web Control even if the projectors
5HVWULFWLRQVRQWKH0DLQSURMHFWRU
Functions
LAMP MODE
DUAL ALTERNATE
DUAL/
ALTERNATE
Power
status
Main ON ON OFF OFF
Sub ON OFF ON OFF
Power On
9 9 9 9
Power Off
9 9 9 9
Input port change
9
*1)
9
*1)
9
*1)
9
*1)
My Image
9 9
; *2) ; *2)
Messenger
9 9
; *2) ; *2)
Slide Show ; *3) ; *3) ; *3) ; *3)
5HVWULFWLRQVRQWKH6XESURMHFWRU
Functions
LAMP MODE
DUAL ALTERNATE
DUAL/
ALTERNATE
Power
status
Main ON ON OFF OFF
Sub ON OFF ON OFF
Power On ; *3 ; *3 ; *3 ; *3
Power Off
9 9 9 9
Input port change
9
*1)
9
*1)
9
*1)
9
*1)
My Image
9
; *2)
9
; *2)
Messenger
9
; *2)
9
; *2)
Slide Show ; *3) ; *3) ; *3) ; *3)
31
Restrictions on Schedule function
NOTE
• If the Schedule is not executed, an error message will be sent in
accordance with the conditions set in Schedule Execution Error on Projector
Web Control. (
Network Guide → 3.1.6 Alert Settings)
• If the Schedule function is set to turn off the power when the projectors are
operating in Intellectual Stack, both the Main and Sub projectors will be turned
off.
• If the Schedule function on the Main projector is set to turn on the power, the
projectors will be turned on according to the LAMP MODE setting.
• When the two projectors are operating in the DUAL mode and a menu is being
displayed on one of the projectors, the Schedule function for My Image and
Messenger on the other projector will not be executed.
• Power Off in the table refers to turning off the power and entering the standby
mode according to the Intellectual Stack settings or by pressing the 67$1'%<
button on the remote control or 67$1'%<21 button of the Main projector.
• The projectors cannot be turned on by the Schedule function on the Sub
projector. Set it on the Main projector if necessary.
• When the Sub projector is turned off according to the ALTERNATE MODE
setting, the Schedule function on the Sub projector to turn off its power will be
executed without error.
6. Restrictions on Schedule function (continued)
are operating in Intellectual Stack. If the input port to be changed according to
the Schedule function can be used in Intellectual Stack, the Schedule will be
executed. If not, it will not be executed.
; *2): This Schedule can be input to Projector Web Control when the projectors
are operating in Intellectual Stack but it will not be executed.
; *3):
This Schedule can neither be input to Projector Web Control nor be executed
when the projectors are operating in Intellectual Stack.
32
7. Troubleshooting
About the phenomenon confused with a machine defect, check and cope with it
according to the following table.
3KHQRPHQDWKDWPD\EHHDV\WREHPLVWDNHQIRUPDFKLQHGHIHFWV
Phenomenon Cases not involving a machine defect
Reference
page
Intellectual
Stack does not
function.
1RSRZHULVVXSSOLHGWRWKH0DLQDQG6XE
SURMHFWRU
To use the Intellectual Stack feature,
supply AC power to both the Main and Sub
projectors. If AC power is supplied to only
one of the projectors, Intellectual Stack is
disabled.
8
in
User’s
Manual
(concise)
7KH56&FDEOHEHWZHHQWKH0DLQDQG
6XESURMHFWRUVLVQRWSURSHUO\FRQQHFWHG
To use the Intellectual Stack feature, connect
an RS-232C cross cable between the Main
and Sub projectors. If the cable is not
connected, the Main projector cannot control
the Sub projector.
8
7KHPHQXVHWWLQJVIRU,QWHOOHFWXDO6WDFN
DUHQRWSHUIRUPHGFRUUHFWO\
Check the settings of the STACK menu on
the Main and Sub projectors. To use the
Intellectual Stack feature, one projector must
be set to Main and the other projector must
be set to Sub.
14
6LJQDOFDEOHVDUHQRWFRQQHFWHGFRUUHFWO\
Check the connection of cables. Also check
that the cable connection matches with the
port settings in the menu.
24
10 - 14
in
Operating
Guide
The Main and
Sub projector do
not operate in
synchronization.
7KH56&FDEOHEHWZHHQWKH0DLQDQG
6XESURMHFWRUVLVQRWSURSHUO\FRQQHFWHG
Connect the RS-232C cable properly and
restart the Main projector.
8
(continued on next page)
33
Troubleshooting
The STACK
menu cannot
function.
7KHVHWWLQJVRQWKHSURMHFWRUVDUHQRWVHW
IRUWKH,QWHOOHFWXDO6WDFNIHDWXUH
Check the following settings on the Main and
Sub projectors.
- STANDBY MODE in SETUP menu:
NORMAL
- COMMUNICATION TYPE under
COMMUNICATION in SERVICE menu:
OFF
- STACK LOCK in SECURITY menu: OFF
5
The projector
does not respond
to the remote
control.
7KHUHPRWHFRQWUROLVSRLQWHGDWWKH6XE
SURMHFWRU
When operating in Intellectual Stack, only
the Main projector is capable of receiving the
remote control signals. Therefore, point at the
Main projector when using the remote control.
3
The images are
either out of
focus or not well-
superimposed.
7KHWZRLPDJHVDUHQRWVXSHULPSRVHG
FRUUHFWO\
Adjust to superimpose the images with the
ZOOM, FOCUS and LENS SHIFT features.
If necessary, adjust PERFECT FIT and
KEYSTONE as well.
6
11
The images
from the two
projectors do not
superimposed
even after
performing ne
adjustment.
7KHUHDUHVRPHDGMXVWPHQWGLIIHUHQFHVLQ
WKHWZRLPDJHV
Try to resolve the problem with the following
measures.
- Press the AUTO button on the remote
control or execute AUTO ADJUST
EXECUTE on each of the projectors.
- Adjust H POSITION and V POSITION on
each of the projectors.
- Check the RESOLUTION setting in the
INPUT menu, and change to the same
setting if the setting differs between Main
and Sub.
31, 49
in
Operating
Guide
48
in
Operating
Guide
53
in
Operating
Guide
Phenomenon Cases not involving a machine defect
Reference
page
7. Troubleshooting (continued)
1
Projector
CP-X8150/CP-X8160/
CP-WX8240/CP-WX8255/
CP-SX8350/CP-WU8440/CP-WU8450
User's Manual (detailed)
Operating Guide – Technical
Resolution (H x V) H. frequency (kHz) V. frequency (Hz) Rating Signal mode
720 x 400
37.9 85.0 VESA TEXT
640 x 480 31.5 59.9 VESA VGA (60Hz)
640 x 480 37.9 72.8 VESA VGA (72Hz)
640 x 480 37.5 75.0 VESA VGA (75Hz)
640 x 480 43.3 85.0 VESA VGA (85Hz)
800 x 600 35.2 56.3 VESA SVGA (56Hz)
800 x 600 37.9 60.3 VESA SVGA (60Hz)
800 x 600 48.1 72.2 VESA SVGA (72Hz)
800 x 600 46.9 75.0 VESA SVGA (75Hz)
800 x 600 53.7 85.1 VESA SVGA (85Hz)
832 x 624 49.7 74.5 Mac 16” mode
1024 x 768 48.4 60.0 VESA XGA (60Hz)
1024 x 768 56.5 70.1 VESA XGA (70Hz)
1024 x 768 60.0 75.0 VESA XGA (75Hz)
1024 x 768 68.7 85.0 VESA XGA (85Hz)
1152 x 864 67.5 75.0 VESA
1152 x 864 (75Hz)
1280 x 768 47.7 60.0 VESA W-XGA (60Hz)
1280 x 800 49.7 60.0 VESA
1280 x 800 (60Hz)
1280 x 960 60.0 60.0 VESA
1280 x 960 (60Hz)
1280 x 1024 64.0 60.0 VESA SXGA (60Hz)
1280 x 1024 80.0 75.0 VESA SXGA (75Hz)
1440 x 900 55.9 59.9 VESA WXGA+ (60Hz)
Example of computer signal
(continued on next page)
2
Example of computer signal
Resolution (H x V) H. frequency (kHz) V. frequency (Hz) Rating Signal mode
*1 1280 x 1024 91.1 85.0 VESA SXGA (85Hz)
*2 1400 x 1050 65.2 60.0 VESA SXGA+ (60Hz)
*3 1680 x 1050 65.3 60.0 VESA WSXGA+ (60Hz)
*1 1600 x 1200 75.0 60.0 VESA UXGA (60Hz)
*4 1920 x 1200 74.0 60.0 VESA
W-UXGA (60Hz)
Reduced Blanking
*1) Supported except for HDMI
TM
input.
*2) Only for CP-X8150, CP-X8160 and CP-SX8350.
*3) Only for CP-WX8240, CP-WX8255, CP-WU8440 and CP-WU8450.
*4) Only for CP-WU8440 and CP-WU8450, but except for HDMI
TM
input.
NOTE • Be sure to check jack type, signal level, timing and resolution
before connecting this projector to a computer.
• Some computers may have multiple display screen modes. Use of some of
these modes will not be possible with this projector.
• Depending on the input signal, full-size display may not be possible in some
cases. Refer to the number of display pixels above.
• Although the projector can display signals with a resolution up to UXGA
(1600x1200) or up to W-UXGA (1920x1200) for CP-WU8440 and CP-WU8450,
the signal will be converted to the projector’s panel resolution before being
displayed. The best display performance will be achieved if the resolutions of
the input signal and projector panel are identical.
• Automatic adjustment may not function correctly with some input signals.
• The image may not be displayed correctly when the input sync signal is a
composite sync or a sync on G.
3
Initial set signals
Back porch (B) Front porch (D) Back porch (b) Front porch (d)
Active video (C)
Data Data
H. Sync. V. Sync.
Sync (A) Sync (a)
Active video (c)
Resolution
(H x V)
Horizontal signal timing (μs) Vertical signal timing (lines)
Signal mode
(A) (B) (C) (D) (a) (b) (c) (d)
720 x 400
2.0 3.0 20.3 1.0 3 42 400 1 TEXT
640 x 480 3.8 1.9 25.4 0.6 2 33 480 10 VGA (60Hz)
640 x 480 1.3 4.1 20.3 0.8 3 28 480 9 VGA (72Hz)
640 x 480 2.0 3.8 20.3 0.5 3 16 480 1 VGA (75Hz)
640 x 480 1.6 2.2 17.8 1.6 3 25 480 1 VGA (85Hz)
800 x 600 2.0 3.6 22.2 0.7 2 22 600 1 SVGA (56Hz)
800 x 600 3.2 2.2 20.0 1.0 4 23 600 1 SVGA (60Hz)
800 x 600 2.4 1.3 16.0 1.1 6 23 600 37 SVGA (72Hz)
800 x 600 1.6 3.2 16.2 0.3 3 21 600 1 SVGA (75Hz)
800 x 600 1.1 2.7 14.2 0.6 3 27 600 1 SVGA (85Hz)
832 x 624 1.1 3.9 14.5 0.6 3 39 624 1 Mac 16" mode
1024 x 768 2.1 2.5 15.8 0.4 6 29 768 3 XGA (60Hz)
1024 x 768 1.8 1.9 13.7 0.3 6 29 768 3 XGA (70Hz)
1024 x 768 1.2 2.2 13.0 0.2 3 28 768 1 XGA (75Hz)
1024 x 768 1.0 2.2 10.8 0.5 3 36 768 1 XGA (85Hz)
1152 x 864 1.2 2.4 10.7 0.6 3 32 864 1
1152 x 864
(75Hz)
1280 x 768 1.7 2.5 16.0 0.8 3 23 768 1 W-XGA (60Hz)
1280 x 800 1.6 2.4 15.3 0.8 3 24 800 1
1280 x 800
(60Hz)
1280 x 960 1.0 2.9 11.9 0.9 3 36 960 1
1280 x 960
(60Hz)
1280 x 1024 1.0 2.3 11.9 0.4 3 38 1024 1 SXGA (60Hz)
1280 x 1024 1.1 1.8 9.5 0.1 3 38 1024 1 SXGA (75Hz)
1280 x 1024 1.0 1.4 8.1 0.4 3 44 1024 1 SXGA (85Hz)
1400 x 1050 1.2 2.0 11.4 0.7 3 33 1050 1 SXGA+ (60Hz)
1440 x 900 1.4 2.2 13.5 0.8 6 25 900 3 WXGA+ (60Hz)
1680 x 1050 1.2 1.9 11.5 0.7 6 30 1050 3 WSXGA+ (60Hz)
1600 x 1200 1.2 1.9 9.9 0.4 3 46 1200 1 UXGA (60Hz)
1920 x 1200 0.208 0.519 12.47 0.312 6 26 1200 3
W-UXGA (60Hz)
Reduced Blanking
The following signals are used for the initial settings. The signal timing of some
computer models may be different. In such case, adjust the items V POSITION
and H POSITION in the IMAGE menu.
Initial set signals
4
A
COMPUTER IN1,
B
MONITOR OUT
D-sub 15pin mini shrink jack
<Computer signal>
• Video signal: RGB separate, Analog, 0.7Vp-p, 75Ω terminated (positive)
• H/V. sync. signal: TTL level (positive/negative)
• Composite sync. signal: TTL level
<Component video signal>
• Video signal: Y with composite sync, Analog, 1.0±0.1Vp-p, 75Ω terminated
Cb/Pb, Analog, 0.7±0.1Vp-p, 75Ω terminated
Cr/Pr, Analog, 0.7±0.1Vp-p 75Ω terminated
• System: 480i@60, 480p@60, 576i@50, 720p@50/60, 1080i@50/60
Pin Signal Pin Signal
1 Video Red, Cr/Pr 9 (No connection)
2 Video Green, Y 10 Ground
3 Video Blue, Cb/Pb 11 (No connection)
4 (No connection) 12
A
: SDA (DDC data)
B
: (No connection)
5 Ground 13 H. sync / Composite sync.
6 Ground Red, Ground Cr/Pr 14 V. sync.
7 Ground Green, Ground Y
15
A
: SCL (DDC clock)
B
: (No connection)
8 Ground Blue, Ground Cb/Pb
Connection to the ports
①⑤④③②
⑥⑩⑨⑧⑦
⑪⑮⑭⑬⑫
Connection to the ports
B
A
NOTICE
►Use the cables with straight plugs, not L-shaped ones, as the
input ports of the projector are recessed.
►Only the signal that is input from the COMPUTER IN1 or IN2 can be output
from the MONITOR OUT port.
5
Connection to the ports (continued)
COMPUTER IN2
C
G/Y,
D
B/Cb/Pb,
E
R/Cr/Pr,
F
H,
G
V
BNC jack x5
<Computer signal>
• Video signal: RGB separate, Analog, 0.7Vp-p, 75Ω terminated (positive)
• H/V. sync. signal: TTL level (positive/negative)
• Composite sync. signal: TTL level
<Component video signal>
• Video signal: Y with composite sync, Analog, 1.0±0.1Vp-p, 75Ω terminated
Cb/Pb, Analog, 0.7±0.1Vp-p, 75Ω terminated
Cr/Pr, Analog, 0.7±0.1Vp-p 75Ω terminated
• System: 480i@60, 480p@60, 576i@50, 720p@50/60, 1080i@50/60
H
HDMI 1,
I
HDMI 2
HDMI
TM
connector
• Audio signal: Linear PCM (Sampling rate; 32/44.1/48 kHz)
Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
1 T.M.D.S. Data2 + 8 T.M.D.S. Data0 Shield 15 SCL
2 T.M.D.S. Data2 Shield 9 T.M.D.S. Data0 - 16 SDA
3 T.M.D.S. Data2 - 10 T.M.D.S. Clock + 17 DDC/CEC Ground
4
T.M.D.S. Data1 + 11 T.M.D.S. Clock Shield
18
+5V Power
5 T.M.D.S. Data1 Shield 12 T.M.D.S. Clock -
19 Hot Plug Detect
6 T.M.D.S. Data1 - 13 CEC
7 T.M.D.S. Data0 + 14 Reserved (N.C. on device)
①⑤
④
③
②⑥⑩
⑨
⑧
⑦⑪⑮
⑭
⑬
⑫
⑲
⑱
⑰
⑯
C ED
F
F G
HI
6
M
S-VIDEO
Mini DIN 4pin jack
• S-video signal, Analog:
-Brightness signal with composite sync, 1.0±0.1Vp-p, 75Ω terminated
-Color signal, 0.286Vp-p (NTSC, burst), 75Ω terminated
0.300Vp-p (PAL/SECAM, burst) 75Ω terminated
• System: NTSC, PAL, SECAM, PAL-M, PAL-N, NTSC4.43, PAL(60Hz)
Pin Signal
1 C (color signal)
2 Y (brightness signal)
3 Ground
4 Ground
Connection to the ports (continued)
N
VIDEO
RCA jack
• Composite video signal, Analog, 1.0±0.1Vp-p, 75Ω terminator
• System: NTSC, PAL, SECAM, PAL-M, PAL-N, NTSC4.43, PAL(60Hz)
COMPONENT
J
Y,
K
Cb/Pb,
L
Cr/Pr
RCA jack x3
• Component video signal, Analog:
-Y with composite sync, 1.0±0.1Vp-p, 75Ω terminated
-Cb/Pb, 0.7±0.1Vp-p, 75Ω terminated
-Cr/Pr, 0.7±0.1Vp-p 75Ω terminated
• System: 480i@60, 480p@60, 576i@50, 720p@50/60, 1080i@50/60, 1080p@50/60
L JK
M
N
①
④③
②
1
2
3
4
7
Connection to the ports (continued)
O
AUDIO IN1,
P
AUDIO IN2
Ø3.5 stereo mini jack
•
Analog, 500 mVrms, 47kΩ input impedance
AUDIO IN3
Q
L,
R
R AUDIO OUT
S
L,
T
R
RCA jack x2 RCA jack x2
•
Analog, 500 mVrms, 47kΩ input impedance
•
Analog, 500 mVrms, 1kΩ output impedance
U
CONTROL
D-sub 9pin plug
* About the details of RS-232C communication,
please refer to the next section.
Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
1 (No connection) 4 (No connection) 7RTS
2 RD 5 Ground 8 CTS
3TD 6(No connection) 9 (No connection)
①②
⑥⑦⑧⑨
⑤④③
O
P
S T
RQ
U
8
REMOTE CONTROL
Y
IN,
Z
OUT
Ø3.5 stereo mini jack
Connection to the ports (continued)
X
USB
TYPE B
USB B type jack
Pin Signal
1 +5V
2 - Data
3 + Data
4 Ground
V
LAN
RJ-45 jack
* About the details of network communication,
please refer to the Network Guide.
Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
1 TX+ 4- 7-
2 TX- 5 -
8-
3 RX+ 6 RX-
W
USB TYPE A
USB A type jack x2
Pin Signal
1 +5V
2 - Data
3 + Data
4 Ground
①
④③
②
①⑤
④
③
②⑥⑧
⑦
①④③②
①④③②
W
X
Y
Z
V
9
To input SCART RGB signal;
ex.
Video
G
B
R
Audio L
Audio R
Connection to the ports (continued)
To input SCART RGB signal to the projector, use a SCART to RCA cable.
Connect the plugs refer to above ex. For more reference, please consult your
dealer.
SCART
connector
(jack)
SCART cable
(plug)
RCA plugs
10
①②
⑥⑦⑧⑨
⑤④③
CD (1) (1)
−
RD(2) (2) RD
TD (3) (3) TD
DTR (4) (4)
−
GND (5) (5) GND
DSR (6) (6)
−
RTS (7) (7) RTS
DTS (8) (8) CTS
RI (9) (9)
−
RS-232C Communication
RS-232C Communication
When the projector connects to the computer by RS-232C communication, the
projector can be controlled with RS-232C commands from the computer.
For details of RS-232C commands, refer to RS-232C Communication / Network
command table (
19).
Connection
1.
Turn off the projector and the computer.
2.
Connect the projector's CONTROL port and the computer's RS-232C port
with a RS-232C cable (cross). Use the cable that fullls the specication
shown in gure
3.
Turn the computer on, and after the computer has started up turn the projector
on.
4.
Set the COMMUNICATION TYPE to OFF in the COMMUNICATION menu of the
OPTION - SERVICE menu.
1
9876
5432
CONTROL port
of the projector
RS-232C port
of the computer
RS-232C cable
(cross)
RS-232C
CONTROL
11
RS-232C Communication (continued)
Communicaion settings
1. Protocol
19200bps, 8N1
2. Command format
("h" shows hexadecimal)
Byte Number
01 2 3456
789101112
Command
Action
Header Data
Header
code
Packet
Data
size
CRC
ag
Action Type
Setting
code
L H L H L H L H L H L H
<SET>
Change setting to
desired value [(cL)(cH)]
by [(bL)(bH)].
BEh EFh 03h 06h 00h
(aL) (aH) 01h 00h (bL) (bH) (cL) (cH)
<GET>
Read projector
internal setup value [(bL)
(bH)] .
(aL) (aH) 02h 00h (bL) (bH) 00h 00h
<INCREMENT>
Increment setup value
[(bL)(bH)] by 1.
(aL) (aH) 04h 00h (bL) (bH) 00h 00h
<DECREMENT>
Decrement setup value
[(bL)(bH)] by 1.
(aL) (aH) 05h 00h (bL) (bH) 00h 00h
<EXECUTE> Run a
command [(bL)(bH)].
(aL) (aH) 06h 00h (bL) (bH) 00h 00h
[Header code] [Packet] [Data size]
Set [BEh, EFh, 03h, 06h, 00h] to byte number 0 to 4.
>&5&ÀDJ@
For byte number
5, 6,
refer to
RS-232C Communication / Network command
table
(19).
[Action]
Set functional code to byte number 7, 8.
<SET> = [01h, 00h], <GET> = [02h, 00h], <INCREMENT> = [04h, 00h]
<DECREMENT> = [05h, 00h], <EXECUTE> = [06h, 00h]
Refer to the Communication command table
(
above).
[Type] [Setting code]
For byte number 9 to 12, refer to
RS-232C Communication / Network
command table (
19).
12
RS-232C Communication (continued)
3. Response code / Error code
("h" shows hexadecimal)
(1) ACK reply: 06h
When the projector receives the Set, Increment, Decrement or Execute
command correctly, the projector changes the setting data for the specied
item by [Type], and it returns the code.
(2) NAK reply: 15h
When the projector cannot understand the received command, the projector
returns the error code.
In such a case, check the sending code and send the same command again.
(3) Error reply: 1Ch + 0000h
When the projector cannot execute the received command for any reasons,
the projector returns the error code.
In such a case, check the sending code and the setting status of the projector.
(4) Data reply: 1Dh + xxxxh
When the projector receives the GET command correctly, the projector returns
the responce code and 2 bytes of data.
NOTE • For connecting the projector to your devices, please read the
manual for each devices, and connect them correctly with suitable cables.
• Operation cannot be guaranteed when the projector receives an undened
command or data.
• Provide an interval of at least 40ms between the response code and any
other code.
• The projector outputs test data when the power supply is switched ON, and
when the lamp is lit. Ignore this data.
• Commands are not accepted during warm-up.
• When the data length is greater than indicated by the data length code, the
projector ignore the excess data code. Conversely when the data length is
shorter than indicated by the data length code, the projector returns the error
code to the computer.
13
When the projector connects network, the projector can be controlled with RS-
232C commands from the computer with web browser.
For details of RS-232C commands, refer to RS-232C Communication / Network
command table
(19).
Command Control via the Network
LAN
USB wireless adapter
LAN cable (CAT-5 or greater)
Connection
1.
Turn off the projector and the computer.
2.
If you use wired LAN, connect the projector's LAN port to the computer's
LAN port with a LAN cable. Use the cable that fullls the specication shown
in gure. If you use wireless LAN, insert the USB wireless adapter into one of the
USB TYPE A ports of the projector.
3.
Turn the computer on, and after the computer has started up turn the
projector on.
NOTE • If data is transferred via wireless and wired LAN at the same
time, the projector may not be able to process the data correctly.
Command Control via the Network
14
Communicaion Port
The following two ports are assigned for the command control.
TCP #23
TCP #9715
Congure the following items form a web browser when command control is used.
Port Settings
Network Control
Port1 (Port: 23)
Port open
Click the [Enable] check box to open [Network
Control Port1 (Port: 23)] to use TCP #23.
Default setting is “Enable”.
Authentication
Click the [Enable] check box for the
[Authentication] setting when authentication
is required.
Default setting is “Disable”.
Network Control
Port2 (Port: 9715)
Port open
Click the [Enable] check box to open [Network
Control Port2 (Port: 9715)] to use TCP
#9715.
Default setting is “Enable”.
Authentication
Click the [Enable] check box for the
[Authentication] setting when authentication
is required.
Default setting is “Enable”.
Command Control via the Network
When the authentication setting is enabled, the following settings are required.
Security Settings
Network Control
Authentication
Password
Enter the desired authentication password.
ConrmThis setting will be the same for
[Network Control Port1 (Port: 23)] and
[Network Control Port2 (Port: 9715)].
Default setting is blank.
Re-enter
Authentication
Password
15
Command Control via the Network (continued)
Command control settings
[TCP #23]
1. Command format
Same as RS-232C communication, refer to RS-232C Communicaton command format.
2.
Response code / Error code
("h" shows hexadecimal)
Four of the response / error code used for TCP#23 are the same as RS-232C
Communication (1)~(4). One authentication error reply (5) is added.
(1) ACK reply : 06h
Refer to RS-232C communication
(
12).
(2) NAK reply : 15h
Refer to RS-232C communication (
12).
(3) Error reply : 1Ch + 0000h
Refer to RS-232C communication (
12).
(4) Data reply : 1Dh + xxxxh
Refer to RS-232C communication
(
12).
(5) Authentication error reply : 1Fh + 0400h
When authentication error occurred, the projector returns the error code.
[TCP #9715]
1. Command format
The commands some datum are added to the head and the end of the ones of
TCP#9715 are used.
Header Data length RS-232C command Check sum Connection ID
0×02 0×0D 13 bytes 1 byte 1 byte
[Header]
02, Fixed
[Data Length]
RS-232C commands byte length (0×0D, Fixed)
[RS-232C commands]
Refer to RS-232C Communication command format
(
11).
[Check Sum]
This is the value to make zero on the addition of the lower 8 bits from the header
to the checksum.
[Connection ID]
Random value from 0 to 255 (This value is attached to the reply data).
NOTE • Operation cannot be guaranteed when the projector receives an
undened command or data.
• Provide an interval of at least 40ms between the response code and any other
code.
• Commands are not accepted during warm-up.
16
NOTE • As for the transmission of the second or subsequent commands, the
authentication data can be omitted when the same connection.
Command Control via the Network (continued)
2. Response code / Error code ("h" shows hexadecimal)
The connection ID is attached for the TCP#23's response / error codes are
used. The connection ID is same as the sending command format.
(1) ACK reply: 06h + ××h (××h : connection ID)
(2) NAK reply: 15h + ××h
(3) Error reply: 1Ch + 0000h + ××h
(4) Data reply: 1Dh + xxxxh + ××h
(5) Authentication error reply: 1Fh + 0400h + ××h
(6) Projector busy reply: 1Fh + ××××h + ××h
When the projector is too busy to receives the command ,the projector
returens the error code.
In such a case, check the sending code and send the same command again.
Automatic Connection Break
The TCP connection will be automatically disconnected after there is no
communication for 30 seconds after being established.
Authentication
The projector does not accept commands without authentication success
when authentication is enabled. The projector uses a challenge response type
authentication with an MD5 (Message Digest 5) algorithm.
When the projector is connected to a LAN, a random 8 bytes will be returned
if authentication is enabled. Bind this received 8 bytes and the authentication
password, and digest the data with the MD5 algorithm, and add it in front of the
commands to send.
Following is a sample of authentication process.
Authentication password: password (example)
Random 8 bytes: a572f60c (example)
1) Select a projector and receive the random 8 bytes from the projector.
Î “a572f60c”
2) Bind the random 8 bytes and the authentication password.
Î “a572f60cpassword”
3) Digest this bound with MD5 algorithm.
Î “e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde”
4) Add this code in front of the commands and send the data.
Î “e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde” + [command].
5) When the sent data is correct, the command will be performed and the reply
data will be returned. Otherwise, an authentication error will be returned.
17
This projector is equipped with NETWORK BRIDGE function.
When the projector connects to the computer by wired or wireles LAN
communicaton, an external device that is connected with this projector by RS-
232C communication can be controlled from the computer as a network terminal.
For details, see the 6. Network Bridge function in the Network Guide.
Network Bridge Communication
LAN
LAN cable
(CAT-5 or greater)
RS-232C
RS-232C cable
(cross)
USB wireless adapter
NOTE • If data is transferred via wireless and wired LAN at the same time,
the projector may not be able to process the data correctly.
Connection
1.
If you use wired LAN, connect the computer's LAN port and the projector's
LAN port with a LAN cable. Use the cable that fullls the specication shown
in gure. If you use wireless LAN, insert the USB wireless adapter into the
projector's LAN port.
2.
Connect the projector's CONTROL port and the RS-232C port of the devices
that you want to control with a RS-232C cable.
3.
Turn the computer on, and after the computer has started up turn the
projector on.
4.
Set the COMMUNICATION TYPE to NETWORK BRIDGE in the
COMMUNICATION menu of the OPTION - SERVICE menu.
Network Bridge Communication
18
Communication settings
For communication setting, use the COMMUNICATION menu in the OPTION -
SERVICE menu
Item Condition
BAUD RATE 4800bps / 9600bps / 19200bps / 38400bps
Data length 8 bit (xed)
PARITY NONE/ODD/EVEN
Start bit 1 bit (xed)
Stop bit 1 bit (xed)
Transmission method HALF-DUPLEX/FULL-DUPLEX
NOTE •
For connecting the projector to your devices, please read the
manual for each devices, and connect them correctly with suitable cables.
• Turn off the power and unplug both the projector and other devices before
connecting them.
• For details of Transmission method, refer to 6.4 Transmission method in the
Network Guide.
Network Bridge Communication
19
RS-232C Communication / Network command table
RS-232C Communication / Network command table
(continued on next page)
Names Operation Type Header
CRC
Command Data
Action Type Setting code
Power
Set
Turn off BE EF 03 06 00 2A D3 01 00 00 60 00 00
Turn on BE EF 03 06 00 BA D2 01 00 00 60 01 00
Get
BE EF 03 06 00 19 D3 02 00 00 60 00 00
[Example return]
00 00 01 00 02 00
[Off] [On] [Cool down]
Input Source
Set
COMPUTER IN1 BE EF 03 06 00 FE D2 01 00 00 20 00 00
COMPUTER IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 3E D0 01 00 00 20 04 00
LAN BE EF 03 06 00 CE D5 01 00 00 20 0B 00
USB TYPE A BE EF 03 06 00 5E D1 01 00 00 20 06 00
USB TYPE B BE EF 03 06 00 FE D7 01 00 00 20 0C 00
HDMI 1 BE EF 03 06 00 0E D2 01 00 00 20 03 00
HDMI 2 BE EF 03 06 00 6E D6 01 00 00 20 0D 00
COMPONENT BE EF 03 06 00 AE D1 01 00 00 20 05 00
S-VIDEO BE EF 03 06 00 9E D3 01 00 00 20 02 00
VIDEO BE EF 03 06 00 6E D3 01 00 00 20 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 CD D2 02 00 00 20 00 00
Error Status
Get
BE EF 03 06 00 D9 D8 02 00 20 60 00 00
[Example return]
00 00 01 00 02 00 03 00
[Normal] [Cover error] [Fan error] [Lamp error]
04 00 05 00 07 00 08 00
[Temp error] [Air ow error] [Cold error] [Filter error]
FOCUS
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 6A 93 04 00 00 24 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 BB 92 05 00 00 24 00 00
ZOOM
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 96 92 04 00 01 24 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 47 93 05 00 01 24 00 00
LENS SHIFT - V
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 D2 92 04 00 02 24 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 03 93 05 00 02 24 00 00
LENS SHIFT - H
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 2E 93 04 00 03 24 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 FF 92 05 00 03 24 00 00
LENS SHIFT
CENTERING
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 B8 93 06 00 04 24 00 00
LENS MEMORY
INDEX
Set
1 BE EF 03 06 00 4B 92 01 00 07 24 00 00
2 BE EF 03 06 00 DB 93 01 00 07 24 01 00
3 BE EF 03 06 00 2B 93 01 00 07 24 02 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 78 92 02 00 07 24 00 00
LENS MEMORY
LOAD
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 E8 90 06 00 08 24 00 00
LENS MEMORY
SAVE
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 14 91 06 00 09 24 00 00
LENS MEMORY
CLEAR
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 50 91 06 00 0A 24 00 00
RS-232C Communication / Network command table (continued)
20
(continued on next page)
Names Operation Type Header
CRC
Command Data
Action Type Setting code
LENS MEMORY
LENS SHIFT - V
Get BE EF 03 06 00 A0 91 02 00 0D 24 00 00
LENS MEMORY
LENS SHIFT - H
Get BE EF 03 06 00 E4 91 02 00 0E 24 00 00
LENS MEMORY
LENS TYPE
Get BE EF 03 06 00 18 90 02 00 0F 24 00 00
MAGNIFY
Get BE EF 03 06 00 7C D2 02 00 07 30 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 1A D2 04 00 07 30 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 CB D3 05 00 07 30 00 00
MAGNIFY
Position H
Get BE EF 03 06 00 C8 D7 02 00 10 30 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 AE D7 04 00 10 30 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 7F D6 05 00 10 30 00 00
MAGNIFY
Position V
Get BE EF 03 06 00 34 D6 02 00 11 30 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 52 D6 04 00 11 30 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 83 D7 05 00 11 30 00 00
FREEZE
Set
NORMAL BE EF 03 06 00 83 D2 01 00 02 30 00 00
FREEZE BE EF 03 06 00 13 D3 01 00 02 30 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 B0 D2 02 00 02 30 00 00
SHADE
Set
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 F3 93 01 00 05 24 00 00
ON BE EF 03 06 00 63 92 01 00 05 24 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 C0 93 02 00 05 24 00 00
* PbyP
Set
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 3E 26 01 00 10 23 00 00
ON BE EF 03 06 00 AE 27 01 00 10 23 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 0D 26 02 00 10 23 00 00
* PbyP
MAIN AREA
Set
LEFT BE EF 03 06 00 7A 26 01 00 13 23 00 00
RIGHT BE EF 03 06 00 EA 27 01 00 13 23 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 49 26 02 00 13 23 00 00
* PbyP
RIGHT SOURCE
Set
COMPUTER 1 BE EF 03 06 00 86 27 01 00 12 23 00 00
COMPUTER 2 BE EF 03 06 00 46 25 01 00 12 23 04 00
HDMI 1 BE EF 03 06 00 76 27 01 00 12 23 03 00
HDMI 2 BE EF 03 06 00 16 23 01 00 12 23 0D 00
COMPONENT BE EF 03 06 00 D6 24 01 00 12 23 05 00
S-VIDEO BE EF 03 06 00 E6 26 01 00 12 23 02 00
VIDEO BE EF 03 06 00 16 26 01 00 12 23 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 B5 27 02 00 12 23 00 00
* PbyP
LEFT SOURCE
Set
COMPUTER 1 BE EF 03 06 00 F2 26 01 00 15 23 00 00
COMPUTER 2 BE EF 03 06 00 32 24 01 00 15 23 04 00
HDMI 1 BE EF 03 06 00 02 26 01 00 15 23 03 00
HDMI 2 BE EF 03 06 00 62 22 01 00 15 23 0D 00
COMPONENT BE EF 03 06 00 A2 25 01 00 15 23 05 00
S-VIDEO BE EF 03 06 00 92 27 01 00 15 23 02 00
VIDEO BE EF 03 06 00 62 27 01 00 15 23 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 C1 26 02 00 15 23 00 00
* PbyP SWAP
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 01 27 06 00 16 23 00 00
*) Only for CP-WU8440 and CP-WU8450.
RS-232C Communication / Network command table (continued)
21
(continued on next page)
Names Operation Type Header
CRC
Command Data
Action Type Setting code
PICTURE
MODE
Set
NORMAL BE EF 03 06 00 23 F6 01 00 BA 30 00 00
CINEMA BE EF 03 06 00 B3 F7 01 00 BA 30 01 00
DYNAMIC BE EF 03 06 00 E3 F4 01 00 BA 30 04 00
BOARD(BLACK) BE EF 03 06 00 E3 EF 01 00 BA 30 20 00
BOARD(GREEN) BE EF 03 06 00 73 EE 01 00 BA 30 21 00
WHITEBOARD BE EF 03 06 00 83 EE 01 00 BA 30 22 00
DAYTIME BE EF 03 06 00 E3 C7 01 00 BA 30 40 00
DICOM SIM. BE EF 03 06 00 73 C6 01 00 BA 30 41 00
Get
BE EF 03 06 00 10 F6 02 00 BA 30 00 00
[Example return]
00 00 01 00 04 00
[NORMAL] [CINEMA] [DYNAMIC]
20 00 21 00 22 00
[BOARD(BLACK)] [BOARD(GREEN)] [WHITEBOARD]
40 00 41 00 10 00
[DAY TIME] [DICOM SIM.] [Custom]
BRIGHTNESS
Get BE EF 03 06 00 89 D2 02 00 03 20 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 EF D2 04 00 03 20 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 3E D3 05 00 03 20 00 00
BRIGHTNESS
Reset
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 58 D3 06 00 00 70 00 00
CONTRAST
Get BE EF 03 06 00 FD D3 02 00 04 20 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 9B D3 04 00 04 20 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 4A D2 05 00 04 20 00 00
CONTRAST
Reset
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 A4 D2 06 00 01 70 00 00
GAMMA
Set
1 DEFAULT BE EF 03 06 00 07 E9 01 00 A1 30 20 00
1 CUSTOM BE EF 03 06 00 07 FD 01 00 A1 30 10 00
2 DEFAULT BE EF 03 06 00 97 E8 01 00 A1 30 21 00
2 CUSTOM BE EF 03 06 00 97 FC 01 00 A1 30 11 00
3 DEFAULT BE EF 03 06 00 67 E8 01 00 A1 30 22 00
3 CUSTOM BE EF 03 06 00 67 FC 01 00 A1 30 12 00
4 DEFAULT BE EF 03 06 00 F7 E9 01 00 A1 30 23 00
4 CUSTOM BE EF 03 06 00 F7 FD 01 00 A1 30 13 00
5 DEFAULT BE EF 03 06 00 C7 EB 01 00 A1 30 24 00
5 CUSTOM BE EF 03 06 00 C7 FF 01 00 A1 30 14 00
6 DEFAULT BE EF 03 06 00 57 EA 01 00 A1 30 25 00
6 CUSTOM BE EF 03 06 00 57 FE 01 00 A1 30 15 00
7 DEFAULT BE EF 03 06 00 A7 EA 01 00 A1 30 26 00
7 CUSTOM BE EF 03 06 00 A7 FE 01 00 A1 30 16 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 F4 F0 02 00 A1 30 00 00
User GAMMA
Pattern
Set
Off BE EF 03 06 00 FB FA 01 00 80 30 00 00
9 steps gray scale BE EF 03 06 00 6B FB 01 00 80 30 01 00
15 steps gray scale BE EF 03 06 00 9B FB 01 00 80 30 02 00
Ramp BE EF 03 06 00 0B FA 01 00 80 30 03 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 C8 FA 02 00 80 30 00 00
RS-232C Communication / Network command table (continued)
22
(continued on next page)
Names Operation Type Header
CRC
Command Data
Action Type Setting code
User GAMMA
Point 1
Get BE EF 03 06 00 08 FE 02 00 90 30 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 6E FE 04 00 90 30 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 BF FF 05 00 90 30 00 00
User GAMMA
Point 1 Reset
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 58 C2 06 00 50 70 00 00
User GAMMA
Point 2
Get BE EF 03 06 00 F4 FF 02 00 91 30 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 92 FF 04 00 91 30 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 43 FE 05 00 91 30 00 00
User GAMMA
Point 2 Reset
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 A4 C3 06 00 51 70 00 00
User GAMMA
Point 3
Get BE EF 03 06 00 B0 FF 02 00 92 30 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 D6 FF 04 00 92 30 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 07 FE 05 00 92 30 00 00
User GAMMA
Point 3 Reset
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 E0 C3 06 00 52 70 00 00
User GAMMA
Point 4
Get BE EF 03 06 00 4C FE 02 00 93 30 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 2A FE 04 00 93 30 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 FB FF 05 00 93 30 00 00
User GAMMA
Point 4 Reset
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 1C C2 06 00 53 70 00 00
User GAMMA
Point 5
Get BE EF 03 06 00 38 FF 02 00 94 30 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 5E FF 04 00 94 30 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 8F FE 05 00 94 30 00 00
User GAMMA
Point 5 Reset
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 68 C3 06 00 54 70 00 00
User GAMMA
Point 6
Get BE EF 03 06 00 C4 FE 02 00 95 30 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 A2 FE 04 00 95 30 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 73 FF 05 00 95 30 00 00
User GAMMA
Point 6 Reset
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 94 C2 06 00 55 70 00 00
User GAMMA
Point 7
Get BE EF 03 06 00 80 FE 02 00 96 30 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 E6 FE 04 00 96 30 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 37 FF 05 00 96 30 00 00
User GAMMA
Point 7 Reset
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 D0 C2 06 00 56 70 00 00
User GAMMA
Point 8
Get BE EF 03 06 00 7C FF 02 00 97 30 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 1A FF 04 00 97 30 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 CB FE 05 00 97 30 00 00
User GAMMA
Point 8 Reset
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 2C C3 06 00 57 70 00 00
RS-232C Communication / Network command table (continued)
23
(continued on next page)
Names Operation Type Header
CRC
Command Data
Action Type Setting code
COLOR TEMP
Set
1 HIGH BE EF 03 06 00 0B F5 01 00 B0 30 03 00
1 CUSTOM BE EF 03 06 00 CB F8 01 00 B0 30 13 00
2 MID BE EF 03 06 00 9B F4 01 00 B0 30 02 00
2 CUSTOM BE EF 03 06 00 5B F9 01 00 B0 30 12 00
3 LOW BE EF 03 06 00 6B F4 01 00 B0 30 01 00
3 CUSTOM BE EF 03 06 00 AB F9 01 00 B0 30 11 00
4 Hi-BRIGHT-1 BE EF 03 06 00 3B F2 01 00 B0 30 08 00
4 CUSTOM BE EF 03 06 00 FB FF 01 00 B0 30 18 00
5 Hi-BRIGHT-2 BE EF 03 06 00 AB F3 01 00 B0 30 09 00
5 CUSTOM BE EF 03 06 00 6B FE 01 00 B0 30 19 00
6 Hi-BRIGHT-3 BE EF 03 06 00 5B F3 01 00 B0 30 0A 00
6 CUSTOM BE EF 03 06 00 9B FE 01 00 B0 30 1A 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 C8 F5 02 00 B0 30 00 00
COLOR TEMP
GAIN R
Get BE EF 03 06 00 34 F4 02 00 B1 30 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 52 F4 04 00 B1 30 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 83 F5 05 00 B1 30 00 00
COLOR TEMP
GAIN R Reset
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 10 C6 06 00 46 70 00 00
COLOR TEMP
GAIN G
Get BE EF 03 06 00 70 F4 02 00 B2 30 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 16 F4 04 00 B2 30 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 C7 F5 05 00 B2 30 00 00
COLOR TEMP
GAIN G Reset
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 EC C7 06 00 47 70 00 00
COLOR TEMP
GAIN B
Get BE EF 03 06 00 8C F5 02 00 B3 30 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 EA F5 04 00 B3 30 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 3B F4 05 00 B3 30 00 00
COLOR TEMP
GAIN B Reset
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 F8 C4 06 00 48 70 00 00
COLOR TEMP
OFFSET R
Get BE EF 03 06 00 04 F5 02 00 B5 30 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 62 F5 04 00 B5 30 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 B3 F4 05 00 B5 30 00 00
COLOR TEMP
OFFSET R Reset
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 40 C5 06 00 4A 70 00 00
COLOR TEMP
OFFSET G
Get BE EF 03 06 00 40 F5 02 00 B6 30 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 26 F5 04 00 B6 30 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 F7 F4 05 00 B6 30 00 00
COLOR TEMP
OFFSET G Reset
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 BC C4 06 00 4B 70 00 00
COLOR TEMP
OFFSET B
Get BE EF 03 06 00 BC F4 02 00 B7 30 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 DA F4 04 00 B7 30 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 0B F5 05 00 B7 30 00 00
COLOR TEMP
OFFSET B Reset
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 C8 C5 06 00 4C 70 00 00
RS-232C Communication / Network command table (continued)
24
(continued on next page)
Names Operation Type Header
CRC
Command Data
Action Type Setting code
COLOR
Get BE EF 03 06 00 B5 72 02 00 02 22 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 D3 72 04 00 02 22 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 02 73 05 00 02 22 00 00
COLOR Reset
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 80 D0 06 00 0A 70 00 00
TINT
Get BE EF 03 06 00 49 73 02 00 03 22 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 2F 73 04 00 03 22 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 FE 72 05 00 03 22 00 00
TINT Reset
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 7C D1 06 00 0B 70 00 00
SHARPNESS
Get BE EF 03 06 00 F1 72 02 00 01 22 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 97 72 04 00 01 22 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 46 73 05 00 01 22 00 00
SHARPNESS
Reset
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 C4 D0 06 00 09 70 00 00
ACTIVE IRIS
Set
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 0B 22 01 00 04 33 00 00
THEATER BE EF 03 06 00 CB 2F 01 00 04 33 10 00
PRESENTATION BE EF 03 06 00 5B 2E 01 00 04 33 11 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 38 22 02 00 04 33 00 00
MY MEMORY
Load
Set
1 BE EF 03 06 00 0E D7 01 00 14 20 00 00
2 BE EF 03 06 00 9E D6 01 00 14 20 01 00
3 BE EF 03 06 00 6E D6 01 00 14 20 02 00
4 BE EF 03 06 00 FE D7 01 00 14 20 03 00
MY MEMORY
Save
Set
1 BE EF 03 06 00 F2 D6 01 00 15 20 00 00
2 BE EF 03 06 00 62 D7 01 00 15 20 01 00
3 BE EF 03 06 00 92 D7 01 00 15 20 02 00
4 BE EF 03 06 00 02 D6 01 00 15 20 03 00
ASPECT
Set
NORMAL BE EF 03 06 00 5E DD 01 00 08 20 10 00
4:3 BE EF 03 06 00 9E D0 01 00 08 20 00 00
16:9 BE EF 03 06 00 0E D1 01 00 08 20 01 00
16:10 BE EF 03 06 00 3E D6 01 00 08 20 0A 00
14:9 BE EF 03 06 00 CE D6 01 00 08 20 09 00
* NATIVE BE EF 03 06 00 5E D7 01 00 08 20 08 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 AD D0 02 00 08 20 00 00
OVER SCAN
Get BE EF 03 06 00 91 70 02 00 09 22 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 F7 70 04 00 09 22 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 26 71 05 00 09 22 00 00
OVER SCAN
Reset
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 EC D9 06 00 27 70 00 00
V POSITION
Get BE EF 03 06 00 0D 83 02 00 00 21 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 6B 83 04 00 00 21 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 BA 82 05 00 00 21 00 00
V POSITION
Reset
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 E0 D2 06 00 02 70 00 00
H POSITION
Get BE EF 03 06 00 F1 82 02 00 01 21 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 97 82 04 00 01 21 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 46 83 05 00 01 21 00 00
H POSITION
Reset
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 1C D3 06 00 03 70 00 00
*) Supported except for CP-X8150 and CP-X8160.
RS-232C Communication / Network command table (continued)
25
(continued on next page)
Names Operation Type Header
CRC
Command Data
Action Type Setting code
H PHASE
Get BE EF 03 06 00 49 83 02 00 03 21 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 2F 83 04 00 03 21 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 FE 82 05 00 03 21 00 00
H SIZE
Get BE EF 03 06 00 B5 82 02 00 02 21 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 D3 82 04 00 02 21 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 02 83 05 00 02 21 00 00
H SIZE Reset
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 68 D2 06 00 04 70 00 00
AUTO ADJUST
EXECUTE
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 91 D0 06 00 0A 20 00 00
PROGRESSIVE
Set
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 4A 72 01 00 07 22 00 00
TV BE EF 03 06 00 DA 73 01 00 07 22 01 00
FILM BE EF 03 06 00 2A 73 01 00 07 22 02 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 79 72 02 00 07 22 00 00
VIDEO NR
Set
LOW BE EF 03 06 00 26 72 01 00 06 22 01 00
MID BE EF 03 06 00 D6 72 01 00 06 22 02 00
HIGH BE EF 03 06 00 46 73 01 00 06 22 03 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 85 73 02 00 06 22 00 00
COLOR SPACE
Set
AUTO BE EF 03 06 00 0E 72 01 00 04 22 00 00
RGB BE EF 03 06 00 9E 73 01 00 04 22 01 00
SMPTE240 BE EF 03 06 00 6E 73 01 00 04 22 02 00
REC709 BE EF 03 06 00 FE 72 01 00 04 22 03 00
REC601 BE EF 03 06 00 CE 70 01 00 04 22 04 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 3D 72 02 00 04 22 00 00
COMPONENT
Set
COMPONENT BE EF 03 06 00 4A D7 01 00 17 20 00 00
SCART RGB BE EF 03 06 00 DA D6 01 00 17 20 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 79 D7 02 00 17 20 00 00
S-VIDEO
FORMAT
Set
AUTO BE EF 03 06 00 E6 70 01 00 12 22 0A 00
NTSC BE EF 03 06 00 86 74 01 00 12 22 04 00
PAL BE EF 03 06 00 16 75 01 00 12 22 05 00
SECAM BE EF 03 06 00 16 70 01 00 12 22 09 00
NTSC4.43 BE EF 03 06 00 26 77 01 00 12 22 02 00
M-PAL BE EF 03 06 00 86 71 01 00 12 22 08 00
N-PAL BE EF 03 06 00 76 74 01 00 12 22 07 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 75 76 02 00 12 22 00 00
C-VIDEO
FORMAT
Set
AUTO BE EF 03 06 00 A2 70 01 00 11 22 0A 00
NTSC BE EF 03 06 00 C2 74 01 00 11 22 04 00
PAL BE EF 03 06 00 52 75 01 00 11 22 05 00
SECAM BE EF 03 06 00 52 70 01 00 11 22 09 00
NTSC4.43 BE EF 03 06 00 62 77 01 00 11 22 02 00
M-PAL BE EF 03 06 00 C2 71 01 00 11 22 08 00
N-PAL BE EF 03 06 00 32 74 01 00 11 22 07 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 31 76 02 00 11 22 00 00
RS-232C Communication / Network command table (continued)
26
(continued on next page)
Names Operation Type Header
CRC
Command Data
Action Type Setting code
HDMI 1
FORMAT
Set
AUTO BE EF 03 06 00 BA 77 01 00 13 22 00 00
VIDEO BE EF 03 06 00 2A 76 01 00 13 22 01 00
COMPUTER BE EF 03 06 00 DA 76 01 00 13 22 02 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 89 77 02 00 13 22 00 00
HDMI 2
FORMAT
Set
AUTO BE EF 03 06 00 52 75 01 00 1D 22 00 00
VIDEO BE EF 03 06 00 C2 74 01 00 1D 22 01 00
COMPUTER BE EF 03 06 00 32 74 01 00 1D 22 02 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 61 75 02 00 1D 22 00 00
HDMI 1 RANGE
Set
AUTO BE EF 03 06 00 86 D8 01 00 22 20 00 00
NORMAL BE EF 03 06 00 16 D9 01 00 22 20 01 00
ENHANCED BE EF 03 06 00 E6 D9 01 00 22 20 02 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 B5 D8 02 00 22 20 00 00
HDMI 2 RANGE
Set
AUTO BE EF 03 06 00 7A D9 01 00 23 20 00 00
NORMAL BE EF 03 06 00 EA D8 01 00 23 20 01 00
ENHANCED BE EF 03 06 00 1A D8 01 00 23 20 02 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 49 D9 02 00 23 20 00 00
COMPUTER IN1
Set
AUTO BE EF 03 06 00 CE D6 01 00 10 20 03 00
SYNC ON G OFF BE EF 03 06 00 5E D7 01 00 10 20 02 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 0D D6 02 00 10 20 00 00
COMPUTER IN2
Set
AUTO BE EF 03 06 00 32 D7 01 00 11 20 03 00
SYNC ON G OFF BE EF 03 06 00 A2 D6 01 00 11 20 02 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 F1 D7 02 00 11 20 00 00
FRAME LOCK -
COMPUTER IN1
Set
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 3B C2 01 00 50 30 00 00
ON BE EF 03 06 00 AB C3 01 00 50 30 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 08 C2 02 00 50 30 00 00
FRAME LOCK -
COMPUTER IN2
Set
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 0B C3 01 00 54 30 00 00
ON BE EF 03 06 00 9B C2 01 00 54 30 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 38 C3 02 00 54 30 00 00
FRAME LOCK -
HDMI 1
Set
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 7F C2 01 00 53 30 00 00
ON BE EF 03 06 00 EF C3 01 00 53 30 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 4C C2 02 00 53 30 00 00
FRAME LOCK -
HDMI 2
Set
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 97 C0 01 00 5D 30 00 00
ON BE EF 03 06 00 07 C1 01 00 5D 30 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 A4 C0 02 00 5D 30 00 00
RS-232C Communication / Network command table (continued)
27
(continued on next page)
Names Operation Type Header
CRC
Command Data
Action Type Setting code
AUTO
KEYSTONE V
EXECUTE
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 E5 D1 06 00 0D 20 00 00
KEYSTONE V
Get BE EF 03 06 00 B9 D3 02 00 07 20 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 DF D3 04 00 07 20 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 0E D2 05 00 07 20 00 00
KEYSTONE V
Reset
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 08 D0 06 00 0C 70 00 00
KEYSTONE H
Get BE EF 03 06 00 E9 D0 02 00 0B 20 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 8F D0 04 00 0B 20 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 5E D1 05 00 0B 20 00 00
KEYSTONE H
Reset
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 98 D8 06 00 20 70 00 00
PERFECT FIT
Set
Disable BE EF 03 06 00 FE 88 01 00 20 21 00 00
Enable BE EF 03 06 00 6E 89 01 00 20 21 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 CD 88 02 00 20 21 00 00
PERFECT FIT
Left Top - H
Get BE EF 03 06 00 31 89 02 00 21 21 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 57 89 04 00 21 21 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 86 88 05 00 21 21 00 00
PERFECT FIT
Left Top - V
Get BE EF 03 06 00 75 89 02 00 22 21 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 13 89 04 00 22 21 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 C2 88 05 00 22 21 00 00
PERFECT FIT
Right Top - H
Get BE EF 03 06 00 89 88 02 00 23 21 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 EF 88 04 00 23 21 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 3E 89 05 00 23 21 00 00
PERFECT FIT
Right Top - V
Get BE EF 03 06 00 FD 89 02 00 24 21 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 9B 89 04 00 24 21 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 4A 88 05 00 24 21 00 00
PERFECT FIT
Left Bottom - H
Get BE EF 03 06 00 01 88 02 00 25 21 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 67 88 04 00 25 21 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 B6 89 05 00 25 21 00 00
PERFECT FIT
Left Bottom - V
Get BE EF 03 06 00 45 88 02 00 26 21 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 23 88 04 00 26 21 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 F2 89 05 00 26 21 00 00
PERFECT FIT
Right Bottom - H
Get BE EF 03 06 00 B9 89 02 00 27 21 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 DF 89 04 00 27 21 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 0E 88 05 00 27 21 00 00
PERFECT FIT
Right Bottom - V
Get BE EF 03 06 00 AD 8A 02 00 28 21 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 CB 8A 04 00 28 21 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 1A 8B 05 00 28 21 00 00
PERFECT FIT
All Corners Reset
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 D5 8A 06 00 29 21 00 00
RS-232C Communication / Network command table (continued)
28
(continued on next page)
Names Operation Type Header
CRC
Command Data
Action Type Setting code
* PERFECT FIT
Left Side
Distortion
Get BE EF 03 06 00 31 97 02 00 41 21 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 57 97 04 00 41 21 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 86 96 05 00 41 21 00 00
* PERFECT FIT
Right Side
Distortion
Get BE EF 03 06 00 75 97 02 00 42 21 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 13 97 04 00 42 21 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 C2 96 05 00 42 21 00 00
* PERFECT FIT
Distortion
Position V
Get BE EF 03 06 00 89 96 02 00 43 21 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 EF 96 04 00 43 21 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 3E 97 05 00 43 21 00 00
* PERFECT FIT
Top Side
Distortion
Get BE EF 03 06 00 FD 97 02 00 44 21 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 9B 97 04 00 44 21 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 4A 96 05 00 44 21 00 00
* PERFECT FIT
Bottom Side
Distortion
Get BE EF 03 06 00 01 96 02 00 45 21 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 67 96 04 00 45 21 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 B6 97 05 00 45 21 00 00
* PERFECT FIT
Distortion
Position H
Get BE EF 03 06 00 45 96 02 00 46 21 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 23 96 04 00 46 21 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 F2 97 05 00 46 21 00 00
* PERFECT FIT
All Sides Reset
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 3D 96 06 00 47 21 00 00
PERFECT FIT
Memory Save-1
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 29 95 06 00 48 21 00 00
PERFECT FIT
Memory Save-2
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 D5 94 06 00 49 21 00 00
PERFECT FIT
Memory Save-3
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 91 94 06 00 4A 21 00 00
PERFECT FIT
Memory Load-1
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 6D 95 06 00 4B 21 00 00
PERFECT FIT
Memory Load-2
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 19 94 06 00 4C 21 00 00
PERFECT FIT
Memory Load-3
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 E5 95 06 00 4D 21 00 00
AUTO ECO
MODE
Set
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 FB 27 01 00 10 33 00 00
ON BE EF 03 06 00 6B 26 01 00 10 33 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 C8 27 02 00 10 33 00 00
ECO MODE
Set
NORMAL BE EF 03 06 00 3B 23 01 00 00 33 00 00
ECO BE EF 03 06 00 AB 22 01 00 00 33 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 08 23 02 00 00 33 00 00
INSTALLATION
Set
FRONT / DESKTOP
BE EF 03 06 00 C7 D2 01 00 01 30 00 00
REAR / DESKTOP
BE EF 03 06 00 57 D3 01 00 01 30 01 00
REAR / CEILING
BE EF 03 06 00 A7 D3 01 00 01 30 02 00
FRONT / CEILING
BE EF 03 06 00 37 D2 01 00 01 30 03 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 F4 D2 02 00 01 30 00 00
*) Only for CP-X8150, CP-X8160, CP-WX8240 and CP-WX8255.
RS-232C Communication / Network command table (continued)
29
(continued on next page)
Names Operation Type Header
CRC
Command Data
Action Type Setting code
STANDBY
MODE
Set
NORMAL BE EF 03 06 00 D6 D2 01 00 01 60 00 00
SAVING BE EF 03 06 00 46 D3 01 00 01 60 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 E5 D2 02 00 01 60 00 00
MONITOR OUT -
COMPUTER IN1
Set
COMPUTER IN1 BE EF 03 06 00 3E F4 01 00 B0 20 00 00
* COMPUTER IN2
BE EF 03 06 00 FE F6 01 00 B0 20 04 00
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 CE B5 01 00 B0 20 FF 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 0D F4 02 00 B0 20 00 00
MONITOR OUT -
COMPUTER IN2
Set
* COMPUTER IN1
BE EF 03 06 00 0E F5 01 00 B4 20 00 00
COMPUTER IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 CE F7 01 00 B4 20 04 00
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 FE B4 01 00 B4 20 FF 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 3D F5 02 00 B4 20 00 00
MONITOR OUT -
LAN
Set
COMPUTER IN1 BE EF 03 06 00 1A F6 01 00 BB 20 00 00
COMPUTER IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 DA F4 01 00 BB 20 04 00
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 EA B7 01 00 BB 20 FF 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 29 F6 02 00 BB 20 00 00
MONITOR OUT-
USB TYPE A
Set
COMPUTER IN1 BE EF 03 06 00 B6 F4 01 00 B6 20 00 00
COMPUTER IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 76 F6 01 00 B6 20 04 00
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 46 B5 01 00 B6 20 FF 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 85 F4 02 00 B6 20 00 00
MONITOR OUT -
USB TYPE B
Set
COMPUTER IN1 BE EF 03 06 00 6E F7 01 00 BC 20 00 00
COMPUTER IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 AE F5 01 00 BC 20 04 00
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 9E B6 01 00 BC 20 FF 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 5D F7 02 00 BC 20 00 00
MONITOR OUT
- HDMI 1
Set
COMPUTER IN1 BE EF 03 06 00 7A F4 01 00 B3 20 00 00
COMPUTER IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 BA F6 01 00 B3 20 04 00
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 8A B5 01 00 B3 20 FF 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 49 F4 02 00 B3 20 00 00
MONITOR OUT
- HDMI 2
Set
COMPUTER IN1 BE EF 03 06 00 92 F6 01 00 BD 20 00 00
COMPUTER IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 52 F4 01 00 BD 20 04 00
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 62 B7 01 00 BD 20 FF 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 A1 F6 02 00 BD 20 00 00
MONITOR OUT
- COMPONENT
Set
COMPUTER IN1 BE EF 03 06 00 F2 F4 01 00 B5 20 00 00
COMPUTER IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 32 F6 01 00 B5 20 04 00
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 02 B5 01 00 B5 20 FF 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 C1 F4 02 00 B5 20 00 00
MONITOR OUT
- S-VIDEO
Set
COMPUTER IN1 BE EF 03 06 00 86 F5 01 00 B2 20 00 00
COMPUTER IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 46 F7 01 00 B2 20 04 00
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 76 B4 01 00 B2 20 FF 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 B5 F5 02 00 B2 20 00 00
MONITOR OUT
- VIDEO
Set
COMPUTER IN1 BE EF 03 06 00 C2 F5 01 00 B1 20 00 00
COMPUTER IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 02 F7 01 00 B1 20 04 00
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 32 B4 01 00 B1 20 FF 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 F1 F5 02 00 B1 20 00 00
MONITOR OUT
- STANDBY
Set
COMPUTER IN1 BE EF 03 06 00 2A F7 01 00 BF 20 00 00
COMPUTER IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 EA F5 01 00 BF 20 04 00
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 DA B6 01 00 BF 20 FF 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 19 F7 02 00 BF 20 00 00
*) Only for CP-WU8440 and CP-WU8450.
RS-232C Communication / Network command table (continued)
30
(continued on next page)
RS-232C Communication / Network command table (continued)
Names Operation Type Header
CRC
Command Data
Action Type Setting code
VOLUME -
COMPUTER IN1
Get BE EF 03 06 00 CD CC 02 00 60 20 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 AB CC 04 00 60 20 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 7A CD 05 00 60 20 00 00
VOLUME -
COMPUTER IN2
Get BE EF 03 06 00 FD CD 02 00 64 20 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 9B CD 04 00 64 20 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 4A CC 05 00 64 20 00 00
VOLUME - LAN
Get BE EF 03 06 00 E9 CE 02 00 6B 20 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 8F CE 04 00 6B 20 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 5E CF 05 00 6B 20 00 00
VOLUME -
USB TYPE A
Get BE EF 03 06 00 45 CC 02 00 66 20 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 23 CC 04 00 66 20 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 F2 CD 05 00 66 20 00 00
VOLUME -
USB TYPE B
Get BE EF 03 06 00 9D CF 02 00 6C 20 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 FB CF 04 00 6C 20 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 2A CE 05 00 6C 20 00 00
VOLUME -
HDMI 1
Get BE EF 03 06 00 89 CC 02 00 63 20 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 EF CC 04 00 63 20 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 3E CD 05 00 63 20 00 00
VOLUME -
HDMI 2
Get BE EF 03 06 00 61 CE 02 00 6D 20 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 07 CE 04 00 6D 20 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 D6 CF 05 00 6D 20 00 00
VOLUME -
COMPONENT
Get BE EF 03 06 00 01 CC 02 00 65 20 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 67 CC 04 00 65 20 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 B6 CD 05 00 65 20 00 00
VOLUME -
S-VIDEO
Get BE EF 03 06 00 75 CD 02 00 62 20 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 13 CD 04 00 62 20 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 C2 CC 05 00 62 20 00 00
VOLUME -
VIDEO
Get BE EF 03 06 00 31 CD 02 00 61 20 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 57 CD 04 00 61 20 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 86 CC 05 00 61 20 00 00
VOLUME -
STANDBY
Get BE EF 03 06 00 D9 CF 02 00 6F 20 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 BF CF 04 00 6F 20 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 6E CE 05 00 6F 20 00 00
VOLUME - ALL
Get BE EF 03 06 00 CD C3 02 00 50 20 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 AB C3 04 00 50 20 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 7A C2 05 00 50 20 00 00
MUTE
Set
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 46 D3 01 00 02 20 00 00
ON BE EF 03 06 00 D6 D2 01 00 02 20 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 75 D3 02 00 02 20 00 00
SPEAKER
Set
ON BE EF 03 06 00 FE D4 01 00 1C 20 01 00
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 6E D5 01 00 1C 20 00 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 5D D5 02 00 1C 20 00 00
RS-232C Communication / Network command table (continued)
31
(continued on next page)
RS-232C Communication / Network command table (continued)
Names Operation Type Header
CRC
Command Data
Action Type Setting code
AUDIO
SOURCE -
COMPUTER IN1
Set
AUDIO IN1 BE EF 03 06 00 6E DC 01 00 30 20 01 00
AUDIO IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 9E DC 01 00 30 20 02 00
AUDIO IN3 BE EF 03 06 00 0E DD 01 00 30 20 03 00
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 FE DD 01 00 30 20 00 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 CD DD 02 00 30 20 00 00
AUDIO
SOURCE -
COMPUTER IN2
Set
AUDIO IN1 BE EF 03 06 00 5E DD 01 00 34 20 01 00
AUDIO IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 AE DD 01 00 34 20 02 00
AUDIO IN3 BE EF 03 06 00 3E DC 01 00 34 20 03 00
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 CE DC 01 00 34 20 00 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 FD DC 02 00 34 20 00 00
AUDIO
SOURCE -
LAN
Set
AUDIO IN1 BE EF 03 06 00 4A DE 01 00 3B 20 01 00
AUDIO IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 BA DE 01 00 3B 20 02 00
AUDIO IN3 BE EF 03 06 00 2A DF 01 00 3B 20 03 00
AUDIO LAN BE EF 03 06 00 8A D3 01 00 3B 20 11 00
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 DA DF 01 00 3B 20 00 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 E9 DF 02 00 3B 20 00 00
AUDIO
SOURCE -
USB TYPE A
Set
AUDIO IN1 BE EF 03 06 00 E6 DC 01 00 36 20 01 00
AUDIO IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 16 DC 01 00 36 20 02 00
AUDIO IN3 BE EF 03 06 00 86 DD 01 00 36 20 03 00
AUDIO USB TYPE A
BE EF 03 06 00 B6 D0 01 00 36 20 10 00
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 76 DD 01 00 36 20 00 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 45 DD 02 00 36 20 00 00
AUDIO
SOURCE -
USB TYPE B
Set
AUDIO IN1 BE EF 03 06 00 3E DF 01 00 3C 20 01 00
AUDIO IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 CE DF 01 00 3C 20 02 00
AUDIO IN3 BE EF 03 06 00 5E DE 01 00 3C 20 03 00
AUDIO USB TYPE B
BE EF 03 06 00 0E D2 01 00 3C 20 12 00
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 AE DE 01 00 3C 20 00 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 9D DE 02 00 3C 20 00 00
AUDIO
SOURCE -
HDMI 1
Set
AUDIO IN1 BE EF 03 06 00 2A DC 01 00 33 20 01 00
AUDIO IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 DA DC 01 00 33 20 02 00
AUDIO IN3 BE EF 03 06 00 4A DD 01 00 33 20 03 00
AUDIO HDMI 1 BE EF 03 06 00 7A C4 01 00 33 20 20 00
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 BA DD 01 00 33 20 00 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 89 DD 02 00 33 20 00 00
AUDIO
SOURCE -
HDMI 2
Set
AUDIO IN1 BE EF 03 06 00 C2 DE 01 00 3D 20 01 00
AUDIO IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 32 DE 01 00 3D 20 02 00
AUDIO IN3 BE EF 03 06 00 A2 DF 01 00 3D 20 03 00
AUDIO HDMI 2 BE EF 03 06 00 02 C7 01 00 3D 20 21 00
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 52 DF 01 00 3D 20 00 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 61 DF 02 00 3D 20 00 00
AUDIO
SOURCE -
COMPONENT
Set
AUDIO IN1 BE EF 03 06 00 A2 DC 01 00 35 20 01 00
AUDIO IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 52 DC 01 00 35 20 02 00
AUDIO IN3 BE EF 03 06 00 C2 DD 01 00 35 20 03 00
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 32 DD 01 00 35 20 00 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 01 DD 02 00 35 20 00 00
RS-232C Communication / Network command table (continued)
32
(continued on next page)
Names Operation Type Header
CRC
Command Data
Action Type Setting code
AUDIO
SOURCE -
S-VIDEO
Set
AUDIO IN1 BE EF 03 06 00 D6 DD 01 00 32 20 01 00
AUDIO IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 26 DD 01 00 32 20 02 00
AUDIO IN3 BE EF 03 06 00 B6 DC 01 00 32 20 03 00
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 46 DC 01 00 32 20 00 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 75 DC 02 00 32 20 00 00
AUDIO
SOURCE -
VIDEO
Set
AUDIO IN1 BE EF 03 06 00 92 DD 01 00 31 20 01 00
AUDIO IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 62 DD 01 00 31 20 02 00
AUDIO IN3 BE EF 03 06 00 F2 DC 01 00 31 20 03 00
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 02 DC 01 00 31 20 00 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 31 DC 02 00 31 20 00 00
AUDIO
SOURCE -
AUDIO OUT
STANDBY
Set
AUDIO IN1 BE EF 03 06 00 7A DF 01 00 3F 20 01 00
AUDIO IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 8A DF 01 00 3F 20 02 00
AUDIO IN3 BE EF 03 06 00 1A DE 01 00 3F 20 03 00
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 EA DE 01 00 3F 20 00 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 D9 DE 02 00 3F 20 00 00
LAN SOUND
ENABLE
Set
Disable BE EF 03 06 00 BA F0 01 00 A3 20 00 00
Enable BE EF 03 06 00 2A F1 01 00 A3 20 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 89 F0 02 00 A3 20 00 00
USB TYPE A
SOUND
ENABLE
Set
Disable BE EF 03 06 00 CE F1 01 00 A4 20 00 00
Enable BE EF 03 06 00 5E F0 01 00 A4 20 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 FD F1 02 00 A4 20 00 00
USB TYPE B
SOUND
ENABLE
Set
Disable BE EF 03 06 00 32 F0 01 00 A5 20 00 00
Enable BE EF 03 06 00 A2 F1 01 00 A5 20 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 01 F0 02 00 A5 20 00 00
HDMI 1 AUDIO
Set
1 BE EF 03 06 00 AE C6 01 00 40 20 01 00
2 BE EF 03 06 00 5E C6 01 00 40 20 02 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 0D C7 02 00 40 20 00 00
HDMI 2 AUDIO
Set
1 BE EF 03 06 00 52 C7 01 00 41 20 01 00
2 BE EF 03 06 00 A2 C7 01 00 41 20 02 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 F1 C6 02 00 41 20 00 00
LANGUAGE
Set
ENGLISH BE EF 03 06 00 F7 D3 01 00 05 30 00 00
FRANÇAIS BE EF 03 06 00 67 D2 01 00 05 30 01 00
DEUTSCH BE EF 03 06 00 97 D2 01 00 05 30 02 00
ESPAÑOL BE EF 03 06 00 07 D3 01 00 05 30 03 00
ITALIANO BE EF 03 06 00 37 D1 01 00 05 30 04 00
NORSK BE EF 03 06 00 A7 D0 01 00 05 30 05 00
NEDERLANDS BE EF 03 06 00 57 D0 01 00 05 30 06 00
PORTUGUÊS BE EF 03 06 00 C7 D1 01 00 05 30 07 00
日本語
BE EF 03 06 00 37 D4 01 00 05 30 08 00
ㇵԧЁ᭛
BE EF 03 06 00 A7 D5 01 00 05 30 09 00
᜗᫿խ֮
BE EF 03 06 00 37 DE 01 00 05 30 10 00
㫥ዶ⬽ BE EF 03 06 00 57 D5 01 00 05 30 0A 00
SVENSKA BE EF 03 06 00 C7 D4 01 00 05 30 0B 00
PУCCKИЙ BE EF 03 06 00 F7 D6 01 00 05 30 0C 00
SUOMI BE EF 03 06 00 67 D7 01 00 05 30 0D 00
POLSKI BE EF 03 06 00 97 D7 01 00 05 30 0E 00
NOTE) Not all of the languages in this table are supported.
RS-232C Communication / Network command table (continued)
33
(continued on next page)
Names Operation Type Header
CRC
Command Data
Action Type Setting code
LANGUAGE
Set
TÜRKÇE BE EF 03 06 00 07 D6 01 00 05 30 0F 00
DANSK BE EF 03 06 00 A7 DF 01 00 05 30 11 00
ČESKY BE EF 03 06 00 57 DF 01 00 05 30 12 00
MAGYAR BE EF 03 06 00 C7 DE 01 00 05 30 13 00
ROMÂNĂ BE EF 03 06 00 F7 DC 01 00 05 30 14 00
SLOVENSKI BE EF 03 06 00 67 DD 01 00 05 30 15 00
HRVATSKI BE EF 03 06 00 97 DD 01 00 05 30 16 00
ΕΛΛΗΝΙΚΑ BE EF 03 06 00 07 DC 01 00 05 30 17 00
LIETUVIŲ BE EF 03 06 00 F7 D9 01 00 05 30 18 00
EESTI BE EF 03 06 00 67 D8 01 00 05 30 19 00
LATVIEŠU BE EF 03 06 00 97 D8 01 00 05 30 1A 00
ไทย
BE EF 03 06 00 07 D9 01 00 05 30 1B 00
ﺍﻝﻝﻍﺓ ﺍﻝﻉﺭﺏﯼﺓ
BE EF 03 06 00 37 DB 01 00 05 30 1C 00
ﻑﺍﺭﺱﻯ‎
BE EF 03 06 00 A7 DA 01 00 05 30 1D 00
PORTUGUÊS BRA BE EF 03 06 00 57 DA 01 00 05 30 1E 00
BAHASA IND BE EF 03 06 00 C7 DB 01 00 05 30 1F 00
TIENG VIET BE EF 03 06 00 37 CA 01 00 05 30 20 00
NOTE) Not all of the languages in this table are supported.
Get BE EF 03 06 00 C4 D3 02 00 05 30 00 00
MENU
POSITION V
Get BE EF 03 06 00 40 D7 02 00 16 30 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 26 D7 04 00 16 30 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 F7 D6 05 00 16 30 00 00
MENU
POSITION V
Reset
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 A8 C7 06 00 44 70 00 00
MENU
POSITION H
Get BE EF 03 06 00 04 D7 02 00 15 30 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 62 D7 04 00 15 30 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 B3 D6 05 00 15 30 00 00
MENU
POSITION H
Reset
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 DC C6 06 00 43 70 00 00
BLANK
Set
MyScreen BE EF 03 06 00 FB CA 01 00 00 30 20 00
ORIGINAL BE EF 03 06 00 FB E2 01 00 00 30 40 00
BLUE BE EF 03 06 00 CB D3 01 00 00 30 03 00
WHITE BE EF 03 06 00 6B D0 01 00 00 30 05 00
BLACK BE EF 03 06 00 9B D0 01 00 00 30 06 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 08 D3 02 00 00 30 00 00
BLANK On/Off
Set
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 FB D8 01 00 20 30 00 00
ON BE EF 03 06 00 6B D9 01 00 20 30 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 C8 D8 02 00 20 30 00 00
START UP
Set
MyScreen BE EF 03 06 00 CB CB 01 00 04 30 20 00
ORIGINAL BE EF 03 06 00 0B D2 01 00 04 30 00 00
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 9B D3 01 00 04 30 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 38 D2 02 00 04 30 00 00
MyScreen Lock
Set
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 3B EF 01 00 C0 30 00 00
ON BE EF 03 06 00 AB EE 01 00 C0 30 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 08 EF 02 00 C0 30 00 00
MESSAGE
Set
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 8F D6 01 00 17 30 00 00
ON BE EF 03 06 00 1F D7 01 00 17 30 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 BC D6 02 00 17 30 00 00
RS-232C Communication / Network command table (continued)
34
(continued on next page)
Names Operation Type Header
CRC
Command Data
Action Type Setting code
TEMPLATE
Set
TEST PATTERN BE EF 03 06 00 43 D9 01 00 22 30 00 00
DOT-LINE 1 BE EF 03 06 00 D3 D8 01 00 22 30 01 00
DOT-LINE 2 BE EF 03 06 00 23 D8 01 00 22 30 02 00
DOT-LINE 3 BE EF 03 06 00 B3 D9 01 00 22 30 03 00
DOT-LINE 4 BE EF 03 06 00 83 DB 01 00 22 30 04 00
CIRCLE 1 BE EF 03 06 00 13 DA 01 00 22 30 05 00
CIRCLE 2 BE EF 03 06 00 E3 DA 01 00 22 30 06 00
MAP 1 BE EF 03 06 00 83 D4 01 00 22 30 10 00
MAP 2 BE EF 03 06 00 13 D5 01 00 22 30 11 00
STACK BE EF 03 06 00 83 C0 01 00 22 30 20 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 70 D9 02 00 22 30 00 00
TEMPLATE
On/Off
Set
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 BF D8 01 00 23 30 00 00
ON BE EF 03 06 00 2F D9 01 00 23 30 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 8C D8 02 00 23 30 00 00
C. C. - DISPLAY
Set
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 FA 62 01 00 00 37 00 00
ON BE EF 03 06 00 6A 63 01 00 00 37 01 00
AUTO BE EF 03 06 00 9A 63 01 00 00 37 02 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 C9 62 02 00 00 37 00 00
C. C. - MODE
Set
CAPTIONS BE EF 03 06 00 06 63 01 00 01 37 00 00
TEXT BE EF 03 06 00 96 62 01 00 01 37 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 35 63 02 00 01 37 00 00
C. C. -
CHANNEL
Set
1 BE EF 03 06 00 D2 62 01 00 02 37 01 00
2 BE EF 03 06 00 22 62 01 00 02 37 02 00
3 BE EF 03 06 00 B2 63 01 00 02 37 03 00
4 BE EF 03 06 00 82 61 01 00 02 37 04 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 71 63 02 00 02 37 00 00
SOURCE SKIP -
COMPUTER IN1
Set
NORMAL BE EF 03 06 00 FE 78 01 00 20 22 00 00
SKIP BE EF 03 06 00 6E 79 01 00 20 22 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 CD 78 02 00 20 22 00 00
SOURCE SKIP -
COMPUTER IN2
Set
NORMAL BE EF 03 06 00 CE 79 01 00 24 22 00 00
SKIP BE EF 03 06 00 5E 78 01 00 24 22 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 FD 79 02 00 24 22 00 00
SOURCE SKIP -
LAN
Set
NORMAL BE EF 03 06 00 DA 7A 01 00 2B 22 00 00
SKIP BE EF 03 06 00 4A 7B 01 00 2B 22 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 E9 7A 02 00 2B 22 00 00
SOURCE SKIP -
USB TYPE A
Set
NORMAL BE EF 03 06 00 76 78 01 00 26 22 00 00
SKIP BE EF 03 06 00 E6 79 01 00 26 22 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 45 78 02 00 26 22 00 00
SOURCE SKIP -
USB TYPE B
Set
NORMAL BE EF 03 06 00 AE 7B 01 00 2C 22 00 00
SKIP BE EF 03 06 00 3E 7A 01 00 2C 22 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 9D 7B 02 00 2C 22 00 00
SOURCE SKIP -
HDMI 1
Set
NORMAL BE EF 03 06 00 BA 78 01 00 23 22 00 00
SKIP BE EF 03 06 00 2A 79 01 00 23 22 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 89 78 02 00 23 22 00 00
SOURCE SKIP -
HDMI 2
Set
NORMAL BE EF 03 06 00 52 7A 01 00 2D 22 00 00
SKIP BE EF 03 06 00 C2 7B 01 00
2D 22 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 61 7A 02 00 2D 22 00 00
RS-232C Communication / Network command table (continued)
35
(continued on next page)
Names Operation Type Header
CRC
Command Data
Action Type Setting code
SOURCE SKIP -
COMPONENT
Set
NORMAL BE EF 03 06 00 32 78 01 00 25 22 00 00
SKIP BE EF 03 06 00 A2 79 01 00 25 22 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 01 78 02 00 25 22 00 00
SOURCE SKIP -
S- VIDEO
Set
NORMAL BE EF 03 06 00 46 79 01 00 22 22 00 00
SKIP BE EF 03 06 00 D6 78 01 00 22 22 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 75 79 02 00 22 22 00 00
SOURCE SKIP -
VIDEO
Set
NORMAL BE EF 03 06 00 02 79 01 00 21 22 00 00
SKIP BE EF 03 06 00 92 78 01 00 21 22 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 31 79 02 00 21 22 00 00
AUTO SEARCH
Set
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 B6 D6 01 00 16 20 00 00
ON BE EF 03 06 00 26 D7 01 00 16 20 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 85 D6 02 00 16 20 00 00
AUTO
KEYSTONE
Set
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 EA D1 01 00 0F 20 00 00
ON BE EF 03 06 00 7A D0 01 00 0F 20 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 D9 D1 02 00 0F 20 00 00
DIRECT
POWER ON
Set
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 3B 89 01 00 20 31 00 00
ON BE EF 03 06 00 AB 88 01 00 20 31 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 08 89 02 00 20 31 00 00
AUTO POWER
OFF
Get BE EF 03 06 00 08 86 02 00 10 31 00 00
Increment BE EF 03 06 00 6E 86 04 00 10 31 00 00
Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 BF 87 05 00 10 31 00 00
SHADE TIMER
Set
1h BE EF 03 06 00 27 92 01 00 06 24 01 00
3h BE EF 03 06 00 47 93 01 00 06 24 03 00
6h BE EF 03 06 00 17 90 01 00 06 24 06 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 84 93 02 00 06 24 00 00
USB TYPE B
Set
MOUSE BE EF 03 06 00 FF 23 01 00 50 26 00 00
USB DISPLAY BE EF 03 06 00 6F 22 01 00 50 26 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 CC 23 02 00 50 26 00 00
LAMP TIME
Lower Bytes
Get BE EF 03 06 00 C2 FF 02 00 90 10 00 00
LAMP TIME
Higher Bytes
Get BE EF 03 06 00 2A FD 02 00 9E 10 00 00
LAMP TIME
Reset
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 58 DC 06 00 30 70 00 00
FILTER TIME
Lower Bytes
Get BE EF 03 06 00 C2 F0 02 00 A0 10 00 00
FILTER TIME
Higher Bytes
Get BE EF 03 06 00 D6 FC 02 00 9F 10 00 00
FILTER TIME
Reset
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 98 C6 06 00 40 70 00 00
RS-232C Communication / Network command table (continued)
36
(continued on next page)
Names Operation Type Header
CRC
Command Data
Action Type Setting code
MY BUTTON-1
Set
SLIDESHOW BE EF 03 06 00 9A 2B 01 00 00 36 22 00
MY IMAGE BE EF 03 06 00 5A 3D 01 00 00 36 16 00
MESSENGER BE EF 03 06 00 AA 29 01 00 00 36 25 00
SHADE BE EF 03 06 00 5A 26 01 00 00 36 32 00
INFORMATION BE EF 03 06 00 FA 3E 01 00 00 36 10 00
AUTO KEYSTONE V
BE EF 03 06 00 6A 3F 01 00 00 36 11 00
MY MEMORY BE EF 03 06 00 9A 3F 01 00 00 36 12 00
ACTIVE IRIS BE EF 03 06 00 AA 3D 01 00 00 36 15 00
PICTURE MODE BE EF 03 06 00 0A 3E 01 00 00 36 13 00
FILTER RESET BE EF 03 06 00 3A 3C 01 00 00 36 14 00
TEMPLATE BE EF 03 06 00 CA 39 01 00 00 36 1B 00
MUTE BE EF 03 06 00 FA 20 01 00 00 36 38 00
* PbyP SWAP BE EF 03 06 00 5A 38 01 00 00 36 1A 00
RESOLUTION BE EF 03 06 00 9A 3A 01 00 00 36 1E 00
ECO MODE BE EF 03 06 00 0A 25 01 00 00 36 37 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 09 33 02 00 00 36 00 00
MY BUTTON-2
Set
SLIDESHOW BE EF 03 06 00 66 2A 01 00 01 36 22 00
MY IMAGE BE EF 03 06 00 A6 3C 01 00 01 36 16 00
MESSENGER BE EF 03 06 00 56 28 01 00 01 36 25 00
SHADE BE EF 03 06 00 A6 27 01 00 01 36 32 00
INFORMATION BE EF 03 06 00 06 3F 01 00 01 36 10 00
AUTO KEYSTONE V
BE EF 03 06 00 96 3E 01 00 01 36 11 00
MY MEMORY BE EF 03 06 00 66 3E 01 00 01 36 12 00
ACTIVE IRIS BE EF 03 06 00 56 3C 01 00 01 36 15 00
PICTURE MODE BE EF 03 06 00 F6 3F 01 00 01 36 13 00
FILTER RESET BE EF 03 06 00 C6 3D 01 00 01 36 14 00
TEMPLATE BE EF 03 06 00 36 38 01 00 01 36 1B 00
MUTE BE EF 03 06 00 06 21 01 00 01 36 38 00
* PbyP SWAP BE EF 03 06 00 A6 39 01 00 01 36 1A 00
RESOLUTION BE EF 03 06 00 66 3B 01 00 01 36 1E 00
ECO MODE BE EF 03 06 00 66 25 01 00 01 36 36 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 F5 32 02 00 01 36 00 00
MY BUTTON-3
Set
SLIDESHOW BE EF 03 06 00 22 2A 01 00 02 36 22 00
MY IMAGE BE EF 03 06 00 E2 3C 01 00 02 36 16 00
MESSENGER BE EF 03 06 00 12 28 01 00 02 36 25 00
SHADE BE EF 03 06 00 E2 27 01 00 02 36 32 00
INFORMATION BE EF 03 06 00 42 3F 01 00 02 36 10 00
AUTO KEYSTONE V
BE EF 03 06 00 D2 3E 01 00 02 36 11 00
MY MEMORY BE EF 03 06 00 22 3E 01 00 02 36 12 00
ACTIVE IRIS BE EF 03 06 00 12 3C 01 00 02 36 15 00
PICTURE MODE BE EF 03 06 00 B2 3F 01 00 02 36 13 00
FILTER RESET BE EF 03 06 00 82 3D 01 00 02 36 14 00
TEMPLATE BE EF 03 06 00 72 38 01 00 02 36 1B 00
MUTE BE EF 03 06 00 42 21 01 00 02 36 38 00
* PbyP SWAP BE EF 03 06 00 E2 39 01 00 02 36 1A 00
RESOLUTION BE EF 03 06 00 22 3B 01 00 02 36 1E 00
ECO MODE BE EF 03 06 00 B2 24 01 00 02 36 37 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 B1 32 02 00 02 36 00 00
*) Only for CP-WU8440 and CP-WU8450.
RS-232C Communication / Network command table (continued)
37
(continued on next page)
Names Operation Type Header
CRC
Command Data
Action Type Setting code
MY BUTTON-4
Set
SLIDESHOW BE EF 03 06 00 DE 2B 01 00 03 36 22 00
MY IMAGE BE EF 03 06 00 1E 3D 01 00 03 36 16 00
MESSENGER BE EF 03 06 00 EE 29 01 00 03 36 25 00
SHADE BE EF 03 06 00 1E 26 01 00 03 36 32 00
INFORMATION BE EF 03 06 00 BE 3E 01 00 03 36 10 00
AUTO KEYSTONE V
BE EF 03 06 00 2E 3F 01 00 03 36 11 00
MY MEMORY BE EF 03 06 00 DE 3F 01 00 03 36 12 00
ACTIVE IRIS BE EF 03 06 00 EE 3D 01 00 03 36 15 00
PICTURE MODE BE EF 03 06 00 4E 3E 01 00 03 36 13 00
FILTER RESET BE EF 03 06 00 7E 3C 01 00 03 36 14 00
TEMPLATE BE EF 03 06 00 8E 39 01 00 03 36 1B 00
MUTE BE EF 03 06 00 BE 20 01 00 03 36 38 00
* PbyP SWAP BE EF 03 06 00 1E 38 01 00 03 36 1A 00
RESOLUTION BE EF 03 06 00 DE 3A 01 00 03 36 1E 00
ECO MODE BE EF 03 06 00 4E 25 01 00 03 36 37 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 4D 33 02 00 03 36 00 00
REMOTE
RECEIV. FRONT
Set
Off BE EF 03 06 00 FF 32 01 00 00 26 00 00
On BE EF 03 06 00 6F 33 01 00 00 26 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 CC 32 02 00 00 26 00 00
REMOTE
RECEIV. REAR
Set
Off BE EF 03 06 00 03 33 01 00 01 26 00 00
On BE EF 03 06 00 93 32 01 00 01 26 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 30 33 02 00 01 26 00 00
REMOTE ID
Set
ALL BE EF 03 06 00 9F 30 01 00 08 26 00 00
1 BE EF 03 06 00 0F 31 01 00 08 26 01 00
2 BE EF 03 06 00 FF 31 01 00 08 26 02 00
3 BE EF 03 06 00 6F 30 01 00 08 26 03 00
4 BE EF 03 06 00 5F 32 01 00 08 26 04 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 AC 30 02 00 08 26 00 00
REMOTE FREQ.
NORMAL
Set
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 FF 3D 01 00 30 26 00 00
ON BE EF 03 06 00 6F 3C 01 00 30 26 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 CC 3D 02 00 30 26 00 00
REMOTE FREQ.
HIGH
Set
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 03 3C 01 00 31 26 00 00
ON BE EF 03 06 00 93 3D 01 00 31 26 01 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 30 3C 02 00 31 26 00 00
MY IMAGE
Set
OFF BE EF 03 06 00 3A C3 01 00 00 35 00 00
IMAGE-1 BE EF 03 06 00 AA C2 01 00 00 35 01 00
IMAGE-2 BE EF 03 06 00 5A C2 01 00 00 35 02 00
IMAGE-3 BE EF 03 06 00 CA C3 01 00 00 35 03 00
IMAGE-4 BE EF 03 06 00 FA C1 01 00 00 35 04 00
Get BE EF 03 06 00 09 C3 02 00 00 35 00 00
MY IMAGE
IMAGE-1 Delete
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 71 C3 06 00 01 35 00 00
MY IMAGE
IMAGE-2 Delete
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 35 C3 06 00 02 35 00 00
MY IMAGE
IMAGE-3 Delete
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 C9 C2 06 00 03 35 00 00
MY IMAGE
IMAGE-4 Delete
Execute BE EF 03 06 00 BD C3 06 00 04 35 00 00
*) Only for CP-WU8440 and CP-WU8450.
38
PJLink command
PJLink command
POWR Power Contorol
0 = Standby
1 = Power On
POWR ? Power Status inquiry
0 = Standby
1 = Power On
2 = Cool Down
INPT Input Source selection
11 = COMPUTER IN 1
12 = COMPUTER IN 2
21 = COMPONENT
22 = S-VIDEO
23 = VIDEO
31 = HDMI 1
33 = HDMI 2
41 = USB TYPE A
51 = LAN
52 = USB TYPE B
INPT ? Input Source inquiry
11 = COMPUTER IN 1
12 = COMPUTER IN 2
21 = COMPONENT
22 = S-VIDEO
23 = VIDEO
31 = HDMI 1
33 = HDMI 2
41 = USB TYPE A
51 = LAN
52 = USB TYPE B
AVMT AV Mute
10 = BLANK off
11 = BLANK on
20 = Mute off
21 = Mute on
30 = AV Mute off
31 = AV Mute on
AVMT ? AV Mute inquiry
10 = BLANK off
11 = BLANK on
20 = Mute off
21 = Mute on
30 = AV Mute off
31 = AV Mute on
Commands Control Description Parameter or Response
(continued on next page)
39
PJLink command (continued)
Commands Control Description Parameter or Response
ERST ? Error Status inquiry
1st byte: Refers to Fan error; one of 0 to 2
2nd byte: Refers to Lamp error; one of 0 to 2
3rd byte: Refers to Temptrature error; one of 0 to 2
4th byte: Refers to Cover error; one of 0 to 2
5th byte: Refers to Filter error; one of 0 to 2
6th byte: Refers to Other error; one of 0 to 2
The mearning of 0 to 2 is as given below
0 = Error is not detected;
1 = Warning; 2 = Error
LAMP ? Lamp Status inquiry
1st number (digits 1 to 5): Lamp Time
2nd number : 0 = Lamp off, 1 = Lamp on
INST ? Input Source List inquiry 11 12 21 22 23 31 33 41 51 52
NAME ? Projector Name inquiry
Responds with the name set in the item
PROJECTOR NAME of the NETWORK menu
INF1 ?
Manufucturer's Name
inquiry
HITACHI
INF2 ? Model Name inquiry
CP-X8150
CP-X8160
CP-WX8240
CP-WX8255
CP-SX8350
CP-WU8440
CP-WU8450
INFO ? Other Information inquiry
Responds with the factory information and so
on
CLSS ? Class Information inquiry 1
NOTE
• The password used in PJLink
TM
is the same as the password set
in the Web Control. To use PJLink
TM
without authentication, do not set any
password in Web Browser Control.
• For specications of PJLink
TM
, see the web site of the Japan Business
Machine and Information System Industries Association.
URL: http://pjlink.jbmia.or.jp/ (as of Feb. 2012)
1
ENGLISH
Projector
CP-X8150/CP-X8160/CP-WX8240/
CP-WX8255/CP-SX8350/CP-WU8440/
CP-WU8450
User's Manual (concise)
Thank you for purchasing this projector.
Please read through this manual before using this product, in order to use safely
and utilize well the product.
WARNING ►Before using this product, be sure to read all manuals for this
product. After reading them, store them in a safe place for future reference.
►Heed all the warnings and cautions in the manuals or on the product.
►Follow all the instructions in the manuals or on the product.
First of all............................................ 2
Entries and graphical symbols explanation ......2
Important safety instruction ..............................2
Regulatory notices.............................. 3
About Electro-Magnetic Interference ................3
About Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment
...4
Contents of package........................... 4
Preparing for the remote control......... 5
Arrangement....................................... 6
Connecting with your devices............. 7
Fastening the adapter cover............... 8
Connecting power supply ................... 8
Turning on the power.......................... 9
Adjusting the projector's elevator ..... 10
Adjusting the lens position................ 10
Displaying the picture ....................... 11
Turning off the power........................ 12
Replacing the lamp........................... 13
Cleaning and replacing the air lter
.. 15
Using the CD manual ....................... 17
Specications ................................... 18
Troubleshooting
- Warranty and after-service ........... 20
Contents
NOTE • In this manual, unless any comments are accompanied, “the
manuals” means all the documents provided with this product, and “the product”
means this projector and all the accessories came with the projector.
2
First of all
Entries and graphical symbols explanation
The following entries and graphical symbols are used for the manuals and the product
as follows, for safety purpose. Please know their meanings beforehand, and heed them.
Important safety instruction
The followings are important instructions for safely using the product. Be sure to
follow them always when handling the product. The manufacturer assumes no
responsibility for any damage caused by mishandling that is beyond normal usage
dened in these manuals of this projector.
WARNING
This entry warns of a risk of serious personal injury or even death.
CAUTION This entry warns of a risk of personal injury or physical damage.
NOTICE This entry notices of fear of causing trouble.
WARNING ►Never use the product in or after an abnormality (ex. giving
off smoke, smelling strange, took a liquid or an object inside, broken, etc.) If an
abnormality should occur, unplug the projector urgently.
►Situate the product away from children and pets.
►Keep small parts away from children and pets. If swallowed, consult a
physician immediately for emergency treatment.
►Do not use the product when there is fear of a thunderbolt.
►Unplug the projector from the power outlet if the projector is not used for the
time being.
►
Do not connect the projector to a power supply while no lens unit is attached to it.
►Do not open or remove any portion of the product, unless the manuals direct
it. For internal maintenance, leave it to your dealer or their service personnel.
►Use only the accessories specied or recommended by the manufacturer.
►Do not modify the projector or accessories.
►Do not let any things or any liquids enter to the inside of the product.
►Do not wet the product.
►
Do not place the projector where any oils, such as cooking or machine oil, are used.
Oil may harm the product, resulting in malfunction, or falling from the mounted position.
►Do not apply a shock or pressure to this product.
- Do not place the product on an unstable place such as the uneven surface or
the leaned table.
- Do not place the product unstably. Place the projector so that it does not
protrude from the surface where the projector is placed on.
- Place your hands on the grip on the bottom of the projector when carrying the
projector.
- Remove all the attachments including the power cord and cables, from the
projector when carrying the projector.
►
Do not look into the lens and the openings on the projector, while the lamp is on.
►
Do not approach the lamp cover and the exhaust vents, while the projection lamp
is on. Also after the lamp goes out, do not approach them for a while, since too hot.
3
ENGLISH
Regulatory notices
About Electro-Magnetic Interference
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause
radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate
measures.
This product may cause interference if used in residential areas. Such use must
be avoided unless the user takes special measures to reduce electromagnetic
emissions to prevent interference to the reception of radio and television
broadcasts.
In Canada
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
In the US and places where the FCC regulations are applicable
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential
area is likely to case harmful interference in which case the user will be required to
correct the interference at his own expense.
INSTRUCTIONS TO USERS: Some cables have to be used with the core set.
Use the accessory cable or a designated type cable for the connection. For cables
that have a core only at one end, connect the core to the projector.
CAUTION: Changes or modications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
4
Contents of package
Your projector should come with the items
shown below. Check that all the items are
included. Require of your dealer immediately if
any items are missing.
(1) Remote control with two AA batteries
(2) Power cord
(3) Computer cable
(4) Lens cover
(5) User’s manuals (Book x1, CD x1)
(6) Security label
(7) Application CD
(8) Adapter cover
NOTE • Keep the original packing materials for future reshipment.
Be sure to use the original packing materials when moving the projector. Use
special caution for the lens.
• The projector may make a rattling sound when tilted, moved or shaken, since
a ap to control the air ow inside of the projector has moved. Be aware that
this is not a failure or malfunction.
(5)
(6)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1)
About Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment
The mark is in compliance with the Waste Electrical and Electronic
Equipment Directive 2002/96/EC (WEEE).
The mark indicates the requirement NOT to dispose the equipment
including any spent or discarded batteries or accumulators as unsorted
municipal waste, but use the return and collection systems available.
If the batteries or accumulators included with this equipment, display
the chemical symbol Hg, Cd, or Pb, then it means that the battery has a
heavy metal content of more than 0.0005% Mercury or more than, 0.002%
Cadmium, or more than 0.004% Lead.
Regulatory notices (continued)
(7)
WARNING ►Keep small parts away from children and pets. Take care
not to put in the mouth. If swallowed, consult a physician immediately for
emergency treatment.
(8)
5
ENGLISH
Preparing for the remote control
Please insert the batteries into the remote control before using it. If the remote
control starts to malfunction, try to replace the batteries. If you will not use the
remote control for long period, remove the batteries from the remote control and
store them in a safe place.
1.
Holding the hook part of the battery
cover, remove it.
2.
Align and insert the two AA batteries
(HITACHI MAXELL or HITACHI
MAXELL ENERGY, Part No.LR6 or
R6P) according to their plus and minus
terminals as indicated in the remote
control.
3.
Replace the battery cover in the direction of the arrow and snap it back into
place.
WARNING ►Always handle the batteries with care and use them only as
directed. Improper use may result in battery explosion, cracking or leakage,
which could result in re, injury and/or pollution of the surrounding environment.
• When replacing the batteries, replace both of the batteries with new batteries
of the same type. Do not use a new battery with a used battery.
• Be sure to use only the batteries specied. Do not use batteries of different
types at the same time. Do not mix a new battery with used one.
•
Make sure the plus and minus terminals are correctly aligned when loading a battery.
• Keep a battery away from children and pets.
• Do not recharge, short circuit, solder or disassemble a battery.
•
Do not place a battery in a re or water. Keep batteries in a dark, cool and dry place.
•
If you observe battery leakage, wipe out the leakage and then replace a battery.
If the leakage adheres to your body or clothes, rinse well with water immediately.
• Obey the local laws on disposing the battery.
2
13
6
WARNING ►Install the projector where you can access the power outlet
easily.
►Install the projector in a stable horizontal position.
• Do not use any mounting accessories except the accessories specied by the
manufacturer. Read and keep the manuals of the accessories used.
• For special installation such as ceiling mounting, be sure to consult your
dealer beforehand. Specic mounting accessories and services may be
required.
• Do not put the projector on its side, front or rear position.
• Do not attach nor place anything on the projector unless otherwise specied
in the manual.
►Do not install the projector near thermally conductive or ammable things.
►Do not place the projector where any oils, such as cooking or machine oil, are
used.
►Do not place the projector in a place where it may get wet.
CAUTION ►Place the projector in a cool place with sufcient ventilation.
• Keep a space of 30 cm or more between a side of the projector and other
objects such as walls.
• Do not stop up, block nor cover the projector's vent holes.
• Do not place the projector at places that are exposed to magnetic elds, doing
so can cause the cooling fans inside the projector to malfunction.
►Avoid placing the projector in smoky, humid or dusty place.
• Do not place the projector near humidiers.
NOTICE ►Position the projector to prevent light from directly hitting the
projector’s remote sensor.
►Do not place the product in a place where radio interference may be caused.
►Set the ALTITUDE of the SERVICE item in the OPTION menu correctly. It is
recommended to leave it at AUTO usually. If the projector is used with a wrong
setting, it may cause damage to the projector itself or the parts inside. For
details, see User’s Manual -Operating Guide.
Arrangement
Refer to tables T-1 to T-6 at the back of this manual as well as the following to
determine the screen size and projection distance. The values shown in the table
are calculated for a full size screen.
Projector top
Projector bottom
յփ
Screen size
ֈ
Projection distance
(from the front of the
projector unit)
։
,
֊
: Screen height
7
ENGLISH
Connecting with your devices
Before connecting the projector to a device, consult the manual of the device to
conrm that the device is suitable for connecting with this projector and prepare
the required accessories, such as a cable in accord with the signal of the device.
Consult your dealer when the required accessory did not come with the product or
the accessory is damaged.
After making sure that the projector and the devices are turned off, perform the
connection, according to the following instructions. Refer to
gures F-1 to F-4 at the
back of this manual.
For details, see User’s Manual - Operating Guide. Before connecting the projector
to a network system, be sure to read User’s Manual - Network Guide too.
WARNING ►Use only the appropriate accessories. Otherwise it could
cause a re or damage the projector and devices.
• Use only the accessories specied or recommended by the projector’s
manufacturer. It may be regulated under some standard.
• Neither disassemble nor modify the projector and the accessories.
• Do not use the damaged accessory. Be careful not to damage the accesso-
ries. Route a cable so that it is neither stepped on nor pinched out.
►
Heat may build up in the USB wireless adapter, to avoid possible burns dis-
connect the projector power cord for 10 minutes before touching the adapter.
• When using the USB wireless adapter, be sure to connect the adapter to the
further USB TYPE A port from the LAN port and use the supplied adapter
cover (8).
CAUTION ►For a cable with a core at only one end, connect the end with
the core to the projector. That may be required by EMI regulations.
►Before connecting the projector to a network system be sure to obtain the
consent of the administrator of the network.
►
Do not connect the LAN port to any network that might have the excessive
voltage.
►
The designated USB wireless adapter that is sold as an option is required to use
the wireless network function of this projector. Before connecting the USB wireless
adapter, turn off the power of the projector and disconnect the power cord.
►
Before removing the USB storage device from the port of the projector, be sure
to use the REMOVE USB function on the thumbnail screen to secure your data.
NOTE • Do not turn on or off the projector while connected to a
device in operation, unless that is directed in the manual of the device.
• Some input ports are selectable in the use. For details, see User's Manual -
Operating Guide.
• Be careful not to mistakenly connect a connector to a wrong port.
•
If an oversized USB storage device blocks the LAN port, use a USB
extension cable to connect the USB storage device.
8
Connecting power supply
1.
Put the connector of the power cord into the AC IN
(AC inlet) of the projector.
2.
Firmly plug the power cord’s plug into the outlet. In a
couple of seconds after the power supply connection,
the POWER indicator will light up in steady orange.
Please remember that when the DIRECT POWER ON
function activated, the connection of the power supply
make the projector turn on.
WARNING ►Do not connect the projector to a power supply while no lens
unit is attached to it.
►Please use extra caution when connecting the power cord, as incorrect or
faulty connections may result in re and/or electrical shock.
• Do not touch the power cord with a wet hand.
• Only use the power cord that came with the projector. If it is damaged, consult
your dealer to get a new one. Never modify the power cord.
• Only plug the power cord into an outlet whose voltage is matched to the power
cord. The power outlet should be close to the projector and easily accessible.
Remove the power cord for complete separation.
• Do not distribute the power supply to multiple devices. Doing so may overload
the outlet and connectors, loosen the connection, or result in re, electric
shock or other accidents.
• Connect the ground terminal for the AC inlet of this unit to the ground terminal
of the building using an appropriate power cord (bundled).
NOTICE ►This product is also designed for IT power systems with a phase-
to-phase voltage of 220 to 240 V.
Fastening the adapter cover
When using the USB wireless adapter, be
sure to connect the adapter to the further USB
TYPE A port from the LAN port and use the
supplied adapter cover
.
1.
Loosen the screw (marked with triangle) on
the bottom left of the USB TYPE A ports.
2.
Insert the tab of the cover into the hole at the upper right of
the USB TYPE A ports in the direction of the arrow.
3.
Align the screw holes on the projector and the cover. Then
insert the screw removed from the projector into the hole and
tighten the screw.
WARNING ►Keep small parts away from children and
pets. Take care not to put in the mouth.
►Heat may build up in the USB wireless adapter, to avoid
possible burns disconnect the projector power cord for 10
minutes before touching the adapter.
AC IN
Power
cord
3
1
2
Tab
9
ENGLISH
Turning on the power
1.
Make sure that the power cord is rmly and correctly connected to the
projector and the outlet.
2.
Make sure that the POWER indicator is
lighted in steady orange. Then remove the
lens cover.
3.
Press the STANDBY/ON button on
the projector or the ON button on the
remote control.
The projection lamp will light up and the
POWER indicator will begin blinking in
green. When the power is completely on, the
indicator will stop blinking and light in steady
green.
WARNING ►A strong light is emitted when the projector’s power is on. Do
not look into the lens of the projector or look inside of the projector through any
of the projector’s openings.
NOTE • Please power on the projector prior to the connected devices.
• The projector has the DIRECT POWER ON function, which can make the
projector automatically turn on. For more information, please see User’s
Manual - Operating Guide.
POWER indicator
ON button
STANDBY/ON button
10
Adjusting the projector’s elevator
When the place to put the projector is slightly uneven to
the left or right, use the elevator feet to place the projector
horizontally. Using the feet can also tilt the projector
in order to project at a suitable angle to the screen,
elevating the front side of the projector within 9 degrees.
This projector has 2 elevator feet and 2 elevator buttons.
An elevator foot is adjustable while pushing the elevator
button on the same side as it.
1.
Holding the projector, push the elevator buttons to
loose the elevator feet.
2.
Position the front side of the projector to the desired
height.
3.
Release the elevator buttons in order to lock the
elevator feet.
4.
After making sure that the elevator feet are locked,
put the projector down gently.
5.
If necessary, the elevator feet can be manually
twisted to make more precise adjustments. Hold the
projector when twisting the feet.
Adjusting the lens position
Shifting the lens position shifts the projection
position.
After pressing the LENS SHIFT button on the
control panel or the remote control, use the
cursor buttons to shift the lens position.
CAUTION ►
Do not put your ngers or any other
things around the lens. The moving lens could catch
them in the space around the lens and result in an injury.
NOTE • The projector may ignore operation by buttons while moving the lens.
• Generally, better image quality can be got when the lens is set to the center.
LENS SHIFT
button
To loose an
elevator foot,
push the elevator
button on the
same side as it.
To nely
adjust, twist
the foot.
LENS SHIFT button
CAUTION ►Do not handle the elevator buttons without holding the
projector, since the projector may drop down.
►Do not tilt the projector other than elevating its front within 9 degrees using
the adjuster feet. A tilt of the projector exceeding the restriction could cause
malfunction or shortening the lifetime of consumables, or the projector itself.
Only for CP-X8160, CP-WX8255 and CP-WU8450, it is possible to install the
projector for any direction with speci ed mounting accessories. Consult with
your dealer about such a special installation.
11
ENGLISH
Displaying the picture
1.
Activate your signal source. Turn the signal
source on, and make it send the signal to the
projector.
2.
Use the VOL + / - buttons to adjust the volume.
3.
Press the INPUT button on the projector.
Each time you press the button, the projector
switches its input port in turn.
You can also use the remote control to select
an input signal. Press any of the buttons from
COMPUTER 1 / 2, LAN, USB TYPE A / B,
HDMI 1 / 2, COMPONENT, S-VIDEO or
VIDEO to select the input signal from each
port.
4.
Press the ASPECT button on the remote control.
Each time you press the button, the projector
switches the mode for aspect ratio in turn.
5.
Use the ZOOM + / - buttons on the remote
control or ZOOM button and ◄/► cursor buttons
on the projector to adjust the screen size.
6.
Use the FOCUS + / - buttons on the projector or
the remote control to focus the picture.
CAUTION ►If you wish to have a blank screen while the projector's lamp is
on, use the lens shade or AV MUTE function (see User’s Manual - Operating
Guide). Taking any other action may cause the damage on the projector.
NOTE • The ASPECT button does not work when no proper signal is inputted.
• For the details of how to adjust the picture, please see User’s Manual -
Operating Guide.
VOL + / -
buttons
ASPECT
button
Buttons for input ports
INPUT button
FOCUS - / + buttons
ZOOM button
ZOOM + / -
buttons
FOCUS + / -
buttons
12
Turning off the power
1.
Press the STANDBY/ON button on the
projector or the STANDBY button on
the remote control.
The message “Power off?” will appear
on the screen for about 5 seconds.
2.
Press the STANDBY/ON or STANDBY
button again while the message
appears.
The projector lamp will go off, and the
POWER indicator will begin blinking in
orange. Then the POWER indicator will
stop blinking and light in steady orange
when the lamp cooling is complete.
3.
Attach the lens cover, after the POWER indicator turns to steady orange.
Do not turn the projector on for about 10 minutes or more after turning it off.
Also, do not turn the projector off shortly after turning it on. Such operations might
cause the lamp to malfunction or shorten the lifetime of some parts including the
lamp.
WARNING ►Do not touch around the lamp cover and the exhaust vents
during use or just after use, since it is too hot.
►Remove the power cord for complete separation. The power outlet should
be close to the projector and easily accessible.
NOTE • Please power off the projector after any connected devices are
powered off.
• This projector has the AUTO POWER OFF function that can make the
projector turn off automatically. For more information, please see User’s
Manual - Operating Guide.
POWER indicator
STANDBY
button
STANDBY/ON button
13
ENGLISH
Replacing the lamp
A lamp has nite product life. Using the lamp for long periods of time could cause
the pictures darker or the color tone poor. Note that each lamp has a different
lifetime, and some may burst or burn out soon after you start using them.
Preparation of a new lamp and early replacement are recommended. To prepare
a new lamp, make contact with your dealer and tell the lamp type number.
Type number <CP-X8150, CP-WX8240, CP-WU8440> : DT01281
Type number <CP-X8160, CP-WX8255, CP-SX8350, CP-WU8450> : DT01291
1.
Turn the projector off, and unplug the power cord.
Allow the projector to cool for at least 45 minutes.
2.
Prepare a new lamp. If the projector is mounted
with specied mounting accessories, or if the lamp
has broken, also ask the dealer to replace the lamp.
In case of replacement by yourself, follow the following
procedure.
3.
Loosen the screw (marked by arrow) of the lamp cover
and then slide down and lift the lamp cover to remove it.
4.
Loosen the 3 screws (marked by arrow) of the
lamp, and slowly pull the lamp out by the handles.
Never loosen any other screws.
5.
Insert the new lamp, and retighten rmly the
3 screws of the lamp that are loosened in
the previous process to lock it in place.
6.
While putting the interlocking parts of the lamp
cover and the projector together, slide the lamp
cover back in place. Then rmly fasten the screw
of the lamp cover.
7.
Turn the projector on and reset the lamp time
using the LAMP TIME item in the OPTION menu.
(1) Press the MENU button to display a menu.
(2) Point at the ADVANCED MENU in the menu using the ▼/▲
button, then press the ► button.
(3) Point at the OPTION in the left column of the menu using
the ▼/▲button, then press the ► button.
(4) Point at the LAMP TIME using the ▼/▲ button, then press
the ► button. A dialog will appear.
(5)
Press the
►
button to select
“
OK
”
on the dialog. It performs resetting the lamp time.
NOTE • Please reset the lamp time only when you have replaced the lamp,
for a suitable indication about the lamp.
CAUTION ►Do not touch the interior of the projector, while the lamp is
taken out.
4, 5
6
Handles
Lamp cover
3
14
HIGH VOLTAGE
HIGH TEMPERATURE HIGH PRESSURE
WARNING ►The projector uses a high-pressure mercury glass lamp. The
lamp can break with a loud bang, or burn out, if jolted or scratched, handled
while hot, or worn over time. Note that each lamp has a different lifetime, and
some may burst or burn out soon after you start using them. In addition, if the
bulb bursts, it is possible for shards of glass to y into the lamp housing, and
for gas containing mercury and dust containing ne particles of glass to escape
from the projector’s vent holes.
►About disposal of a lamp: This product contains a mercury lamp; do not put
it in a trash. Dispose of it in accordance with environmental laws.
• For lamp recycling, go to www.lamprecycle.org (in the US).
• For product disposal, consult your local government agency
or www.eiae.org (in the US) or www.epsc.ca (in Canada).
For more information, ask your dealer.
• If the lamp should break (it will make a loud bang when it does),
unplug the power cord from the outlet, and make sure to request a
replacement lamp from your local dealer. Note that shards of glass
could damage the projector’s internals, or cause injury during handling,
so please do not try to clean the projector or replace the lamp yourself.
• If the lamp should break (it will make a loud bang when it does),
ventilate the room well, and make sure not to inhale the gas or fine
particles that come out from the projector's vent holes, and not to get
them into your eyes or mouth.
• Before replacing the lamp, turn the projector off and unplug the power
cord, then wait at least 45 minutes for the lamp to cool sufficiently.
Handling the lamp while hot can cause burns, as well as damaging the lamp.
• Never unscrew except the appointed (marked by an arrow) screws.
• Do not open the lamp cover while the projector is suspended from
a ceiling. This is dangerous, since if the lamp’s bulb has broken, the
shards will fall out when the cover is opened. In addition, working in
high places is dangerous, so ask your local dealer to have the lamp
replaced even if the bulb is not broken.
• Do not use the projector with the lamp cover removed. At the lamp
replacing, make sure that the screws are screwed in firmly. Loose
screws could result in damage or injury.
• Use only the lamp of the specified type. Use of a lamp that does not
meet the lamp specications for this model could cause a re, damage or
shorten the life of this product.
• If the lamp breaks soon after the first time it is used, it is possible
that there are electrical problems elsewhere besides the lamp. If this
happens, consult your local dealer or a service representative.
•
Handle with care: jolting or scratching could cause the lamp bulb to burst during use.
• Using the lamp for long periods of time, could cause it dark, not to light
up or to burst. When the pictures appear dark, or when the color tone
is poor, please replace the lamp as soon as possible. Do not use old
(used) lamps; this is a cause of breakage.
Disconnect
the plug
from the
power
outlet
Replacing the lamp (continued)
15
ENGLISH
Please check and clean the air lter periodically. When the indicators or a
message prompts you to clean the air lter, comply with it as soon as possible.
The lter unit with 2 sheets of lters is inside of the lter cover. In addition, the
extra air lter is attached to inner side of the lter cover of CP-X8160, CP-WX8255
and CP-WU8450. If one of the lters is damaged or heavily soiled, replace whole
lter set with a new one.
Request for a lter set with the following type number from your dealer when
purchasing a new one.
Type number <CP-X8150, CP-WX8240, CP-SX8350, CP-WU8440>: MU06642
Type number <CP-X8160, CP-WX8255, CP-WU8450>: UX38241
1.
Turn the projector off, and unplug the power
cord. Allow the projector to sufciently cool
down.
2.
Use a vacuum cleaner on and around the
lter cover.
3.
Pick and pull up the lter cover knobs to
take it off.
4.
Press up slightly the bottom side knobs
to unlock the bottom side of the lter unit.
Pull the center knob to take the lter unit
off.
5.
Use a vacuum cleaner for the lter vent
of the projector and the outer side of the
lter unit.
6.
The lter unit consists of two parts. Press
down around the interlocking parts to
unlock, then separate the two parts.
7.
Use a vacuum cleaner for the inner side
of each part of the lter unit to clean them
up. If the lters are damaged or heavily
soiled, replace them with the new ones.
8.
Combine the two parts to reassemble the
lter unit.
9.
Put the lter unit back into the projector.
(continued on next page)
Filter cover
Filter cover
knobs
Filter unit
Filter unit
knobs
Interlocking
parts
2
3
4, 5
6
7
Extra
air lter
<Only for CP-X8160, CP-WX8240
and CP-WU8450>
Cleaning and replacing the air filter
16
NOTE • Please reset the lter time only when you have cleaned or
replaced the air lter, for a suitable indication about the air lter.
• The projector may display the message such as the “CHECK THE AIR
FLOW” or turn off the projector, to prevent the internal heat level rising.
WARNING ► Before taking care of the air lter, make sure the power
cable is not plugged in, then allow the projector to cool sufciently.
►Use only the air lter of the specied type. Do not use the projector without
the air lter or the lter cover. It could result in a re or malfunction to the
projector.
►Clean the air lter periodically. If the air lter becomes clogged by dust or the
like, internal temperatures rise and could cause a re, a burn or malfunction to
the projector.
Cleaning and replacing the air lter (continued)
10.
Put the lter cover back into the place.
11.
Turn the projector on and reset the lter time using the FILTER TIME item
in the EASY MENU.
(1) Press the MENU button to display a menu.
(2) Point at the FILTER TIME using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons, then press the
► cursor (or the ENTER / the RESET) button. A dialog will appear.
(3) Press the ► cursor button to select the “OK” on the dialog. It performs
resetting the lter time.
17
ENGLISH
Using the CD manual
The other manuals for this product are written into the included CD-ROM titled
“User’s Manual (detailed)”. Before using the CD-ROM, please read the following
to ensure the proper use.
System requirements
The system for using the CD-ROM requires the following.
Windows
®
: OS:Windows
®
XP, Windows Vista
®
, Windows
®
7 or later
Macintosh
®
: OS:Mac OS
®
10.2 or later
CD-ROM/DVD-ROM drive
Applications: Microsoft
®
Internet Explorer
®
6.0 and
Adobe
®
Acrobat
®
Reader
®
8.0 or later
How to use the CD
1. Insert CD into computer’s CD-ROM drive.
Windows
®
: In a while, Web browser automatically starts. Start up
window comes up.
Macintosh
®
: (1) Double-click on the “Projectors” icon appeared on the
desktop screen.
(2) When “main.html” file is clicked, Web browser will start
and Initial window will appear.
2. Click the model name of your projector first, and then click language you want
from the displayed list. The User’s manual (detailed) will open.
CAUTION ►Only use the CD-ROM in a computer CD/DVD drive. The
CD-ROM is designed for computer use only. NEVER INSERT THE CD-ROM
INTO A NON-COMPUTER CD/DVD PLAYER! Inserting the CD-ROM into an
incompatible CD/DVD drive may produce a loud noise, which in turn MAY
RESULT IN EAR AND SPEAKER DAMAGE!
• After using CD-ROM, please put it into CD case and keep it. Please keep
the CD neither in direct sunlight nor in a high temperature and high humidity
environment.
NOTE • The information in the CD-ROM is subject to change without
notice.Please check our website where you may nd the latest information for
this projector.
(
20)
• No responsibility is taken for any obstacle and defect to hardware and
software of your computer as a result of the use of the CD-ROM.
• All or Any part of the information in the CD-ROM must not be copied,
reproduced or republished without notice to our company.
18
Item 6SHFL¿FDWLRQ
Product name Liquid crystal projector
Liquid Crystal
Panel
CP-X8150, CP-X8160:
786,432 pixels (1024 horizontal x 768 vertical)
CP-WX8240, CP-WX8255:
1,024,000 pixels (1280 horizontal x 800 vertical)
CP-SX8350:
1,470,000 pixels (1400 horizontal x 1050 vertical)
CP-WU8440, CP-WU8450:
2,304,000 pixels (1920 horizontal x 1200 vertical)
Lamp
CP-X8150, CP-WX8240, CP-WU8440: 245W UHP
CP-X8160, CP-WX8255, CP-SX8350, CP-WU8450: 330W UHP
Speaker 8 W x2
Power supply,
Rated current
CP-X8150, CP-WX8240, CP-WU8440:
AC100-120 V: 3.8 A, AC220-240 V: 1.9 A
CP-X8160, CP-WX8255, CP-SX8350, CP-WU8450:
AC100-120 V: 4.9 A, AC220-240 V: 2.4 A
Power
consumption
CP-X8150, CP-WX8240, CP-WU8440:
AC100-120 V: 375 W, AC220-240 V: 355 W
CP-X8160, CP-WX8255, CP-SX8350, CP-WU8450:
AC100-120 V: 480 W, AC220-240 V: 455 W
Temperature
range
CP-X8150, CP-WX8240, CP-SX8350, CP-WU8440:
0 ~ 40 °C (Operating)
CP-X8160, CP-WX8255, CP-WU8450:
0 ~ 45 °C (Operating)
* When the projector is used at high altitudes, even with the
CP-X8160, CP-WX8255 or CP-WU8450, the service life
of the optical components may be reduced by peripheral
temperatures of over about 40°C. It is recommended to
reduce the temperature as far as possible.
Size
498 (W) x 135 (H) x 396 (D) mm
* Not including protruding parts. Refer to gure F-5 at the back
of this manual.
Weight (mass)
CP-X8150, CP-WX8240: approx. 8.3 kg
CP-X8160, CP-WX8255: approx. 8.6 kg
CP-SX8350, CP-WU8440, CP-WU8450: approx. 8.7 kg
(continued on next page)
Specifications
19
ENGLISH
Item 6SHFL¿FDWLRQ
Ports
COMPUTER IN1 .......................... D-sub 15 pin mini jack x1
COMPUTER IN2 (H, V, G/Y, B/Cb/Pb, R/Cr/Pr) ... BNC jack x5
HDMI 1 ................................................... HDMI connector x1
HDMI 2 ................................................... HDMI connector x1
MONITOR OUT ............................. D-sub 15 pin mini jack x1
COMPONENT (Y, Cb/Pb, Cr/Pr) ....................... RCA jack x3
S-VIDEO ............................................. Mini DIN 4 pin jack x1
VIDEO ............................................................... RCA jack x1
AUDIO IN1 ............................... 3.5 mm (stereo) mini jack x1
AUDIO IN2 ............................... 3.5 mm (stereo) mini jack x1
AUDIO IN3 (L, R) .............................................. RCA jack x2
AUDIO OUT (L, R) ............................................ RCA jack x2
USB TYPE A ................................. USB type A connector x2
USB TYPE B ................................. USB type B connector x1
CONTROL .............................................. D-sub 9 pin plug x1
LAN .................................................................. RJ45 jack x1
REMOTE CONTROL IN ........... 3.5 mm (stereo) mini jack x1
REMOTE CONTROL OUT ....... 3.5 mm (stereo) mini jack x1
Optional parts
Lamp:
DT01281 <CP-X8150, CP-WX8240, CP-WU8440>
DT01291 <CP-X8160, CP-WX8255, CP-SX8350, CP-WU8450>
Filter set:
MU06642 <CP-X8150, CP-WX8240, CP-SX8350, CP-WU8440>
UX38241 <CP-X8160, CP-WX8255, CP-WU8450>
Lens unit: SL-702 (Short throw lens)
ML-703 (Middle throw lens)
LL-704 (Long throw lens)
UL-705 (Ultra long throw lens)
Mounting accessory:
HAS-8150 (Bracket for xing mount)
HAS-204L (Standard adaptor for xing mount)
HAS-304H (Long adaptor for xing mount)
USB wireless adapter: USB-WL-11N
* For more information, please consult your dealer.
Specications (continued)
20
Troubleshooting - Warranty and after-service
If an abnormal operation (such as smoke, strange odor or excessive sound)
should occur, stop using the projector immediately.
Otherwise if a problem occurs with the projector, rst refer to “Troubleshooting” of
User’s Manual - Operating Guide, Instant Stack Guide and Network Guide,
and run through the suggested checks.
If this does not resolve the problem, please consult your dealer or service
company. They will tell you what warranty condition is applied.
Please check the following web address where you may nd the latest information
for this projector.
Product
information and
Manuals :
http://www.hitachi-america.us/digitalmedia
Production
information :
http://www.hitachidigitalmedia.com
Direct link to
manual download :
http://www.hitachiserviceeu.com/support/guides/
userguides.htm
Trademark acknowledgment
• Mac
®
, Macintosh
®
and Mac OS
®
are registered trademarks of Apple Inc.
• Pentium
®
is a registered trademark of Intel Corp.
•
Adobe
®
and Acrobat
®
, Reader
®
are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
• Microsoft
®
, Internet Explorer
®
, Windows
®
, Windows NT
®
and Windows Vista
®
are
registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.
• HDMI
TM
, the HDMI logo and High-Denition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or
registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries.
• Blu-ray Disc
TM
and Blu-ray
TM
are trademarks of Blu-ray Disc Association.
All other trademarks are the properties of their respective owners.
NOTE
• The information in this manual is subject to change without notice.
• The illustrations shown in this manual are one example for explanation. On
your projector, there may be some differences from the illustrations.
• The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear
in this manual.
• The reproduction, transfer or copy of all or any part of this document is not
permitted without express written consent.
End User License Agreement for the Projector Software
• Software in the projector consists of the plural number of independent
software modules and there exist our copyright or/and third party copyrights for
each of such software modules.
• Be sure to read “End User License Agreement for the Projector Software”
which is separated document. (in the CD)
21
Projector top
Projector bottom
Ⓗ × Ⓥ :
Screen size
ⓐ:
Projection distance
(from the front of the
projector unit)
ⓑ
,
ⓒ
: Screen height
Screen
type
4 : 3 16 : 9
Screen
size
Projection
distance
Screen height
Screen
size
Projection
distance
Screen height
H
V a
min.
a
max.
b
c H V a
min.
a
max.
b
c
(inch)
m m m inch m inch cm inch cm inch m m m inch m inch cm inch cm inch
30 0.6 0.5 0.9 37 1.4 55 51 20 -6 -2 0.7 0.4 1.0 40 1.5 60 50 20 -12 -5
40 0.8 0.6 1.2 49 1.9 73 69 27 -8 -3 0.9 0.5 1.3 53 2.0 79 66 26 -17 -7
50 1.0 0.8 1.5 61 2.3 91 86 34 -10 -4 1.1 0.6 1.7 66 2.5 99 83 33 -21 -8
60 1.2 0.9 1.8 73 2.8 109 103 41 -11 -5 1.3 0.7 2.0 79 3.0 119 100 39 -25 -10
70 1.4 1.1 2.1 84 3.2 127 120 47 -13 -5 1.5 0.9 2.3 92 3.5 138 116 46 -29 -11
80 1.6 1.2 2.4 96 3.7 145 137 54 -15 -6 1.8 1.0 2.7 105 4.0 158 133 52 -33 -13
90 1.8 1.4 2.8 108 4.1 163 154 61 -17 -7 2.0 1.1 3.0 118 4.5 177 149 59 -37 -15
100 2.0 1.5 3.1 120 4.6 181 171 68 -19 -8 2.2 1.2 3.3 131 5.0 197 166 65 -42 -16
150 3.0 2.3 4.6 180 6.9 271 257 101 -29 -11 3.3 1.9 5.0 196 7.5 295 249 98 -62 -25
200 4.1 3.0 6.1 239 9.2 361 343 135 -38 -15 4.4 2.5 6.6 261 10.0 393 332 131 -83 -33
250 5.1 3.8 7.6 299 11.5 451 429 169 -48 -19 5.5 3.1 8.3 326 12.5 491 415 163 -104 -41
300 6.1 4.6 9.1 359 13.7 541 514 203 -57 -23 6.6 3.7 9.9 391 15.0 589 498 196 -125 -49
500 10.2 7.6 15.2 597 22.9 901 857 338 -95 -38 11.1 6.2 16.5 650 24.9 982 830 327 -208 -82
T-1
CP-X8150 with SL-702
(1024 x 768, ±10%)
Screen
type
4 : 3 16 : 9
Screen
size
Projection
distance
Screen height
Screen
size
Projection
distance
Screen height
H
V a
min.
a
max.
b
c H V a
min.
a
max.
b
c
(inch)
m m m inch m inch cm inch cm inch m m m inch m inch cm inch cm inch
30 0.6 0.5 0.9 37 1.9 73 46 18 0 0 0.7 0.4 1.0 40 2.0 80 44 17 -6 -2
40 0.8 0.6 1.2 49 2.5 97 61 24 0 0 0.9 0.5 1.4 53 2.7 106 58 23 -8 -3
50 1.0 0.8 1.6 61 3.1 121 76 30 0 0 1.1 0.6 1.7 67 3.4 132 73 29 -10 -4
60 1.2 0.9 1.9 73 3.7 146 91 36 0 0 1.3 0.7 2.0 80 4.0 159 87 34 -12 -5
70 1.4 1.1 2.2 86 4.3 170 107 42 0 0 1.5 0.9 2.4 93 4.7 185 102 40 -15 -6
80 1.6 1.2 2.5 98 4.9 194 122 48 0 0 1.8 1.0 2.7 106 5.4 211 116 46 -17 -7
90 1.8 1.4 2.8 110 5.5 218 137 54 0 0 2.0 1.1 3.0 120 6.0 238 131 51 -19 -7
100 2.0 1.5 3.1 122 6.2 242 152 60 0 0 2.2 1.2 3.4 133 6.7 264 145 57 -21 -8
150 3.0 2.3 4.6 183 9.2 363 229 90 0 0 3.3 1.9 5.1 199 10.0 396 218 86 -31 -12
200 4.1 3.0 6.2 244 12.3 484 305 120 0 0 4.4 2.5 6.7 266 13.4 527 291 114 -42 -16
250 5.1 3.8 7.7 305 15.4 605 381 150 0 0 5.5 3.1 8.4 332 16.7 659 363 143 -52 -20
300 6.1 4.6 9.3 366 18.4 725 457 180 0 0 6.6 3.7 10.1 398 20.1 790 436 172 -62 -25
500 10.2 7.6 15.5 609 30.7
1209
762 300 0 0 11.1 6.2 16.9 664 33.4
1317
726 286 -104 -41
T-2
CP-X8160 with ML-703
(1024 x 768, ±10%)
22
Projector top
Projector bottom
Ⓗ × Ⓥ :
Screen size
ⓐ:
Projection distance
(from the front of the
projector unit)
ⓑ
,
ⓒ
: Screen height
Screen
type
16 : 10 4 : 3
Screen
size
Projection
distance
Screen height
Screen
size
Projection
distance
Screen height
H
V a
min.
a
max.
b
c H V a
min.
a
max.
b
c
(inch)
m m m inch m inch cm inch cm inch m m m inch m inch cm inch cm inch
30 0.6 0.4 1.0 39 1.5 58 50 20 -10 -4 0.6 0.5 1.1 44 1.7 66 57 23 -11 -5
40 0.9 0.5 1.3 52 2.0 77 67 26 -13 -5 0.8 0.6 1.5 58 2.2 87 76 30 -15 -6
50 1.1 0.7 1.6 64 2.4 96 84 33 -17 -7 1.0 0.8 1.8 73 2.8 109 95 38 -19 -8
60 1.3 0.8 2.0 77 2.9 115 101 40 -20 -8 1.2 0.9 2.2 87 3.3 131 114 45 -23 -9
70 1.5 0.9 2.3 89 3.4 135 118 46 -24 -9 1.4 1.1 2.6 101 3.9 152 133 53 -27 -11
80 1.7 1.1 2.6 102 3.9 154 135 53 -27 -11 1.6 1.2 2.9 115 4.4 174 152 60 -30 -12
90 1.9 1.2 2.9 115 4.4 173 151 60 -30 -12 1.8 1.4 3.3 130 5.0 195 171 68 -34 -14
100 2.2 1.3 3.2 127 4.9 192 168 66 -34 -13 2.0 1.5 3.7 144 5.5 217 191 75 -38 -15
150 3.2 2.0 4.8 191 7.3 287 252 99 -50 -20 3.0 2.3 5.5 216 8.3 325 286 113 -57 -23
200 4.3 2.7 6.4 254 9.7 383 337 132 -67 -26 4.1 3.0 7.3 287 11.0 433 381 150 -76 -30
250 5.4 3.4 8.0 317 12.1 478 421 166 -84 -33 5.1 3.8 9.1 359 13.7 541 476 188 -95 -38
300 6.5 4.0 9.7 380 14.6 573 505 199 -101 -40 6.1 4.6 10.9 430 16.5 649 572 225 -114 -45
500 10.8 6.7 16.1 633 24.3 955 841 331 -168 -66 10.2 7.6 18.2 716 27.5
1081
953 375 -191 -75
T-3
CP-WX8240 with SL-702
(1280 x 800, ±10%)
Screen
type
16 : 10 4 : 3
Screen
size
Projection
distance
Screen height
Screen
size
Projection
distance
Screen height
H
V a
min.
a
max.
b
c H V a
min.
a
max.
b
c
(inch)
m m m inch m inch cm inch cm inch m m m inch m inch cm inch cm inch
30 0.6 0.4 1.0 39 2.0 78 45 18 -4 -2 0.6 0.5 1.1 44 2.2 88 51 20 -5 -2
40 0.9 0.5 1.3 52 2.6 103 60 24 -6 -2 0.8 0.6 1.5 59 3.0 117 68 27 -7 -3
50 1.1 0.7 1.6 65 3.3 129 75 29 -7 -3 1.0 0.8 1.9 73 3.7 146 85 33 -8 -3
60 1.3 0.8 2.0 78 3.9 154 90 35 -9 -4 1.2 0.9 2.2 88 4.4 175 102 40 -10 -4
70 1.5 0.9 2.3 91 4.6 180 105 41 -10 -4 1.4 1.1 2.6 103 5.2 204 119 47 -12 -5
80 1.7 1.1 2.6 104 5.2 206 120 47 -12 -5 1.6 1.2 3.0 117 5.9 233 135 53 -14 -5
90 1.9 1.2 3.0 117 5.9 231 135 53 -13 -5 1.8 1.4 3.4 132 6.6 262 152 60 -15 -6
100 2.2 1.3 3.3 129 6.5 257 150 59 -15 -6 2.0 1.5 3.7 147 7.4 291 169 67 -17 -7
150 3.2 2.0 4.9 194 9.8 385 224 88 -22 -9 3.0 2.3 5.6 220 11.1 436 254 100 -25 -10
200 4.3 2.7 6.6 259 13.0 513 299 118 -30 -12 4.1 3.0 7.4 293 14.7 580 339 133 -34 -13
250 5.4 3.4 8.2 323 16.3 641 374 147 -37 -15 5.1 3.8 9.3 366 18.4 725 423 167 -42 -17
300 6.5 4.0 9.8 388 19.5 769 449 177 -45 -18 6.1 4.6 11.1 439 22.1 870 508 200 -51 -20
500 10.8 6.7 16.4 646 32.5
1281
748 294 -75 -29 10.2 7.6 18.6 731 36.8
1450
847 333 -85 -33
T-4
CP-WX8255 with ML-703
(1280 x 800, ±10%)
23
Projector top
Projector bottom
Ⓗ × Ⓥ :
Screen size
ⓐ:
Projection distance
(from the front of the
projector unit)
ⓑ
,
ⓒ
: Screen height
Screen
type
4 : 3 16 : 9
Screen
size
Projection
distance
Screen height
Screen
size
Projection
distance
Screen height
H
V a
min.
a
max.
b
c H V a
min.
a
max.
b
c
(inch)
m m m inch m inch cm inch cm inch m m m inch m inch cm inch cm inch
30 0.6 0.5 0.7 29 1.1 44 41 16 5 2 0.7 0.4 0.8 32 1.2 48 39 15 -1 0
40 0.8 0.6 1.0 39 1.5 58 55 22 6 2 0.9 0.5 1.1 42 1.6 63 51 20 -2 -1
50 1.0 0.8 1.2 48 1.8 73 69 27 8 3 1.1 0.6 1.3 53 2.0 79 64 25 -2 -1
60 1.2 0.9 1.5 58 2.2 87 82 32 9 4 1.3 0.7 1.6 63 2.4 95 77 30 -2 -1
70 1.4 1.1 1.7 67 2.6 101 96 38 11 4 1.5 0.9 1.9 73 2.8 110 90 35 -3 -1
80 1.6 1.2 2.0 77 2.9 115 110 43 12 5 1.8 1.0 2.1 84 3.2 126 103 41 -3 -1
90 1.8 1.4 2.2 86 3.3 130 123 49 14 5 2.0 1.1 2.4 94 3.6 141 116 46 -4 -1
100 2.0 1.5 2.4 96 3.7 144 137 54 15 6 2.2 1.2 2.6 104 4.0 157 129 51 -4 -2
150 3.0 2.3 3.6 143 5.5 216 206 81 23 9 3.3 1.9 4.0 156 6.0 235 193 76 -6 -2
200 4.1 3.0 4.8 191 7.3 287 274 108 30 12 4.4 2.5 5.3 207 7.9 313 257 101 -8 -3
250 5.1 3.8 6.0 238 9.1 359 343 135 38 15 5.5 3.1 6.6 259 9.9 391 322 127 -10 -4
300 6.1 4.6 7.2 285 10.9 430 411 162 46 18 6.6 3.7 7.9 311 11.9 469 386 152 -12 -5
500 10.2 7.6 12.1 475 18.2
717
686 270 76 30 11.1 6.2 13.1 517 19.8
781
643 253 -21 -8
T-5
CP-SX8350 with SL-702
(1400 x 1050, ±10%)
Screen
type
16 : 10 4 : 3
Screen
size
Projection
distance
Screen height
Screen
size
Projection
distance
Screen height
H
V a
min.
a
max.
b
c H V a
min.
a
max.
b
c
(inch)
m m m inch m inch cm inch cm inch m m m inch m inch cm inch cm inch
30 0.6 0.4 1.0 38 1.9 76 45 18 -4 -2 0.6 0.5 1.1 43 2.2 86 51 20 -5 -2
40 0.9 0.5 1.3 51 2.6 101 60 24 -6 -2 0.8 0.6 1.5 58 2.9 114 68 27 -7 -3
50 1.1 0.7 1.6 64 3.2 126 75 29 -7 -3 1.0 0.8 1.8 72 3.6 143 85 33 -8 -3
60 1.3 0.8 1.9 76 3.8 151 90 35 -9 -4 1.2 0.9 2.2 86 4.3 171 102 40 -10 -4
70 1.5 0.9 2.3 89 4.5 176 105 41 -10 -4 1.4 1.1 2.6 100 5.1 200 119 47 -12 -5
80 1.7 1.1 2.6 101 5.1 202 120 47 -12 -5 1.6 1.2 2.9 115 5.8 228 135 53 -14 -5
90 1.9 1.2 2.9 114 5.8 227 135 53 -13 -5 1.8 1.4 3.3 129 6.5 256 152 60 -15 -6
100 2.2 1.3 3.2 127 6.4 252 150 59 -15 -6 2.0 1.5 3.6 143 7.2 285 169 67 -17 -7
150 3.2 2.0 4.8 190 9.6 377 224 88 -22 -9 3.0 2.3 5.5 215 10.8 427 254 100 -25 -10
200 4.3 2.7 6.4 253 12.8 503 299 118 -30 -12 4.1 3.0 7.3 286 14.5 569 339 133 -34 -13
250 5.4 3.4 8.0 316 16.0 628 374 147 -37 -15 5.1 3.8 9.1 358 18.1 711 423 167 -42 -17
300 6.5 4.0 9.6 379 19.1 754 449 177 -45 -18 6.1 4.6 10.9 429 21.7 853 508 200 -51 -20
500 10.8 6.7 16.1 632 31.9
1256
748 294 -75 -29 10.2 7.6 18.2 715 36.1
1422
847 333 -85 -33
T-6
CP-WU8440 / CP-WU8450 with ML-703
(1920 x 1200, ±10%)
24
F-1
F-2
Computer
Computer
Access
point
USB
storage
device
USB
wireless
adapter
(optional)
External device
25
F-3
F-4
VCR/DVD/Blu-ray Disc
TM
player
Speakers
(with an ampli er)
(Wired)
Remote
control
Monitor
Another
projector
26
F-5
135mm
147mm
498mm
396mm
80mm
NOTE • The information in this manual is subject to change without notice. • The manufacturer
assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this manual. • The reproduction, transfer
or copy of all or any part of this document is not permitted without express written consent.
REMARQUE • Les informations contenues dans ce manuel peuvent faire l'objet dechangements sans
avertissement préalable. • Le fabricant ne prend aucune responsabilité pour les erreurs qui pourraient
se trouver dans ce manuel. • La reproduction, la transmission ou l'utilisation de ce document ou de
son contenu est interdite sauf autorisation spéciale écrite.
HINWEIS • Die Informationen in diesem Handbuch können ohne vorherige Ankündigung geändert
werden. • Der Hersteller übernimmt keine Verantwortung für etwaige in diesem Handbuch enthaltene
Fehler. • Die Vervielfältigung, Übertragung oder Verwendung dieses Dokuments oder dessen Inhalts
ist ohne ausdrückliche schriftliche Genehmigung nicht gestattet.
NOTA • La información de este manual puede sufrir modicaciones sin previo aviso. • El fabricante
no asume ninguna responsabilidad por los errores que puedan aparecer en este manual. • No
está permitida la reproducción, transmisión o utilización de este documento ni de su contenido sin
autorización expresa por escrito.
NOTA • Le informazioni riportate in questo manuale sono soggette a modica senza preavviso. • Il
produttore declina qualsiasi responsabilità per eventuali errori che potrebbero comparire nel presente
manuale. • E’ vietata la riproduzione, la trasmissione o l’utilizzo del presente documento o del suo
contenuto senza espressa autorizzazione scritta.
MERK • Informasjonen i denne håndboken kan endres uten varsel. • Produsenten påtar seg intet
ansvar for eventuelle feil som fremkommer i denne håndboken. • Reproduksjon, overføring eller bruk
av dette dokumentet eller deler av det, er ikke tillatt uten uttrykt skriftlig tillatelse.
OPMERKING • De informatie in deze handleiding kan zonder voorafgaande kennisgeving veranderd
worden. • De fabrikant neemt geen enkele verantwoordelijkheid voor de eventuele fouten in deze
handleiding. • Reproductie, overdracht of het gebruik van dit document is niet toegestaan, zonder
uitdrukkelijke toestemming van de betreffende partij.
NOTA • As informações contidas neste manual estão sujeitas a alterações sem aviso prévio.
• O fabricante não se responsabiliza por quaisquer erros que possam surgir neste manual.
• A reprodução, transmissão ou utilização deste documento ou do seu conteúdo não é permitida sem
autorização expressa por escrito.
ཚኪ๚ၜ!
•
Ԩກዐ਽ሜڦాඹᆶ੗ీփঢ়ᇨߢܸ݀ิՎ߸ă
•
Ԩׂ೗ڦ዆ሰኁܔԨກዐڦ਽ሜٱဃփ޶
ඪࢆሴඪă
•
࿄ঢ়ሎႹ൩ကް዆Ăገሜࢅ๑ᆩԨກڦևݴईඇևాඹă
꼁ꍱವ ꚭ꫑꾅韥녡鷍꽩넽鱉驩끞냵꾽隕꽻넩ꙵ陲뼍鱉넱넩넽걪鱽鲙ವ ꚭ뇑븽넍뇑눥녅鱉ꚭ꫑꾅
넽꽩꫑넍韥녡꿙ꌍ꾅鲵뼩꫑넱놽넍뗺넹鵹덵덵껿걪鱽鲙ವ ꚭ꫑驩끞넍넱ꜵ뿮냵놹ꜵꌱꓩ鲝냱ꈑ
ꚪꩡ뼍阥驍놹녡뼍꾡ꩡ끞뼍鱉阸냹놽鲵鞽뼞鱽鲙
NOTERA • Informationen i denna bruksanvisning kan komma att ändras utan förvarning. • Tillverkaren
påtar sig inget ansvar för eventuella fel i denna bruksanvisning. • Återgivning, översändande eller
användning av detta dokument eller dess innehåll är inte tillåten utan uttrycklig skriftligt medgivande.
ɉɊɂɆȿɑȺɇɂȿ • Содержание данного руководства может изменяться без предварительного
уведомления. • Производитель не несет ответственности за ошибки в данном руководстве.
• Воспроизведение, передача и использование данного документа или его содержания
запрещено без
письменного разрешения.
HUOM! • Tämän ohjekirjan tiedot voivat muuttua ilman eri ilmoitusta. • Valmistaja ei ota mitään
vastuuta ohjekirjassa mahdollisesti olevista virheistä. • Dokumentin tai sen sisällön jäljentäminen,
siirto tai käyttö ei ole sallittua ilmannimenomaista kirjallista valtuutusta.
UWAGA • Informacje podane w tym podręczniku mogą ulec zmianie bez uprzedzenia. • Producent
nie ponosi odpowiedzialności za ewentualne błędy w podręczniku. • Powielanie, przesyłanie lub inne
wykorzystanie tego dokumentu lub jego treści nie jest dozwolone bez wyraźnej pisemnej zgody.
Hitachi America, Ltd.
Business Solutions Group
900 Hitachi way, Chula Vista
CA 91914-3556 USA CANADA
Tel: +1 -800-448-2244
► http://www.hitachi-america.us/projectors
Hitachi Europe Ltd., Digital Media Group
Consumer Affairs Department
Whitebrook Park, Lower Cookham Road,
Maidenhead
Berkshire SL6 8YA UNITED KINGDOM
Tel: 0844 481 0297
Email: consumer.mail@hitachi-eu.com
Hitachi Europe S.A.S., Digital Media Group
31 bis rue du 35ème Régiment de l’aviation
ZAC DU CHENE, 69500 BRON FRANCE
Tel: 043 742 8430
Email: france.consommateur@hitachi-eu.com
Hitachi Europe GmbH
Am Seestern 18
40547 Düsseldorf GERMANY
Tel: 0211-5283-801
Email: Service.germany@hitachi-eu.com
Hitachi Europe S.A.
364, Kifissias Ave. & 1, Delfon Str.
152 33 Chalandri
Athens GREECE
Tel: 210 6837200
Email: tech.assist@hitachi-eu.com
Hitachi Europe S.r.l.
Via T. Gulli, 39
20147 MILANO ITALY
Tel: +39 02 487861
Email: customerservice.italy@hitachi-eu.com
Hitachi Europe S.A.
Gran Via Carles III, 86 Planta 5ª
Edificios Trade - Torre Este
08028 Barcelona SPAIN
Tel: 0034 934 092 5 50
Email: Atencion.Cliente@hitachi-eu.com
Hitachi Europe AB
Frösundaviks Alle 15
169 29 Solna SWEDEN
Sweden Tel: +46 8 562 711 00
Finland Tel: +358 10 8503 085
Norway Tel: +47 9847 3898
Denmark Tel: +46 8 562 711 00
► http://www.hitachidigitalmedia.com
Hitachi Australia Pty Ltd.
Suite 801, Level 8 , 123 Epping Road
North Ryde N.S.W 2113 AUSTRALIA
Tel: +61 -2-9888-4100
► http://www.hitachi.com.au
Hitachi (Hong Kong), Ltd.
18/F., Ever Gain Centre, 28 On Muk Street.,
Shatin, N.T. HONG KONG
Tel: +852 -2113-8883
► http://www.hitachi-hk.com.hk
Hitachi Sales (Malaysia) Sdn. Bhd.
Lot 12, Jalan Kamajuan, Bangi Industrial Estate,
43650 Bandar Baru Bangi, Selangor Darul Ehsan
MALAYSIA
Tel: +60 -3-8911-2670
► http://www.hitachiconsumer.com.my
Hitachi Home Electronics Asia (S) Pte. Ltd.
438A Alexandra Road #01-01/02/03
Alexandra Technopark, 119967 SINGAPORE
Tel: +65 -6536-2520
► http://www.hitachiconsumer.com.sg
Hitachi Sales Corp. of Taiwan
2
nd
Floor, No.65, Nanking East Road, Section 3,
Taipei 104 TAIWAN
Tel: +886-2-2516-0500
► http://www.hsct.com.tw
Hitachi Sales (Thailand), Ltd.
994, 996 Soi Thonglor, Sukhumvit 55 Rd.,
Klongtonnua, Vadhana, Bangkok 10110
THAILAND
Tel: +66 -2381-8381-98
► http://www.hitachi-th.com
Hitachi Consumer Electronics Co.,Ltd.
292 Yoshida-cho, Totsuka-ku
Yokohama 244-0817 JAPAN
► http://www.hitachi.co.jp/proj/
1 …

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Hitachi CP-X8160 bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Hitachi CP-X8160 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 10,2 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Hitachi CP-X8160

Hitachi CP-X8160 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Nederlands - 307 pagina's

Hitachi CP-X8160 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Deutsch - 307 pagina's

Hitachi CP-X8160 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Français - 307 pagina's

Hitachi CP-X8160 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Italiano - 307 pagina's

Hitachi CP-X8160 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Português - 307 pagina's

Hitachi CP-X8160 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Espanõl - 307 pagina's

Hitachi CP-X8160 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Polski - 307 pagina's

Hitachi CP-X8160 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Svenska - 307 pagina's


Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info